MODEL SR850

DSP Lock-In Amplifier

Stanford Research Systems

1290-D Reamwood Avenue

Sunnyvale, California 94089
Phone: (408) 744-9040 • Fax: (408) 744-9049
email: info@thinkSRS.com • www.thinkSRS.com

Copyright © 1992 by SRS, Inc.

All Rights Reserved.

Revision 2.0 (01/2009)

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

GENERAL INFORMATION Additional Menus 4-20

Safety and Preparation for Use 1-3 Entry Keys 4-20
Specifications 1-5 START/CONT and PAUSE/RESET 4-20
Abridged Command List 1-7 CURSOR 4-21
ACTIVE DISPLAY 4-21
MARK 4-21
GETTING STARTED
CURSOR MAX/MIN 4-22
Your First Measurements 2-1
AUTO RESERVE 4-22
The Basic Lock-in 2-3
AUTO GAIN 4-22
Displays and Traces 2-7
AUTO PHASE 4-22
Outputs, Offsets and Expands 2-13
AUTO SETUP 4-22
Scans and Sweeps 2-17
AUTOSCALE 4-22
Using the Disk Drive 2-23
PRINT to a PRINTER 4-23
Aux Outputs and Inputs 2-31
PRINT to a FILE 4-23
Trace Math 2-35
HELP 4-23
LOCAL 4-23
SR850 BASICS
What is a Lock-in Amplifier? 3-1 REAR PANEL 4-25
What Does a Lock-in Measure? 3-3 Power Entry Module 4-25
The SR850 Functional Diagram 3-5 IEEE-488 Connector 4-25
Reference Channel 3-7 RS232 Connector 4-25
Phase Sensitive Detectors 3-9 Parallel Printer Connector 4-25
Time Constants and DC Gain 3-11 PC Keyboard Connector 4-25
DC Outputs and Scaling 3-13 Rear Panel BNC Connectors 4-26
Dynamic Reserve 3-17 Aux Inputs (A/D Inputs) 4-26
Signal Input Amplifier and Filters 3-19 Aux Outputs (D/A Outputs) 4-26
Input Connections 3-21 X and Y Outputs 4-26
Intrinsic (Random) Noise Sources 3-23 Signal Monitor Output 4-26
External Noise Sources 3-25 Trigger Input 4-27
Noise Measurements 3-27 TTL Sync Output 4-27
Preamp Connector 4-27
OPERATION
FRONT PANEL 4-1 USING SRS PREAMPS 4-27
Power On/Off and Power On Tests 4-1
Video Display 4-1 MENUS
Soft Keys 4-2 Menu Guide 5-1
Keypad 4-2 Default Settings 5-2
Spin Knob 4-2 Reference and Phase Menu 5-3
Disk Drive 4-2 Input and Filters Menu 5-7
Front Panel BNC Connectors 4-2 Gain and Time Constant Menu 5-9
Output and Offset Menu 5-15
SCREEN DISPLAY 4-5 Trace and Scan Menu 5-17
Default Display 4-5 Display and Scale Menu 5-21
Data Traces 4-6 Aux Outputs Menu 5-25
Single/Dual Trace Displays 4-7 Cursor Setup Menu 5-29
Bar Graphs 4-9 Edit Mark Menu 5-31
Polar Graphs 4-10 Math Menu 5-33
Strip Charts 4-11 Disk Menu 5-41
Trace Scans, Sweeps and Aliasing 4-13 System Setup Menu 5-49
Settings and Input/Output Monitor 4-15
Menu Display 4-15
Status Indicators 4-16
PROGRAMMING
GPIB Communications 6-1
RS232 Communications 6-1
KEYPAD 4-19
Status Indicators and Queues 6-1
Normal and Alternate Keys 4-19
Command Syntax 6-1
Menu Keys 4-19

1-1
 Table of Contents
Interface Ready and Status 6-2 SERVICE
GET (Group Execute Trigger) 6-2 Circuit Boards 8-1
Adjusting DC Offset and CMRR 8-3
DETAILED COMMAND LIST 6-3 Adjusting Notch Filters 8-6
Reference and Phase 6-4
Input and Filter 6-6 CIRCUITRY
Gain and Time Constant 6-7
Circuit Boards 9-1
Output and Offset 6-9
Video Driver and CRT 9-1
Trace and Scan 6-10
CPU Board 9-3
Display and Scale 6-11
Power Supply Board 9-5
Cursor 6-13
DSP Logic Board 9-7
Mark 6-14
Analog Input Board 9-9
Aux Input and Output 6-15
Math 6-16
PARTS LISTS
Store and Recall 6-18
Power Supply Board 9-11
Setup 6-19
DSP Logic Board 9-13
Print and Plot 6-21
Analog Input Board 9-20
Front Panel and Auto Functions 6-22
CPU Board 9-27
Data Transfer 6-23
Chassis Assembly 9-32
Interface 6-28
Miscellaneous 9-35
Status Reporting 6-29
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
STATUS BYTE DEFINITIONS 6-30
CPU Board
Serial Poll Status Byte 6-30
Power Supply Board
Service Requests 6-31
DSP Logic Board
Standard Event Status Byte 6-31
Analog Input Board
LIA Status Byte 6-32
Error Status Byte 6-32

PROGRAM EXAMPLES
Microsoft C, Nationall Instr GPIB 6-33
QUICKBASIC, Nationall Instr GPIB 6-39

TESTING
Introduction 7-1
Preset 7-1
Serial Number 7-1
Firmware Revision 7-1
General Installation 7-2
Necessary Equipment 7-3
If A Test Fails 7-3

PERFORMANCE TESTS
Self Tests 7-5
DC Offset 7-7
Common Mode Rejection 7-9
Amplitude Accuracy and Flatness 7-11
Amplitude Linearity 7-13
Frequency Accuracy 7-15
Phase Accuracy 7-17
Sine Output Amplitude 7-19
DC Outputs and Inputs 7-21
Input Noise 7-23

PERFORMANCE TEST RECORD 7-25

1-2
 SAFETY AND PREPARATION FOR USE

WARNING
Dangerous voltages, capable of causing injury or death, are present in
this instrument. Use extreme caution whenever the instrument covers
are removed. Do not remove the covers while the unit is plugged into a
live outlet.

CAUTION outlet which has a properly connected protective

ground.
This instrument may be damaged if operated
with the LINE VOLTAGE SELECTOR set for the SERVICE
wrong AC line voltage or if the wrong fuse is
installed. Do not attempt to service or adjust this instrument
unless another person, capable of providing first
LINE VOLTAGE SELECTION aid or resuscitation, is present.

The SR850 operates from a 100V, 120V, 220V, or Do not install substitute parts or perform any unau-
240V nominal AC power source having a line fre- thorized modifications to this instrument. Contact
quency of 50 or 60 Hz. Before connecting the pow- the factory for instructions on how to return the in-
er cord to a power source, verify that the LINE strument for authorized service and adjustment.
VOLTAGE SELECTOR card, located in the rear
panel fuse holder, is set so that the correct AC in- FURNISHED ACCESSORIES
put voltage value is visible.
- Power Cord
Conversion to other AC input voltages requires a - Operating Manual
change in the fuse holder voltage card position
and fuse value. Disconnect the power cord, open ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
the fuse holder cover door and rotate the fuse-pull
lever to remove the fuse. Remove the small print- OPERATING
ed circuit board and select the operating voltage Temerpature: +10° C to +40° C
by orienting the printed circuit board so that the (Specifications apply over +18° C to +28° C)
desired voltage is visible when pushed firmly into Relative Humidity: <90% Non-condensing
its slot. Rotate the fuse-pull lever back into its nor-
mal position and insert the correct fuse into the NON-OPERATING
fuse holder. Temperature: -25° C to 65° C
Humidity: <95% Non-condensing
LINE FUSE
WARNING REGARDING USE WITH PHOTO-
Verify that the correct line fuse is installed before MULTIPLIERS AND OTHER DETECTORS
connecting the line cord. For 100V/120V, use a 1
Amp fuse and for 220V/240V, use a 1/2 Amp fuse. The front end amplifier of this instrument is easily
damaged if a photomultiplier is used improperly
LINE CORD with the amplifier. When left completely untermi-
nated, a cable connected to a PMT can charge to
The SR850 has a detachable, three-wire power several hundred volts in a relatively short time. If
cord for connection to the power source and to a this cable is connected to the inputs of the SR850
protective ground. The exposed metal parts of the the stored charge may damage the front-end op
instrument are connected to the outlet ground to amps. To avoid this problem, always discharge the
protect against electrical shock. Always use an cable and connect the PMT output to the SR850
input before turning the PMT on.

1-3
1-4
 SR850 DSP LOCK-IN AMPLIFIER

SPECIFICATIONS
SIGNAL CHANNEL
Voltage Inputs Single-ended (A) or differential (A-B).
Current Input 106 or 10 8 Volts/Amp.
Full Scale Sensitivity 2 nV to 1 V in a 1-2-5-10 sequence (expand off).
Input Impedance Voltage: 10 MΩ+25 pF, AC or DC coupled.
Current: 1 kΩ to virtual ground.
Gain Accuracy ±1% from 20°C to 30°C (notch filters off), ±0.2% typical.
Input Noise 6 nV/√Hz at 1 kHz (typical).
Signal Filters 60 (50) Hz and 120(100) Hz notch filters (Q=4).
CMRR 100 dB at 10 kHz (DC Coupled), decreasing by 6 db/octave above 10 kHz
Dynamic Reserve Greater than 100 dB (with no signal filters).
Harmonic Distortion <-90 dB to 10 kHz, <-80 dB to 100 kHz.

REFERENCE CHANNEL
Frequency Range 1 mHz to 102 kHz
Reference Input TTL (rising or falling edge) or Sine.
Sine input is1 MΩ, AC coupled (>1 Hz). 400 mV pk-pk minimum signal.
Phase Resolution 0.001°
Absolute Phase Error <1°
Relative Phase Error <0.001°
Orthogonality 90° ± 0.001°
Phase Noise External synthesized reference: 0.005° rms at 1 kHz, 100 ms, 12 dB/oct.
Internal reference: crystal synthesized, <0.0001° rms at 1 kHz.
Phase Drift <0.01°/°C below 10 kHz
<0.1°/°C to 100 kHz
Harmonic Detect Detect at Nxf where N<32767 and Nxf<102 kHz.
Acquisition Time (2 cycles + 5 ms) or 40 ms, whichever is greater.

DEMODULATOR
Zero Stability Digital displays have no zero drift on all dynamic reserves.
Analog outputs: <5 ppm/°C for all dynamic reserves.
Time Constants 10 µs to 30 s (reference > 200 Hz). 6, 12, 18, 24 dB/oct rolloff.
up to 30000 s (reference < 200 Hz). 6, 12, 18, 24 dB/oct rolloff.
Synchronous filtering available below 200 Hz.
Harmonic Rejection -90 dB

INTERNAL OSCILLATOR
Frequency 1 mHz to 102 kHz.
Frequency Accuracy 25 ppm + 30 µHz
Frequency Resolution 5 digits or 0.1 mHz, whichever is greater.
Frequency Sweeps Linear and Log.
Distortion f<10 kHz, below -80 dBc. f>10 kHz, below -70 dBc.1 Vrms amplitude.
Output Impedance 50 Ω
Amplitude 4 mVrms to 5 Vrms (into a high impedance load) with 2 mV resolution.
(2 mVrms to 2.5 Vrms into 50Ω load).
Amplitude Accuracy 1%
Amplitude Stability 50 ppm/°C
Outputs Sine output on front panel. TTL sync output on rear panel.
When using an external reference, both outputs are phase locked to the
external reference.

1-5
 SR850 DSP Lock-In Amplifier

INPUTS AND OUTPUTS

Channel 1 Output X, R, θ, or Trace 1-4. Traces are defined as A•B/C or A•B/C2 where A, B,
and C are selected from the quantities Unity, X, Y, R, θ, Xnoise, Ynoise,
Rnoise, Aux Inputs 1 through 4, or Frequency.
Output Voltage: ±10 V full scale. 10 mA max output current.
Channel 2 Output Y, R, θ, or Trace 1-4. Traces are defined as A•B/C or A•B/C2 where A, B,
and C are selected from the quantities Unity, X, Y, R, θ, Xnoise, Ynoise,
Rnoise, Aux Inputs 1 through 4, or Frequency.
Output Voltage: ±10 V full scale. 10 mA max output current.
X and Y Outputs Rear panel outputs of cosine (X) and sine (Y) components.
Output Voltage: ±10 V. 10 mA max output current.
Aux. Outputs 4 BNC Digital to Analog outputs.
±10 V full scale, 1 mV resolution. May be set to a fixed voltage or swept in
amplitude (linear or log). 10 mA max output current.
Aux. Inputs 4 BNC Analog to Digital inputs.
Differential inputs with1 MΩ input impedance on both shield and center
conductor. ±10 V full scale, 1 mV resolution.
Trigger Input TTL trigger input triggers each data sample and/or start of scan.
Monitor Output Analog output of signal amplifiers (before the demodulator).

DISPLAYS
Screen Format Single or dual display.
Displayed Quantities Each display may show one of the traces.
Traces are defined as A•B/C or A•B/C 2 where A, B and C are selected from
the quantities Unity, X, Y, R, θ, Xnoise, Ynoise, Rnoise, Aux Inputs 1
through 4, or Frequency.
Display Types Large numeric readout with bar graph, polar graph, and strip chart.
Chart Data Buffer 64k data points may be stored and displayed on strip charts. The buffer can
be configured as a single trace with 64k points, 2 traces with 32k points
each, or 4 traces with16k points each. The internal data sample rate ranges
from 512 Hz down to 1 point every 16 seconds. Samples can also be
triggered.

ANALYSIS FUNCTIONS
Smoothing 5 - 25 point Savitsky-Golay smoothing of trace regions.
Curve Fits Line, Exponential, and Gaussian fits of trace regions.
Calculator Arithmetic, trigonometric, and logarithmic calculations on trace regions.
Statistics Mean and standard deviation of trace regions.

GENERAL
Monitor Monochrome CRT. 640H by 480V resolution.
Adjustable brightness and screen position.
Interfaces IEEE-488, RS232 and Printer interfaces standard.
All instrument functions can be controlled through the IEEE-488 and RS232
interfaces. A PC keyboard input is provided for additional flexibility.
Preamp Power Power connector for SR550 and SR552 preamplifiers.
Hardcopy Screen dumps to dot matrix and HP LaserJet compatible printers. Data
plots to HP-GL compatible plotters (via RS232 or IEEE-488). Screens can
also be saved to disk as PCX image files.
Disk 3.5 inch DOS compatible format, 720 kbyte capacity.
Storage of data and setups.
Power 60 Watts, 100/120/220/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz.
Dimensions 17"W x 6.25"H x 19.5"D
Weight 40 lbs.
Warranty One year parts and labor on materials and workmanship.
1-6
 SR850 DSP Lock-In Amplifier

COMMAND LIST
VARIABLES i,j,k,l,m Integers
f Frequency (real)
x,y,z Real Numbers
s String

REFERENCE and PHASE page description

PHAS (?) {x} 6-4 Set (Query) the Phase Shift to x degrees.
FMOD (?) {i} 6-4 Set (Query) the Reference Source to Internal (0), Sweep (1) , or External (2).
FREQ (?) {f} 6-4 Set (Query) the Reference Frequency to f Hz.Set only in Internal reference mode.
SWPT (?) {i} 6-4 Set (Query) the Internal Sweep Type to Linear (0) or logarithmic (1).
SLLM (?) {f} 6-4 Set (Query) the Start Frequency to f Hz.Set only in Internal Sweep mode.
SULM (?) {f} 6-4 Set (Query) the Stop Frequency to f Hz.Set only in Internal Sweep mode.
RSLP (?) {i} 6-4 Set (Query) the External Reference Slope to Sine(0), TTL Rising (1), or TTL Falling (2).
HARM (?) {i} 6-5 Set (Query) the Detection Harmonic to 1 ≤ i ≤ 32767 and i•f ≤ 102 kHz.
SLVL (?) {x} 6-5 Set (Query) the Sine Output Amplitude to x Vrms. 0.004 ≤ x ≤5.000.

INPUT and FILTER page description

ISRC (?) {i} 6-6 Set (Query) the Input Configuration to A (0), A-B (1) , or I (2).
IGAN (?) {i} 6-6 Set (Query) the Current Conversion Gain to 1 MΩ (0) or 100 MΩ (1).
IGND (?) {i} 6-6 Set (Query) the Input Shield Groungind to Float (0) or Ground (1).
ICPL (?) {i} 6-6 Set (Query) the Input Coupling to AC (0) or DC (1).
ILIN (?) {i} 6-6 Set (Query) the Line Notch Filters to Out (0), Line In (1) , 2xLine In (2), or Both In (3).

GAIN and TIME CONSTANT page description

SENS (?) {i} 6-7 Set (Query) the Sensitivity to 2 nV (0) through 1 V (26) rms full scale.
RMOD (?) {i} 6-7 Set (Query) the Dynamic Reserve Mode to Max (0), Manual (1), or Min (2).
RSRV (?) {i} 6-7 Set (Query) the Dynamic Reserve to i th reserve. Set will switch to Manual Reserve Mode.
OFLT (?) {i} 6-7 Set (Query) the Time Constant to 10 µs (0) through 30 ks (19).
OFSL (?) {i} 6-8 Set (Query) the Low Pass Filter Slope to 6 (0), 12 (1), 18 (2) or 24 (3) dB/oct.
SYNC (?) {i} 6-8 Set (Query) the Synchronous Filter to Off (0) or On below 200 Hz (1).

OUTPUT and OFFSET page description

FOUT (?) i {, j} 6-9 Set (Query) the CH1 (i=1) or CH2 (2) Output Source to XY,R,θ,Trace 1, 2, 3, 4 (j=0...6).
OEXP (?) i {, x, j} 6-9 Set (Query) the X, Y, R (i=1,2,3) Offset to x percent and Expand to j. -105.00 ≤ x ≤ 105.00 and
1 ≤ j ≤ 256.
AOFF i 6-9 Auto Offset X, Y, R (i=1,2,3).

TRACE and SCAN page description

TRCD (?) i {, j, k, l, m} 6-10 Set (Query) the Definition of Trace i (1-4) to j•k/l and Store (m=1) or Not Store (0). j, k, l select
1, X, Y, R, q, Xn, Yn, Rn, Aux 1, Aux 2, Aux 3, Aux4, or F (j,k,l = 0...12). l=13-24 selects X2
through F2 .
SRAT (?) {i} 6-10 Set (Query) the Sample Rate to 62.5 mHz (0) through 512 Hz (13) or Trigger (14).
SLEN (?) {x} 6-10 Set (Query) the Scan Length to x seconds.
SEND (?) {i} 6-10 Set (Query) the Scan Mode to 1 Shot (0) or Loop (1).
TRIG 6-10 Software trigger command. Same as trigger input.

DISPLAY and SCALE page description

ASCL 6-11 Auto Scale the active display.
ADSP (?) {i} 6-11 Set (Query) the active display to Full (0), Top (1) or Bottom (2). Full screen is always active.
SMOD (?) {i} 6-11 Set (Query) the Screen Format to Single (0) or Up/Down dual (1) display mode.
MNTR (?) {i} 6-11 Set (Query) the Monitor Display to settings (0) or Input/Output (1).
DTYP (?) i {, j} 6-11 Set (Query) theFull (i=0), Top (i=1) or Bottom (i=2) Display Type to Polar (j=0), Blank (j=1),
Bar (j=2) or Chart (j=3).
1-7
 SR850 DSP Lock-In Amplifier

DTRC (?) i {, j} 6-11 Set (Query) theFull (i=0), Top (i=1) or Bottom (i=2) Display Trace to trace j (1,2,3,4).
DSCL (?) {x} 6-11 Set (Query) theFull (i=0), Top (i=1) or Bottom (i=2) Display Range to x.
DOFF (?) {x} 6-11 Set (Query) theFull (i=0), Top (i=1) or Bottom (i=2) Display Center value to x.
DHZS (?) {i} 6-12 Set (Query) theFull (i=0), Top (i=1) or Bottom (i=2) Display Horizontal Scale to 2 ms (0) through
200 ks (32) per div.
RBIN? i 6-12 Query the bin number at the right edge of the Full (i=0), Top (i=1) or Bottom (i=2) chart display.

CURSOR page description

CSEK (?) {i} 6-13 Set (Query) the active display Cursor Seek mode to Max (0), Min (1) or Mean (2).
CWID (?) {i} 6-13 Set (Query) the active display Cursor Width to Off (0), Narrow (1), Wide (2) or Spot (3).
CDIV (?) {i} 6-13 Set (Query) the active display Chart Divisions to 8 (0), 10 (1) or None (2).
CLNK (?) {i} 6-13 Set (Query) the Cursor Control Mode to Linked (0) or Separate (1).
CDSP (?) {i} 6-13 Set (Query) the active display Cursor Readout to Delay (0), Bin (1), Fsweep (2) or Time (3).
CMAX 6-13 Move active chart cursor to max or min. Same as pressing [CURSOR MAX/MIN] key.
CURS? i 6-13 Query the cursor horz,vert position of Full (0), Top (1) or Bottom (2) chart display.
CBIN (?) {i} 6-13 Set (Query) the center of the cursor region in the active chart display. i is the bin number.

MARK page description

MARK 6-14 Places a mark in the data buffer. Same as pressing [MARK] key.
MDEL 6-14 Delete the nearest mark to the left of the cursor. Same as pressing <Marker Delete> softkey.
CNXT 6-14 Move active chart cursor to next mark to the right.
CPRV 6-14 Move active chart cursor to next mark to the left.
MACT? 6-14 Query the number of active marks. Also returns the active mark numbers.
MBIN? i 6-14 Query the bin number of mark #i.
MTXT (?) i {,s} 6-14 Set (Query) the label text for mark #i.

AUX INPUT/OUTPUT page description

OAUX ? i 6-15 Query the value of Aux Input i (1,2,3,4).
AUXM(?) i{, j} 6-15 Set (Query) the Output Mode of Aux Output i (1,2,3,4). j selects Fixed (0), Log (1) or Linear (2).
AUXV (?) i {, x} 6-15 Set (Query) voltage of Aux Output i (1,2,3,4) to x Volts. -10.500 ≤ x ≤ 10.500. Fixed Output
Mode only.
SAUX (?) i {, x, y, z} 6-15 Set (Query) the Aux Output i (1,2,3,4) Sweep Limits to Start (x), Stop (y) and Offset (z) voltag-
es. 0.001 ≤ x,y ≤ 21.000 and -10.500 ≤ z ≤ 10.500.
TSTR (?) {i} 6-15 Set (Query) the Trigger Starts Scan? mode to No (0) or Yes (1).

MATH page description

SMTH i 6-16 Smooth the data within the active chart using 5 (0), 11 (1), 17 (2), 21 (3), 25 (4) point width.
COPR (?) {i} 6-16 Set (Query) the Calculator Operation to +, -, x, /, sin, cos, tan, √x, x 2 , log, 10x (i=0...10).
CALC 6-17 Do the Calculation selected by COPR with the argument set by CTRC or CARG.
CAGT (?) {i} 6-17 Set (Query) the Calculation Argument Type to Trace (0) or Constant (1).
CTRC (?) {i} 6-17 Set (Query) the Trace Argument to Trace i (1,2,3,4).
CARG (?) {x} 6-17 Set (Query) the Constant Argument value to x.
FTYP (?) {i} 6-17 Set (Query) the Fit Type to Linear (0), Exponential (1) or Gaussian (2).
FITT i, j 6-17 Fit the data within the chart region between i% and j% from the left edge. 0 ≤ i,j ≤ 100.
PARS ? i 6-17 Query the fit parameters a (0), b (1), c (2) or t0 (3).
STAT i, j 6-17 Statistically analyze the data within the chart region between i% and j% from the left edge.
0 ≤ i,j ≤ 100.
SPAR ? i 6-17 Query the Statistical results mean (0), standard dev (1), total (2) or delta time (3).

STORE AND RECALL FILE page description

FNAM (?) {s} 6-18 Set (Query) the current File Name to string s.
SDAT 6-18 Save the Active Display's Trace Data to the file specified by FNAM.
SASC 6-18 Save the Active Display's Trace Data in ASCII format to the file specified by FNAM.
SSET 6-18 Save the Settings to the file specified by FNAM.

1-8
 SR850 DSP Lock-In Amplifier

RDAT 6-18 Recall the Trace Data from the file specified by FNAM to the active display's trace buffer.
RSET 6-18 Recall the Settings from the file specified by FNAM.

SETUP page description

OUTX (?) {i} 6-19 Set (Query) the Output Interface to RS232 (0) or GPIB (1).
OVRM (?) {i} 6-19 Set (Query) the GPIB Overide Remote state to Off (0) or On (1).
KCLK (?) {i} 6-19 Set (Query) the Key Click to Off (0) or On (1).
ALRM (?) {i} 6-19 Set (Query) the Alarms to Off (0) or On (1).
THRS (?) {i} 6-19 Set (Query) the Hours to 0≤ i ≤ 23.
TMIN (?) {i} 6-19 Set (Query) the Minutes to 0 ≤ i ≤ 59.
TSEC (?) {i} 6-19 Set (Query) the Seconds to 0 ≤ i ≤ 59.
DMTH (?) {i} 6-19 Set (Query) the Month to 1 ≤ 1 ≤ 12.
DDAY (?) {i} 6-19 Set (Query) the Day to 1 ≤ 1 ≤ 31.
DYRS (?) {i} 6-19 Set (Query) the Year to 0 ≤ 1 ≤ 99.
PLTM (?) {i} 6-19 Set (Query) the Plotter Mode to RS232 (0) or GPIB (1).
PLTB (?) {i} 6-19 Set (Query) the Plotter Baud Rate to 300 (0), 1200 (1), 2400 (2), 4800 (3), 9600 (4).
PLTA (?) {i} 6-19 Set (Query) the Plotter GPIB Address to 0 ≤ i ≤ 30.
PLTS (?) {i} 6-19 Set (Query) the Plot Speed to Fast (0) or Slow (1).
PNTR (?) {i} 6-19 Set (Query) the Trace Pen Number to 1 ≤ i ≤ 6.
PNGD (?) {i} 6-20 Set (Query) the Grid Pen Number to 1 ≤ i ≤ 6.
PNAL (?) {i} 6-20 Set (Query) the Alphanumeric Pen Number to 1 ≤ i ≤ 6.
PNCR (?) {i} 6-20 Set (Query) the Cursor Pen Number to 1 ≤ i ≤ 6.
PRNT (?) {i} 6-20 Set (Query) the Printer Type to Epson (0), HP (1) or File (2).

PRINT AND PLOT page description

PRSC 6-21 Print the screen. Same as the [PRINT] key.
PALL 6-21 Plot the display(s).
PTRC 6-21 Plot the trace(s) only.
PCUR 6-21 Plot the cursor(s) only.

FRONT PANEL CONTROLS

AUTO FUNCTIONS page description
STRT 6-22 Start or continue a scan. Same as [START/CONT] key.
PAUS 6-22 Pause a scan. Does not reset a paused or done scan.
REST 6-22 Reset the scan. All stored data is lost.
ASCL 6-11 Auto Scale the active display.
ATRC (?) {i} 6-22 Set (Query) the active display to Top (0) or Bottom (1). Full screen is always active.
AGAN 6-22 Auto Gain function. Same as pressing the [AUTO GAIN] key.
ARSV 6-22 Auto Reserve function. Same as pressing the [AUTO RESERVE] key.
APHS 6-22 Auto Phase function. Same as pressing the [AUTO PHASE] key.
AOFF i 6-22 Auto Offset X,Y or R (i=1,2,3).
CMAX 6-22 Move Cursor to Max or Min. Same as pressing the [CURSOR MAX/MIN] key.

DATA TRANSFER page description

OUTP? i 6-23 Query the value of X (1), Y (2), R (3) or θ (4). Returns ASCII floating point value.
OUTR? i 6-23 Query the value of Trace i (1,2,3,4). Returns ASCII floating point value.
OAUX? i 6-23 Query the value of Aux Input i (1,2,3,4). Returns ASCII floating point value.
SPTS? i 6-23 Query the number of points stored in Trace i (1,2,3,4).
TRCA? i,j,k 6-23 Read k≥1 points starting at bin j≥0 from trace i (1,2,3,4) in ASCII floating point.
TRCB? i,j,k 6-23 Read k≥1 points starting at bin j≥0 from trace i (1,2,3,4) in IEEE binary floating point.
TRCL? i,j,k 6-24 Read k≥1 points starting at bin j≥0 from trace i (1,2,3,4) in non-normalized binary floating point.
FAST (?) {i} 6-25 Set (Query) Fast Data Transfer Mode On (1 or 2) or Off (0).On will transfer binary X and Y eve-
ry sample during a scan over the GPIB interface.
STRD 6-25 Start a scan after 0.5sec delay. Use with Fast Data Transfer Mode.

1-9
 SR850 DSP Lock-In Amplifier

INTERFACE page description

*RST 6-26 Reset the unit to its default configurations.
*IDN? 6-26 Read the SR850 device identification string.
LOCL(?) {i} 6-26 Set (Query) the Local/Remote state to LOCAL (0), REMOTE (1), or LOCAL LOCKOUT (2).
OVRM (?) {i} 6-26 Set (Query) the GPIB Overide Remote state to Off (0) or On (1).
TRIG 6-26 Software trigger command. Same as trigger input.

STATUS page description

*CLS 6-27 Clear all status bytes.
*ESE (?) {i} {,j} 6-27 Set (Query) the Standard Event Status Byte Enable Register to the decimal value i (0-255).
*ESE i,j sets bit i (0-7) to j (0 or 1). *ESE? queries the byte. *ESE?i queries only bit i.
*ESR? {i} 6-27 Query the Standard Event Status Byte. If i is included, only bit i is queried.
*SRE (?) {i} {,j} 6-27 Set (Query) the Serial Poll Enable Register to the decimal value i (0-255). *SRE i,j sets bit i (0-
7) to j (0 or 1). *SRE? queries the byte, *SRE?i queries only bit i.
*STB? {i} 6-27 Query the Serial Poll Status Byte. If i is included, only bit i is queried.
*PSC (?) {i} 6-27 Set (Query) the Power On Status Clear bit to Set (1) or Clear (0).
ERRE (?) {i} {,j} 6-27 Set (Query) the Error Status Enable Register to the decimal value i (0-255). ERRE i,j sets bit i
(0-7) to j (0 or 1). ERRE? queries the byte, ERRE?i queries only bit i.
ERRS? {i} 6-27 Query the Error Status Byte. If i is included, only bit i is queried.
LIAE (?) {i} {,j} 6-27 Set (Query) the LIA Status Enable Register to the decimal value i (0-255). LIAE i,j sets
bit i (0-7) to j (0 or 1). LIAE? queries the byte, LIAE?i queries only bit i.
LIAS? {i} 6-27 Query the LIA Status Byte. If i is included, only bit i is queried.

STATUS BYTE DEFINITIONS

SERIAL POLL STATUS BYTE (6-28) LIA STATUS BYTE (6-29)

bit name usage bit name usage

0 SCN No data is being acquired 0 RESRV Set when a RESRV overload is detected
1 IFC No command execution in progress 1 FILTR Set when a FILTR overload is detected
2 ERR Unmasked bit in error status byte set 2 OUTPT Set when a OUTPT overload is detected
3 LIA Unmasked bit in LIA status byte set 3 UNLK Set when reference unlock is detected
4 MAV The interface output buffer is non-empty 4 RANGE Set when detection freq crosses 200 Hz
5 ESB Unmasked bit in standard status byte set 5 TC Set when time constant is changed
6 SRQ SRQ (service request) has occurred 6 TRIG Set when unit is triggered
7 Unused 7 PLOT Set when a plot is completed

STANDARD EVENT STATUS BYTE (6-29) ERROR STATUS BYTE (6-30)

bit name usage bit name usage

0 INP Set on input queue overflow 0 Prn/Plt Err Set when an printing or plotting error occurs
1 Unused 1 Backup Error Set when battery backup fails
2 QRY Set on output queue overflow 2 RAM Error Set when RAM Memory test finds an error
3 Unused 3 Disk Error Set when a disk error occurs
4 EXE Set when command execution error occurs 4 ROM Error Set when ROM Memory test finds an error
5 CMD Set when an illegal command is received 5 GPIB Error Set when GPIB binary data transfer aborts
6 URQ Set by any key press or knob rotation 6 DSP Error Set when DSP test finds an error
7 PON Set by power-on 7 Math Error Set when an internal math error occurs

1-10
 GETTING STARTED

YOUR FIRST MEASUREMENTS

The sample measurements described in this section are designed to acquaint the first time user with the
SR850 DSP Lock-In Amplifier. Do not be concerned that your measurements do not exactly agree with these
exercises. The focus of these measurement exercises is to learn how to use the instrument.

It is highly recommended that the first time user step through some or all of these exercises before attempting
to perform an actual experiment.

The experimental procedures are detailed in two columns. The left column lists the actual steps in the experi-
ment. The right column is an explanation of each step.

Key Types There are two types of front panel keys which will be referred to in this
manual. Hardkeys are those keys with labels printed on them. Their func-
tion is determined by the label and does not change. Hardkeys are refer-
enced by brackets like this - [HARDKEY]. The softkeys are the six gray
keys along the right edge of the screen. Their function is labelled by a
menu box displayed on the screen next to the key. Softkey functions
change depending upon the situation. Softkeys will be referred to as the
<Soft Key> or simply the Soft Key.

Hardkeys The keypad consists of five groups of hardkeys. The ENTRY keys are
used to enter numeric parameters which have been highlighted by a soft-
key. The MENU keys select a menu of softkeys. Pressing a menu key
will change the menu boxes which are displayed next to the softkeys.
Each menu groups together similar parameters and functions. The
CONTROL keys start and stop actual data acquisition, select the cursor
and toggle the active display. These keys are not in a menu since they
are used frequently and while displaying any menu. The SYSTEM keys
output the screen to a printer and display help messages. These keys
can also be accessed from any menu. The AUTO keys perform auto
functions such as Auto Gain and Auto Phase.

Softkeys The SR850 has a menu driven user interface. The 6 softkeys to the right
of the video display have different functions depending upon the informa-
tion displayed in the menu boxes at the right of the video display. In gen-
eral, the softkeys have two uses. The first is to toggle a feature on and
off or to choose between settings. The second is to highlight a parameter
which is then changed using the knob or numeric keypad. In both cases,
the softkey selects the parameter which is displayed adjacent to it.

Knob The knob is used to adjust parameters which have been highlighted by a
softkey. Many numeric entry fields may be adjusted with the knob. In
addition, many parameters are adjusted only with the knob. These are
typically parameters with a limited set of values, such as sensitivity or
time constant. In these cases, the parameter is selected by a softkey.
The [CURSOR] key will set the knob function to scrolling the cursor
within the active chart display.

2-1
Getting Started

2-2
 The Basic Lock-in

THE BASIC LOCK-IN

This measurement is designed to use the internal oscillator to explore some of the basic lock-in functions.
You will need BNC cables.

Specifically, you will measure the amplitude of the Sine Out at various frequencies, sensitivities, time con-
stants and phase shifts. The "normal" lock-in display will be used throughout this exercise.

1. Disconnect all cables from the lock-in. Turn When the power is turned on with the backspace
the power on while holding down the [←] key depressed, the lock-in returns to its default
(backspace) key. Wait until the power-on tests settings. See the Default Settings list in the Menu
are completed. section for a complete listing of the settings.

The display is the "normal" lock-in display. The

lock-in setup is displayed across the top of the
screen. The sensitivity, reserve, time constant,
prefilters and input configuration are all easily visi-
ble. Watch how these indicators change as you
change parameters. The upper numeric readout
and bar graph shows the value of X (Rcosθ) and
the lower graph shows the the value of Y (Rsinθ).

2. Connect the Sine Out on the front panel to the The input impedance of the lock-in is 10 MΩ. The
A input using a BNC cable. Sine Out has an output impedance of 50Ω. Since
the Sine Output amplitude is specified into a high
impedance load, the output impedance does not
affect the amplitude.

The lock-in defaults to the internal oscillator refer-

ence set at 1.000 kHz. The reference mode (Intrnl)
and frequency are displayed at the bottom of the
screen. In this mode, the lock-in generates a syn-
chronous sine output at the internal reference
frequency.

The sine amplitude is 1.000 Vrms and the

sensitivity is 1 V(rms). Since the phase shift of the
sine output is very close to zero, the upper display
(X) should read close to 1.000 V and the lower dis-
play (Y) should read close to 0.000 V.

3. Press [AUTO PHASE] Automatically adjust the reference phase shift to

eliminate any residual phase error. This should set
the value of Y to zero.

4. Press [REF/PHASE] Display the Reference and Phase menu. The

phase shift (displayed in the top menu box) should
be close to zero.

2-3
 The Basic Lock-in

5. Press the <Rotate 90 deg> softkey. This adds 90° to the reference phase shift. The
value of X drops to zero and Y becomes minus the
magnitude (-1.000 V).

Press the <deg.> softkey. Highlight the phase shift.

Use the knob to adjust the phase shift until Y The knob can be used to adjust parameters which
is zero and X is equal to the positive are continuous, such as phase, amplitude and fre-
amplitude. quency. The final phase value should be close to
zero again.

Press [9] [0] [ENTER] Phase shifts can also be entered numerically.

The knob is useful for small adjustments while

numeric entry is easier when changing to a pre-
cise value or by a large amount.

Press [AUTO PHASE] Use the Auto Phase function to return Y to zero
and X to the amplitude.

6. Press <Ref. Frequency> Highlight the internal reference frequency menu.

Press [1] [2] [.] [3] [4] [5] [EXP] [3] [ENTER] Enter 12.345 kHz in exponential form. The meas-
ured signal amplitude should stay within 1% of 1 V
and the phase shift should stay close to zero (the
value of Y should stay close to zero).

Press [1] [0] [0] [0] [ENTER] Parameters can be entered in real or integer form
as well. In this case, the frequency is changed to
1.000 kHz.

The internal oscillator is crystal synthesized with

25 ppm of frequency error. The frequency can be
set with 5 digit or 0.1 mHz resolution, whichever is
greater.

7. Press <Sine Output> Highlight the sine output amplitude.

Use the knob to adjust the amplitude. As the amplitude is changed, the measured value
of X should equal the sine output amplitude.

Press [.] [0] [1] [ENTER] The amplitude may be entered numerically also.

The sine amplitude can be set from 4 mV to 5 V

rms into high impedance (half the amplitude into a
50 Ω load).

8. Press [GAIN/TC] Display the Gain and Time Constant menu.

Press [AUTO GAIN] The Auto Gain function will adjust the sensitivity so

2-4
 The Basic Lock-in

that the measured magnitude (R) is a sizable per-

centage of full scale.

9. Press <Sensitivity> Highlight the full scale sensitivity.

Use the knob to change the sensitivity to Parameters which are discrete values, such as
50 mV. sensitivity and time constant, can only be changed
with the knob. Numeric entry is not allowed for
Change the sensitivity back to 20 mV. these parameters.

10. Press <Time Constant> Highlight the time constant.

Use the knob to change the time constant to The values of X and Y become noisy. This is
300 µs. because the 2f component of the output (at 2 kHz)
is no longer attenuated completely by the low pass
filters.

Change the time constant to 3 ms. Let's leave the time constant short and change the
filter slope.

11. Press the <Filter db/oct.> softkey until 6 dB/oct Parameters which have their available options dis-
is selected. played within the menu box are selected by press-
ing the corresponding softkey until the desired
option is chosen.

The X and Y outputs are somewhat noisy at this

short time constant and only 1 pole of low pass
filtering.

Press <Filter db/oct.> again to select The outputs are less noisy with 2 poles of filtering.
12 dB/oct.

Press <Filter db/oct.> twice to select With 4 poles of low pass filtering, even this short
24 db/oct. time constant attenuates the 2f component rea-
sonably well and provides steady readings.

Press <Filter db/oct> again to select 6 db/oct. Let's leave the filtering short and the outputs noisy
for now.

12. Press [REF/PHASE] Display the Reference and Phase menu.

Press <Ref. Frequency> Highlight the internal reference frequency.

Press [5] [0] [ENTER] Enter 50 Hz for the reference frequency. With a
3 ms time constant and only 6 db/oct of filtering,
the output is totally dominated by the 2f compo-
nent at 50 Hz.

2-5
 The Basic Lock-in

13. Press [GAIN/TC] Display the Gain and Time Constant menu again.
Press <Synchronous> to select <200 Hz. This turns on synchronous filtering whenever the
detection frequency is below 200 Hz.

Synchronous filtering effectively removes output

components at multiples of the detection frequen-
cy. At low frequencies, this filter is a very effective
way to remove 2f without requiring extremely long
time constants.

The outputs are now very quiet and steady, even

though the time constant is very short. The
response time of the synchronous filter is equal to
the period of the detection frequency (20 ms in this
case).

This concludes this measurement example. You

should have a feeling for the basic operation of the
menus, knob and numeric entry. Basic lock-in
parameters have been introduced and you should
be able to perform simple measurements.

2-6
 Displays and Traces

DISPLAYS and TRACES

This measurement is designed to use the internal oscillator and an external signal source to explore some of
the display types. You will need a synthesized function generator capable of providing a 100 mVrms sine
wave at 1.000 kHz (the DS345 from SRS will suffice), BNC cables and a terminator appropriate for the gener-
ator function output.

Specifically, you will display the lock-in outputs when measuring a signal close to, but not equal to, the inter-
nal reference frequency. This setup ensures changing outputs which are more illustrative than steady outputs.
The displays will be configured to show X, Y, R and θ in bar graph and polar formats. The example Scans and
Sweeps demonstrates the use of the chart graph.

1. Disconnect all cables from the lock-in. Turn When the power is turned on with the backspace
the power on while holding down the [←] key depressed, the lock-in returns to its default
(backspace) key. Wait until the power-on tests settings. See the Default Settings list in the Menu
are completed. section for a complete listing of the settings.

The display is the "normal" lock-in display. The

lock-in setup is displayed across the top of the
screen. The sensitivity, reserve, time constant,
prefilters and input configuration are all easily visi-
ble. Watch how these indicators change as you
change parameters. The upper numeric readout
and bar graph shows the value of X (Rcosθ) and
the lower graph shows the the value of Y (Rsinθ).

2. Turn on the function generator, set the fre- The input impedance of the lock-in is 10 MΩ. The
quency to 1.0000 kHz (exactly) and the ampli- generator may require a terminator. Many genera-
tude to 500 mVrms. tors have either a 50Ω or 600Ω output impedance.
Use the appropriate feedthrough or T termination if
Connect the function output (sine wave) from necessary. In general, not using a terminator
the synthesized function generator to the A means that the function output amplitude will not
input using a BNC cable and appropriate agree with the generator setting.
terminator.
The lock-in defaults to the internal oscillator refer-
ence set at 1.000 kHz. The reference mode (Intrnl)
and frequency are displayed at the bottom of the
screen. In this mode, the internal oscillator sets
the detection frequency.

The internal oscillator is crystal synthesized so

that the actual reference frequency should be very
close to the actual generator frequency. The X and
Y displays should read values which change very
slowly. The lock-in and the generator are not
phase locked but they are at the same frequency
with some slowly changing phase.

3. Press [REF/PHASE] Display the Reference and Phase menu.

2-7
 Displays and Traces

Press <Ref. Frequency> Highlight the internal oscillator frequency.

Use the knob to change the frequency to By setting the lock-in reference 0.2 Hz away from
999.80 Hz. the signal frequency, the X and Y outputs are
0.2 Hz sine waves (difference between reference
and signal frequency). The X and Y output dis-
plays should now oscillate at about 0.2 Hz (the
accuracy is determined by the crystals of the gen-
erator and the lock-in).

4. Press [DISPLAY/SCALE] Display the Display and Scale menu.

The SR850 collects data in the form of traces.

There are 4 definable traces and only these trace
quantities may be displayed. The default definition
of these traces is X, Y, R and θ for traces 1, 2, 3
and 4.

The Display Scale menu box shows the display

parameters for the Full (screen), Top or Bottom
(split screen) displays. In this case, the Top dis-
play parameters are shown.

Press <Type/Trace> twice to highlight the dis- Each display shows one of the data traces. The
played trace number. Top display defaults to showing trace 1 which has
a default definition of X. Thus the top bar graph
shows the X output.

Use the knob to change the trace number to 3. Trace 3 has a default definition of R so showing
trace 3 on the top graph will display the quantity R.

R is phase independent so it shows a steady value

(close to 0.500 V).

Press [AUTO SCALE] [AUTO SCALE] automatically scales the active

display. The top display is the active display (as
indicated by the inverse trace identifier at the
upper left of the display).

5. Press <Full, Top or Bottom> to select Bottom. To modify the bottom graph, you must display the
bottom graph's parameters in the Display Scale
menu box. This also makes the bottom display the
active display (for autoscaling). The trace indicator
(at the upper left of each display) is highlighted on
the active display.

Press <Type/Trace> twice to highlight the dis- The bottom display defaults to trace 2 (Y).
played trace number.

Use the knob to change the trace number to 4. Trace 4 is θ. The phase between the reference
and the signal changes by 360° every 5 sec
(0.2 Hz difference frequency).

2-8
 Displays and Traces

Press [AUTO SCALE] [AUTO SCALE] automatically scales the active

display. In this case, the trace data is moving and
autoscaling may not do a very satisfactory job.

Press the <± Range> softkey. This is the fifth To manually set the graph scale, you set the range
softkey from the top. (±) and center value (@). The graph displays a
scale equal to the center value plus and minus the
range.

Press [1] [8] [0] [ENTER] In this case, set the bar graph to ±180°. The bar
graph should be a linear phase ramp at 0.2 Hz.

6. Press <Monitor> to select Input/Output. The monitor display at the top of the screen moni-
tors either the lock-in settings (sensitivity, time
constant, etc.) or the measured lock-in inputs and
outputs (X, Y, R, θ and Aux In 1-4).

The Input/Output monitor allows you to see all of

the measured quantities, even if they are not
shown on the larger displays.

7. Press <Format> to select Single. The screen is now setup for a single display. The
default display type for the full screen display is a
polar graph.

The polar graph plots the quantities X and Y on an

X-Y axis. The resulting vector has a length equal
to the magnitude R and has a phase angle relative
to the positive X axis equal to θ. In this case, since
the phase is rotating at the difference frequency,
the vector rotates at 0.2 Hz.

8. Press [REF/PHASE] Display the Reference and Phase menu.

Press <Ref. Frequency> Highlight the internal oscillator frequency.

Use the knob to adjust the frequency slowly to As the internal reference frequency gets closer to
try to stop the rotation of the signal vector. the signal frequency, the rotation gets slower and
slower. If the frequencies are EXACTLY equal,
then the phase is constant.

9. Use a BNC cable to connect the TTL SYNC By using the signal source as the external refer-
output from the generator to the Reference ence, the lock-in will phase lock its internal oscilla-
Input of the lock-in. tor to the signal frequency and the phase will be a
constant.

Press <Ref. Source> Highlight the reference source.

Use the knob to select External. Select external reference mode. The lock-in will
phase lock to the signal at the Reference Input.

2-9
 Displays and Traces

Press <Ref. Slope> to select Rising Edge. With a TTL reference signal, the slope needs to be
set to either rising or falling edge.

The signal vector on the polar graph will not rotate

since the phase is a constant. The actual phase
depends upon the phase difference between the
function output and the sync output from the
generator.

The external reference frequency (as measured by

the lock-in) is displayed at the bottom of the
screen. The reference mode is shown as Ext+ for
external TTL rising edge. The LOCK indicator
should be on (successfully locked to the external
reference).

10. Press [DISPLAY/SCALE] Display the Display and Scale menu.

Press <Format> to select Up/Down. Change the screen to dual display mode again.

11. Press [TRACE/SCAN] Display the Trace and Scan menu.

Press <1 / 2 / 3 / 4> to select trace 3. Trace 3 is defined as R and is displayed on the top
graph. Let's change the definition of trace 3 to
something else.

Press the second softkey, next to the trace Traces are defined as A•B/C. The quantities A, B,
definition, to highlight the R. and C are selected from the various quantities
measured by the lock-in.

Use the knob to change the A parameter from Trace 3 has now been redefined to be X. The top
R to X. graph now displays X. The trace definition is
shown at the upper left of each graph.

Press the second softkey to highlight the Traces may be defined to be ratios and products
denominator (C) of the trace definition. of 2 or 3 quantities.

Use the knob to change the C parameter from Trace 3 is now defined as X/R and is equal to
1 to R. cosθ, independent of the signal amplitude. The
traces can be defined to display the most useful
quantities for a given experiment. Trace data may
be stored in the data buffers. Scans and chart
graphs will be discussed in a later example.

12. Press [REF/PHASE] Change the reference phase shift to check that
trace 3 displays cosθ.

Press [AUTO PHASE] Automatically adjust the measured phase shift to

zero. The top display should show cos0° or 1.

Press <deg.> Highlight the phase shift.

2-10
 Displays and Traces

Using the keypad, enter a phase shift which is At a measured phase shift of 45°, trace 3 should
45° greater than the displayed phase shift. equal cos45° or 0.707.

This concludes this measurement example. You

should have a feeling for the basic operation of the
display types and trace definitions.

2-11
Displays and Traces

2-12
 Outputs, Offsets and Expands

OUTPUTS, OFFSETS and EXPANDS

This measurement is designed to use the internal oscillator to explore some of the basic lock-in outputs. You
will need BNC cables and a digital voltmeter (DVM).

Specifically, you will measure the amplitude of the Sine Out and provide analog outputs proportional to the
measurement. The effect of offsets and expands on the displayed values and the analog outputs will be
explored.

1. Disconnect all cables from the lock-in. Turn When the power is turned on with the backspace
the power on while holding down the [←] key depressed, the lock-in returns to its default
(backspace) key. Wait until the power-on tests settings. See the Default Settings list in the Menu
are completed. section for a complete listing of the settings.

The display is the "normal" lock-in display. The

lock-in setup is displayed across the top of the
screen. The sensitivity, reserve, time constant,
prefilters and input configuration are all easily visi-
ble. Watch how these indicators change as you
change parameters. The upper numeric readout
and bar graph shows the value of X (Rcosθ) and
the lower graph shows the the value of Y (Rsinθ).

2. Connect the Sine Out on the front panel to the The input impedance of the lock-in is 10 MΩ. The
A input using a BNC cable. Sine Out has an output impedance of 50Ω. Since
the Sine Output amplitude is specified into a high
impedance load, the output impedance does not
affect the amplitude.

The lock-in defaults to the internal oscillator refer-

ence set at 1.000 kHz. The reference mode (Intrnl)
and frequency are displayed at the bottom of the
screen. In this mode, the lock-in generates a syn-
chronous sine output at the internal reference
frequency.

The sine amplitude is 1.000 Vrms and the

sensitivity is 1 V(rms). Since the phase shift of the
sine output is very close to zero, the upper display
(X) should read close to 1.000 V and the lower dis-
play (Y) should read close to 0.000 V.

3. Connect the CH1 output on the front panel to The CH1 output defaults to X. The output voltage
the DVM. Set the DVM to read DC Volts. is simply (X/Sensitivity - Offset)xExpandx10V. In
this case, X = 1.000 V, the sensitivity = 1 V, the
offset is zero percent and the expand is 1. The
output should thus be 10 V or 100% of full scale.

2-13
 Outputs, Offsets and Expands

4. Press [REF/PHASE] Display the Reference and Phase menu.

Press <Sine Output> Highlight the sine output amplitude.

Press [.] [5] [ENTER] Enter an amplitude of 0.5 V. The top display
should show X=0.5 V and the CH1 output should
be 5 V on the DVM.

5. Press [OUTPUT/OFFSET] Display the Output and Offset menu. This menu
chooses which measured parameters or traces
are output on CH1 and CH2. In addition, the X, Y
and R offsets and expands are programmed in this
menu.

The Offset & Expand menu box displays the offset

and expand of either X, Y or R. In this case, the X
offset and expand is displayed. The <X,Y,R> soft-
key selects the which offset and expand is
displayed.

Press <Auto Offset> Auto Offset automatically adjusts the Xoffset (or Y
or R) such that X (or Y or R) becomes zero. The
offset should be about 50% in this case. Offsets
are useful for making relative measurements. In
analog lock-ins, offsets were generally used to
remove DC output errors from the lock-in itself.
The SR850 has no DC output errors and the offset
is not required for most measurements.

The offset affects both the displayed value of X

and any analog output proportional to X. The CH1
output should be zero in this case.

The highlighted OFFST indicator turns on at the

bottom left of the top display to indicate that the
displayed trace is affected by an offset.

Press <Offset> Highlight the X offset.

Press [4] [0] [ENTER] Enter an offset of 40% of full scale. The output off-
sets are a percentage of full scale. The percent-
age does not change with the sensitivity. The dis-
played value of X should be 0.100 V (0.5 V - 40%
of full scale). The CH1 output voltage is
(X/Sensitivity - Offset)xExpandx10V.

CH1 Out = (0.5/1.0 - 0.4)x1x10V = 1 V

Press <Expand> Highlight the X expand.

Set the expand to 10 using the knob or the With an expand of 10, the display has one more
numeric entry keys. digit of resolution (100.XX mV).

2-14
 Outputs, Offsets and Expands

The highlighted EXPD indicator turns on at the

bottom left of the top display to indicate that the
displayed trace is affected by an expand.

The CH1 output is

(X/Sensitivity - Offset)xExpandx10V. In this case,
the output voltage is

CH1 Out = (0.5/1.0 - 0.4)x10x10V = 10V

The expand allows the output gain to be increased

by up to 256. The output voltage is limited to
10.9 V and any output which tries to be greater will
turn on the OUTPT overload indicator at the
bottom left of the screen.

With offset and expand, the output voltage gain

and offset can be programmed to provide control
of feedback signals with the proper bias and gain
for a variety of situations.

Offsets do add and subtract from the displayed

values while expand increases the resolution of
the display.

6. Connect the DVM to the X output on the rear The X and Y outputs on the rear panel always pro-
panel. vide voltages proportional to X and Y (with offset
and expand). The X output voltage should be
10 V, just like the CH1 output.

The front panel outputs can be configured to

output different traces quantities while the rear
panel outputs always output X and Y.

Outputs proportional to X and Y (rear panel, CH1

or CH2) have 100 kHz of bandwidth. The CH1 and
CH2 outputs, when configured to be proportional
to R, θ, or a trace (even a trace defined as X or Y)
are updated at 512 Hz and have a 200 Hz band-
width. It is important to keep this in mind if you use
very short time constants.

7. Connect the DVM to the CH1 output on the Let's change CH1 to a trace.
front panel again.

Press <Expand> First, set the X expand back to 1.

Press [1] [ENTER]

Press <Offset> Set the X offset back to 0.0%.

Press [0] [ENTER] X Should be 0.500 V again and the CH1 output

2-15
 Outputs, Offsets and Expands

should be 5.0 V.

Press <Source> Highlight the CH1 source. The CH1 output is pro-
portional to this source.

Use the knob to select Trace1. CH1 can be proportional to X, R, θ, or Trace 1-4.
Choose Trace 1. Trace 1 has a default definition of
X so the CH1 output should remain 5.0 V (but its
bandwidth is only 200 Hz instead of 100 kHz).

8. Press [TRACE/SCAN] Display the Trace and Scan menu.

Traces are defined as A•B/C. The quantities A, B,

and C are selected from the various quantities
measured by the lock-in.

Press the second softkey, next to the trace Trace 1 is defined as X by default. Let's change it
definition, to highlight the X. to 1/X.

Use the knob to change the numerator from X Trace 1 is now 1•1/1 and the top display shows
to 1. 1.000

Press the second softkey twice to highlight the Change the denominator.
denominator (C) of the trace definition.

Use the knob to change the denominator from Trace 1 is now defined as 1/X. The top display
1 to X. shows Trace 1. The trace definition is shown at
the upper left of the top display. The trace units
are shown at the bottom center of the top display
(1/V).

Remember, X was 0.5V. Thus, 1/X is 1/0.5 = 2.0

(1/V). The display should show 2.0 (or very close).
Displays use the actual measured quantities to
calculate the value of a trace. If X was 5 mV, the
value of Trace 1 would be 1/5 mV or 200 (1/V).
Traces are calculated using Volts, degrees, and
Hz for the units of A, B and C.

The CH1 output voltage is 0.2V. This is because

trace output voltages are calculated using the
output voltages of the A, B and C quantities rather
than their displayed values. In this case, X=0.5V.
As an analog output voltage, this would be 5.0 V
(1/2 scale of 1V full scale sensitivity). The 1/X
output voltage is 1/5.0V or 0.2 V.

See the DC Outputs and Scaling discussion in the

Lock-In Basics section for more detailed
information.

2-16
 Scans and Sweeps

SCANS and SWEEPS

This measurement is designed to use the internal oscillator to explore some of the basic lock-in functions.
You will need BNC cables.

Specifically, you will measure the response of the line notch filters by sweeping the internal reference frequen-
cy and measuring the sine output. Traces and strip chart displays will be used to record X, Y, R and θ as the
signal is swept through the input notch filters.

1. Disconnect all cables from the lock-in. Turn When the power is turned on with the backspace
the power on while holding down the [←] key depressed, the lock-in returns to its default
(backspace) key. Wait until the power-on tests settings. See the Default Settings list in the Menu
are completed. section for a complete listing of the settings.

The display is the "normal" lock-in display. The

lock-in setup is displayed across the top of the
screen. The sensitivity, reserve, time constant,
prefilters and input configuration are all easily visi-
ble. Watch how these indicators change as you
change parameters. The upper numeric readout
and bar graph shows the value of X (Rcosθ) and
the lower graph shows the the value of Y (Rsinθ).

2. Connect the Sine Out on the front panel to the The input impedance of the lock-in is 10 MΩ. The
A input using a BNC cable. Sine Out has an output impedance of 50Ω. Since
the Sine Output amplitude is specified into a high
impedance load, the output impedance does not
affect the amplitude.

The lock-in defaults to the internal oscillator refer-

ence set at 1.000 kHz. The reference mode (Intrnl)
and frequency are displayed at the bottom of the
screen. In this mode, the lock-in generates a syn-
chronous sine output at the internal reference
frequency.

The sine amplitude is 1.000 Vrms and the

sensitivity is 1 V(rms). Since the phase shift of the
sine output is very close to zero, the upper display
(X) should read close to 1.000 V and the lower dis-
play (Y) should read close to 0.000 V.

3. Press [INPUT/FILTERS] Display the Input and Filters menu. This menu
allows the input configuration to be changed.

Press the <Line Notches> softkey until Both fil- With the line notch filters engaged, signal inputs at
ters are selected. 60 (50) Hz and 120 (100) Hz are removed. Note
that the line filter indicators at the top of the screen
are both on.

2-17
 Scans and Sweeps

4. Press [DISPLAY/SCALE] Display the Display and Scale menu. This menu
configures and scales the different screen displays
and graphs.

Press the <Type/Trace> softkey to select the Highlight the trace number for the Top Bar graph.
Trace number. The SR850 acquires and displays data in the form
of traces. The default definitions for the 4 traces
are X, Y, R and θ. These definitions may be
changed.

Use the knob to select Trace 3. Display the magnitude R (Trace 3) on the top
graph.

5. Press [REF/PHASE] Display the Reference and Phase menu.

Press <Ref. Source> Choose internal reference frequency sweep. In

this mode, the SR850 will sweep the internal oscil-
Use the knob to select Internal Sweep. lator from a start to a stop frequency.

6. Press <Sweep Menu> Set the sweep start and stop frequencies in this
submenu. Sweeps may be linear or logarithmic. In
this case, let's use a linear sweep.

Press <Start> Highlight the start frequency.

Press [4] [0] [ENTER]. Set the start frequency to 40 Hz. The reference
changes to 40.000 Hz as shown in the frequency
readout at the bottom center of the screen.

Press <Stop> Highlight the stop frequency.

Press [1] [6] [0] [ENTER]. Set the stop frequency to 160 Hz.

7. Press [GAIN/TC] Display the Gain and Time Constant menu.

Press <Time Constant> and use the knob to Choose a short time constant so that the frequen-
select 10 ms. cy can be swept in a reasonably short time.

Press <Synchronous> to select <200 Hz. Since the sweep frequencies are below 200 Hz,
you can take advantage of the synchronous filter
to remove the 2f component of the output without
using a long time constant.

8. Press [TRACE/SCAN] Display the Trace and Scan menu. This menu
allows the trace definitions to be changed and the
scan (sweep) to be configured. Trace data is sam-
pled and stored in the buffers at the sample rate.
Swept parameters (reference frequency in this
case) are also updated at the sample rate (imme-
diately after the data is sampled). The scan time

2-18
 Scans and Sweeps

sets the amount of time the buffer will store and

the length of any sweep.

In this measurement, let's leave the trace defini-

tions equal to the defaults and just change the
sample rate and scan time.

Press <Sample Rate> Highlight the sample rate.

Use the knob to select 32 Hz. The trace data will be sampled at 32 Hz and
stored in the buffer. After each data point is
recorded, the reference frequency will be updated.
This determines the resolution of our data along
the time axis.

Press <Scan Length> Highlight the scan length.

Press [1] [0] [0] [ENTER] Set the scan length to 100 seconds (1:40). This
configures the data buffer to hold 3200 data points
(32 Hz sample rate x 100 second scan length).
The scan length is also the sweep time for the
internal frequency sweep. Sweeps are always
coordinated with the data acquisition. In this case,
the sweep range is 120 Hz (40 Hz to 160 Hz) and
will take 100 seconds and be updated 3200 times.
Each stored data point will represent a frequency
increment of 0.0375 Hz (120/3200).

Press <1 Shot/Loop> to select 1 Shot. Scans can repeat (Loop) or stop when finished (1
Shot). Let's take a single scan of data.

Now you're finally ready to start the scan.

9. Press [START/CONT] The [START/CONT] key starts the scan and

sweep. The scan indicator at the bottom left corner
of the screen switches from STOP to Run 1 (single
scan in progress). The reference frequency read-
out at the bottom center displays the frequency
while sweeping.

As the frequency passes through 60 (50) Hz and

120 (100) Hz, the value of R should drop close to
zero as the signal sweeps through each input
notch filter.

When the scan is complete, the scan indicator

switches to DONE and the frequency should be
160 Hz.

Now let's try displaying the data in a more mean-

ingful way.

2-19
 Scans and Sweeps

10. Press [DISPLAY/SCALE] Display the Display and Scale menu.

Press <Format> to select Single. Choose a full screen display.

Press <Type> Highlight the display type (the default is polar).

Use the knob to select Chart. Let's view the stored data on a chart graph.

Press <Type> again to highlight the Trace To view R on the chart, you need to display Trace
number. Use the knob to select Trace 3. 3. The chart now displays R vs time (frequency).

Press [AUTO SCALE] Auto Scale the graph.

11. Press the <± Range> softkey. This is the fifth To manually adjust the graph scale, you change
softkey from the top. the center value and range. Highlight the range
(±).

Use the knob to select 1.000 e0 (1 V) for the The graph displays a vertical scale equal to the
range. center value plus and minus the range. The range
can also be entered numerically to any value. The
knob adjusts the range in a 1-2-5 sequence.

Press the <± Range> softkey again to high- Highlight the center value.
light the center value (@).

Press [0] [ENTER] Set the center to zero.

The graph always displays the center and range

below the chart in the units of the trace being dis-
played. The default horizontal scale is 10 seconds
per division. This can be changed but let's leave it
since the entire scan fits perfectly on the screen.

12. Press [CURSOR] This key activates the cursor. The knob now con-
trols the cursor. The cursor coordinates are dis-
played at the top right of the chart. When the
cursor coordinates are surrounded by a box, the
cursor is active and the knob will move the cursor.

Use the knob to read specific data points from The cursor horizontal position is displayed in units
the graph. of seconds (time from the end of the scan) and the
vertical position is in the trace units. Since this is
an internal frequency sweep, let's read the fre-
quency as the horizontal position.

Press [CURSOR SETUP] Display the Cursor Setup menu. The cursor can
be configured in many different modes. The cursor
can be defined as a region where the marker
seeks the max or min within the region. Cursors
on split screen charts can also be linked together.

Press <Cursor Readout> twice to select Set the cursor display to show the frequency and
Fsweep. trace value of each data point. The reference fre-

2-20
 Scans and Sweeps

quency of each point is displayed in the cursor

coordinate display.

The graph shows all 3200 data points at once.

Since the screen resolution only has 640 pixels
across, each X-axis value must represent multiple
data points. The cursor reads the Max, Min or
Mean of the data points graphed at each X-axis
position.

Press <Cursor Seek> to select Min. To read the notch filter minimum frequencies,
select Min.

Use the knob to read the frequencies of the The cursor displays the frequency and trace value
notch filter zeroes or minimums. of the smallest data point graphed at each horizon-
tal X-axis position.

13. Press [DISPLAY/SCALE] Show the Display and Scale menu again.

Press <Type/Trace> to highlight the Trace The SR850 can store up to 4 traces simultaneous-
number again. ly. In the default configuration, all 4 traces are
stored. Let's take a look at the other traces.

Use the knob to select Trace 1. Trace 1 is X. This corresponds to the real part of
the filter response.

Use the knob to select Trace 2. Trace 2 is Y. This corresponds to the quadrature
part of the filter response (or derivative of X).

Use the knob to select Trace 4. Trace 4 is θ. This is the phase response of the fil-
Press [AUTO SCALE]. ters. The phase approaches 180° at the exact filter
notch frequencies and approaches zero at fre-
quencies far from the notches. In many experi-
ments, the phase (or quadrature) measurements
yield a far more exact measure of the actual reso-
nant or peak frequency than R.

14. Press [PAUSE/RESET] Pressing the [PAUSE/RESET] key while DONE

will reset the scan and sweep. The stored data is
lost and the scan indicator shows STOP again.
Swept parameters (frequency in this case) return
to their start values and the graph is blanked.

15. Press {START/CONT] Let's take the data again, this time while displaying
the chart to show the scan data in progress.
The data scrolls in from the right. New points are
added at the right edge and the old points move to
the left. This is a strip chart type of graph.

The buffers can be configured for a single scan

(1 Shot) as in this measurement, or continuous

2-21
 Scans and Sweeps

looping (Loop). In the loop mode, scans repeat

indefinitely and the entire data buffer is filled at the
sample rate. When the end is reached, new points
are added at the beginning again, overwriting the
oldest data. This mode is convenient for always
storing the last buffer full of data. If something
worth saving occurs, simply pause the scan and
save, print or plot the data.

16. When the scan is complete, press Display the Trace and Scan menu.
[TRACE/SCAN].

Press <1 Shot/Loop> to select Loop. Choose the loop buffer.

Press [PAUSE/RESET] Reset the scan and data buffer.

Press [START/CONT] to start the scan again. This time, the scan and sweep will repeat at the
end. The buffer is capable of storing 16000 points
(for 4 traces). Each scan is 3200 points so 5 com-
plete sweeps can be stored in the buffer.

17. Press [PAUSE/RESET] ONCE. Pause the scan by pressing the [PAUSE/RESET]
key once while the scan is in progress. The scan
indicator shows PAUSE. Pressing this key again
will reset the data!!!

Press [START/CONT] Resume the scan with [START/CONT] key.

Let the scan run for more than 100 seconds so

data scrolls past the left edge of the graph.

18. Press [DISPLAY/SCALE] Show the Display and Scale menu.

Press <sec/div> (the last softkey). Highlight the horizontal chart scale.

Use the knob to select 20 S/div. Twice as much data will now be shown on the
graph. 2 complete sweeps can now be displayed
on the graph.

2-22
 The Disk Drive

USING THE DISK DRIVE

The disk drive on the SR850 may be used to store 3 types of files.

1. Data File
This includes the data in the active display trace. In addition to the data, the instrument state (sensitivity,
input configuration, time constant, reference, scan parameters, aux outputs) and the trace definition of
the stored trace are saved. Data files are recalled into the trace buffer of the active display. If the
present trace buffer is configured to hold less points than the stored trace, then points are recalled start-
ing with the oldest point in the stored trace until the trace buffer is filled. The stored instrument state and
the trace definition of the recalled trace are recalled as well. When data is recalled from disk, the instru-
ment state is changed to the state in effect when the data was stored!

2. ASCII Data File

This file saves the data in the active display trace in ASCII format. These files may not be recalled to the
display. This format is convenient when transferring data to a PC application. ASCII files are much
larger than the binary data file for the same trace.

3. Settings File
This files stores the lock-in settings. This includes the instrument state (see Data file) as well as the
system setup (printer, plotter, etc.) Recalling this file will change the lock-in setup to that stored in the
file.

The disk drive uses double-sided, double density (DS/DD) 3.5" disks. The disk capacity is 720k. The SR850
uses the DOS format. A disk which was formatted on a PC or PS2 (for 720k) may be used. Files written by
the SR850 may be copied or read on a DOS computer.

This measurement is designed to familiarize the user with the disk drive. We will use the internal oscillator to
provide a signal so that there is some data to save and recall. Specifically, you will save and recall a data file
and a settings file.

STORING AND RECALLING DATA

1. Disconnect all cables from the lock-in. Turn When the power is turned on with the backspace
the power on while holding down the [←] key depressed, the lock-in returns to its default
(backspace) key. Wait until the power-on tests settings. See the Default Settings list in the Menu
are completed. section for a complete listing of the settings.

The display is the "normal" lock-in display. The

lock-in setup is displayed across the top of the
screen. The upper numeric readout and bar graph
shows the value of X (Rcosθ) and the lower graph
shows the the value of Y (Rsinθ).

2. Connect the Sine Out on the front panel to the The input impedance of the lock-in is 10 MΩ. The
A input using a BNC. Sine Out has an output impedance of 50Ω. Since
the Sine Output amplitude is specified into a high
impedance load, the output impedance does not
affect the amplitude.

The lock-in defaults to the internal oscillator refer-

2-23
 The Disk Drive

ence set at 1.000 kHz. The reference mode (Intrnl)

and frequency are displayed at the bottom of the
screen. In this mode, the lock-in generates a syn-
chronous sine output at the internal reference
frequency.

The sine amplitude is 1.000 Vrms and the

sensitivity is 1 V(rms). Since the phase shift of the
sine output is very close to zero, the upper display
(X) should read close to 1.000 V and the lower dis-
play (Y) should read close to 0.000 V.

3. Press [AUTO PHASE] Automatically adjust the phase shift so that Y is

zero and X is equal to the magnitude.

4. Press [DISPLAY/SCALE] Show the Display and Scale menu.

Press <Format> to select Single display. Change the screen to a full screen display.

Press <Type> Highlight the display type.

Use the knob to adjust the display type to With the chart display, we can see the data stored
Chart. in the trace buffers.

5. Press [TRACE/SCAN] Display the Trace and Scan menu.

Press <Scan Length> Highlight the scan length.

Press [1] [0] [0] [ENTER] Set the scan length to 100 seconds. At the default
sample rate of 1 Hz, this represents 100 points in
the scan.

Press <1 Shot/Loop> to select 1 Shot. Take one scan and then stop.

6. Press [REF/PHASE] Display the Reference and Phase menu.

Press [START/CONT] Start the scan. The quantity X is sampled and

stored at a rate of 1 Hz. The trace buffer is
graphed on the chart display as the data is taken.

Press <Rotate 90 deg.> a few times during the Each time the phase is shifted by 90°, the value of
scan to generate some changes in the data. X changes from (plus or minus) the signal ampli-
tude to zero and back.

After 100 seconds, the scan will finish and we can

save the graph on disk.

7. Put a blank double-sided, double density Use a blank if disk if possible, otherwise any disk
(DS/DD)3.5" disk into the drive. that you don't mind formatting will do. Make sure
the write protect tab is off.

2-24
 The Disk Drive

8. Press [DISK] Display the Disk menu.

Press <Disk Utils> Choose Disk Utilities.

Press <Disk Format> Make sure that the disk does not contain any infor-
mation that you want. Formatting the disk takes
about a minute.

Press <Return> Go back to the main Store and Recall menu.

Press <Data Save> Display the Data Save menu.

Press <File Name> Now we need a file name.

Press [ALT] [ALT] lets you enter the letter characters printed
below each key. The numbers function as normal.

Press [D] [A] [T] [A] [1] [ALT] Type a file name such as DATA1 (or any legal
DOS file name) and turn off the ALT mode.

Press <Data Save> This saves the trace data which is displayed on
the active display to disk using the file name speci-
fied above. If the entered file name has no exten-
sion, then the extension .85T is appended to the
file name.

All stored data points in the selected trace are

saved. Only the trace in the active display is
saved. In this case, only trace 1 (X) is saved, even
though the other traces have data stored.

In addition to the data, the instrument state (most

lock-in parameters, scan parameters, and the
active trace definition) is stored.

9. Press [DISPLAY/SCALE] Let's change the display to show another trace.

Press <Type/Trace> twice to highlight the The other traces are stored in the buffer and can
trace number. be displayed at any time.

Use the knob to change the trace number to 2. This displays trace 2 (Y) on the chart so we can
save it also.

10. Press [DISK] Display the Disk menu.

Press <Data Save> Choose the Data Save menu.

Press <File Name> Save trace 2 (Y) using a new file name. This way
you can have multiple files in the disk catalog.

Press [ALT] [D] [A] [T] [A] [2] [ALT] Use the file name DATA2 (or any legal DOS file
name) and turn off the ALT mode.

2-25
 The Disk Drive

Press <Data Save> Save Trace 2.

11. Press <Catalog> to select On. Display the disk catalog. This display lists all of the
files on the disk. The files which you just saved
should appear in the catalog. Each file has a
name, extension, and type. The file type for binary
trace data is TRC.

Press <Return> Go back to the main Store and Recall menu.

12. Press [PAUSE RESET] Reset the scan. This clears the data buffers within
the lock-in.

13. Press <Data Recall> Display the Data Recall menu.

Press <Catalog> to select On. Display the disk catalog. The 2 files which you just
saved should be listed.

Use the knob to select the first file. The knob chooses a file in the catalog display.
Let's recall the X data (the file made by saving
Trace 1).

Press <Data Recall> This recalls the data file from disk and stores it in
the active display trace. The active display trace is
redefined to agree with the recalled data trace def-
inition. In this case, the data is recalled into Trace
2 (since it is currently being shown on the active
display). Trace 2 becomes defined as X since that
is the trace definition of the recalled data.

Data acquisition is paused so no new data will be

taken.

If the active display is not a chart, the data is still

recalled into the trace which is shown by the active
display. For example, if the active display is a bar
graph showing Trace 2, then the recalled data fills
Trace 2. The trace is redefined to agree with the
recalled data and the bar graph will show the
present value of the redefined trace.

Data files may not be recalled into traces which

are not presently being stored.

14. Press [DISPLAY/SCALE] Show the Display and Scale menu.

Press <Format> to select Up/Down Choose the dual display format.

Press<Type> Highlight the Top display type.

2-26
 The Disk Drive

Use the knob to select the Chart display. Display two charts.

Press <Full, Top or Bottom> to select Bottom. Select the bottom display. The bottom display type
should be highlighted.

Use the knob to select the Chart display for Both displays should be charts.
the bottom display.

Press [AUTO SCALE] Auto scale the bottom display. The [AUTO
SCALE] will scale the active display. In this case,
the bottom display is active since we just changed
it. The active display shows its trace number in
inverse at the upper left of the display.

Note that both Trace 1 (top) and Trace 2 (bottom)

are defined as X. Trace 2 is the recalled X data.
Trace 1, which was empty before the data was
recalled, has been filled with zeroes so that its
length agrees with the recalled trace.

All stored traces must have the same length. If the

recalled data trace has less points than existing
traces in memory, then the recalled trace is
padded with zeroes until it is the same length. If
the recalled data has more points than the existing
traces in memory (as was the case here), the
existing traces are padded with zeroes until they
are the same length as the recalled trace. Data is
never destroyed in the recall process.

If the recalled trace has more points than the exist-

ing trace buffer allocation (16k points for 4 stored
traces, 32k points for 2 stored traces, or 64k points
for 1 stored trace), then as many points are
recalled as will fit in the existing trace buffer. The
other existing traces are either padded with zeroes
or left alone, depending upon how many points are
presently stored.

Press [ACTIVE DISPLAY] Make the top display active. The top display trace
number should be highlighted at the upper left of
the top display. This makes Trace 1 the active dis-
play trace.

15. Press [DISK] Let's recall the stored Y trace into Trace 1.

Press <Data Recall> Display the Data Recall menu.

Press <Catalog> to select On. Display the disk catalog.

Use the knob to select the second file. The knob chooses a file in the catalog display.
Let's recall the Y data (the file made by saving
Trace 2).

2-27
 The Disk Drive

Press <Data Recall> This recalls the data file from disk and stores it in
the active display trace. The active display trace is
redefined to agree with the recalled data trace def-
inition. In this case, the data is recalled into Trace
1 (since it is currently being shown on the active
display). Trace 1 becomes defined as Y since that
is the trace definition of the recalled data.

The existing data in Trace 2 (bottom display) is not

changed.

Press [AUTO SCALE] Auto Scale the top display.

In general, the existing lock-in state may not agree

with the state stored in the recalled data file. In this
case, the lock-in state is also recalled along with
the data. Existing data in other traces is not
destroyed but may lose their meaning given the
new lock-in state. For example, if the existing data
sample rate is 1 Hz and data is stored in the
traces, recalling a data file whose data was stored
at 2 Hz will change the sample rate to 2 Hz. The
existing data is not destroyed but will be displayed
as if the data was sampled at 2 Hz. If the state
was not recalled with the data, then the recalled
data would have no meaning. This way, the
recalled data is meaningful. Existing data is pre-
sumably more easily recaptured and can also be
saved if important.

2-28
 The Disk Drive

STORING AND RECALLING SETTINGS

1. Turn the lock-in on while holding down the [←] When the power is turned on with the backspace
(backspace) key. Wait until the power-on tests key depressed, the lock-in returns to its default
are completed. Disconnect any cables from settings. See the Default Settings list in the Menu
the lock-in. section for a complete listing of the settings.

Change the lock-in setup so that we have a non-

default setup to save.

2. Press [GAIN/TC] Show the Gain and Time Constant menu.

Press <Sensitivity> Highlight the full scale sensitivity.

Use the knob to change the sensitivity to Select 100 mV.

100 mV.

Press <Time Constant> Highlight the time constant.

Use the knob to select 1 S. Select 1 second.

3. Press [DISK] Display the Disk menu.

Press <Settings Save> Choose the Settings Save menu.

Press <File Name> Now we need a file name.

Press [ALT] [ALT] lets you enter the letters printed below each
key. The numbers function as normal.

Press [T] [E] [S] [T] [1] [ALT] Type a file name such as TEST1 (or any legal
DOS file name) and turn off the ALT mode.

Press <Settings Save> This saves the setup to disk using the file name
specified above. If the entered file name has no
extension, then the extension .85S is appended to
the file name.

4. Turn the lock-in off and on while holding down Change the lock-in setup back to the default
the [←] (backspace) key. Wait until the power- setup. Now let's recall the lock-in setup that we
on tests are complete. just saved.

Press [GAIN/TC] Check that the sensitivity and time constant are 1V
and 100 ms (default values).

5. Press [DISK] Display the Disk menu.

Press <Settings Recall> Choose the Settings Recall menu.

2-29
 The Disk Drive

Press <Catalog> Display the disk catalog listing. Note that settings
files have the file type SET.

Use the knob to select the settings file which When the disk catalog is displayed, the knob high-
you just saved. lights a file. Use the knob to choose the file TEST1
to recall.

6. Press <Settings Recall> This recalls the settings from the file TEST1. The
lock-in settings are changed to those stored in
TEST1.

Press [GAIN/TC] The sensitivity and time constant should be the

same as those in effect when you created the file.

Settings files store the lock-in state (sensitivity,

time constant, reference, etc.), the display setup
(display format, type, trace parameters, etc.) as
well as the system setup (plotter, printer, interface
settings, etc.).

2-30
 Aux Outputs and Inputs

AUX OUTPUTS and INPUTS

This measurement is designed to illustrate the use of the Aux Outputs and Inputs on the rear panel. You will
need BNC cables and a digital voltmeter (DVM).

Specifically, you will set the Aux Output voltages and measure them with the DVM. These outputs will then be
connected to the Aux Inputs to simulate external DC voltages which the lock-in can measure.

1. Disconnect all cables from the lock-in. Turn When the power is turned on with the backspace
the power on while holding down the [←] key depressed, the lock-in returns to its default
(backspace) key. Wait until the power-on tests settings. See the Default Settings list in the Menu
are completed. section for a complete listing of the settings.

2. Connect Aux Out 1 on the rear panel to the The 4 Aux Outputs can provide programmable
DVM. Set the DVM to read DC volts. voltages between -10 and +10 volts. The outputs
can be a fixed voltage or they can sweep with the
scan.

3. Press [AUX OUTPUTS] Display the Aux Output menu.

Press <Voltage> Highlight the output voltage of Aux Out 1.

Press [1] [0] [ENTER] Change the output to 10V. The DVM should dis-
play 10.0 V. The knob can also be used to adjust
the voltages.

Press [-] [5] [ENTER] Change the output to -5V. The DVM should dis-
play -5.0 V.

The 4 outputs are useful for controlling other

parameters in an experiment, such as pressure,
temperature, wavelength, etc.

4. Press [DISPLAY/SCALE] Show the Display and Scale menu.

Press <Monitor> to select Input/Output. Change the monitor display at the top of the
screen to show the Aux Inputs (A1, A2, A3 and
A4).

The Aux Inputs can read 4 analog voltages. These

inputs are useful for monitoring and measuring
other parameters in an experiment, such as pres-
sure, temperature, position, etc.

We'll use Aux Out 1 to provide an analog voltage

to measure.

2-31
 Aux Outputs and Inputs

5. Disconnect the DVM from Aux Out 1. Connect The A1 monitor should now display -5 V. The mon-
Aux Out 1 to Aux In 1 on the rear panel. itor display shows all 4 Aux Inputs. To display and
save the Aux Input values, a trace needs to be
defined to measure an Aux Input.

6. Press [TRACE/SCAN] Display the Trace and Scan menu.

Press the second softkey, next to the trace Trace 1 is defined as X. Let's change it to Aux
definition, to highlight the X. Input 1.

Use the knob to change the A parameter from The Aux Inputs are abbreviated AI1, AI2, AI3 and
X to AI1. AI4. Trace 1 is now defined as AI1. The top graph
shows trace 1 and should display -5.0 V.

The traces can measure Aux Inputs directly. In

addition, these inputs can be used to multiply or
divide other quantities (such as X, Y or R) for ratio
normalization or gain modulation.

Press [AUTO SCALE] Auto Scale the top bar graph.

Now let's setup a voltage sweep on Aux Output 1.

7. Press <Scan Length> Highlight the scan length.

Press [1] [0] [0] [ENTER] Set the scan time to 100 seconds. The sample
rate is 1 Hz so the scan is 100 samples long.

8. Press [AUX OUTPUTS] Display the Aux Output menu again.

Press <Fixed / Log / Linear> twice to select Choose a linear sweep for Aux Output 1. Each
Linear. Aux Output may be swept in voltage in either log
or linear fashion.

Press <Start> Highlight the start voltage.

Press [1] [ENTER] Enter 1 V for the start voltage. The Aux 1 output
changes to 1 V since data acquisition is stopped
right now. All swept parameters return to their start
values when a scan is stopped.

Press <Stop> Highlight the stop voltage.

Press [5] [ENTER] Enter 5 V for the stop voltage.

The offset voltage is used to offset the sweep with-

out changing the start and stop. For log (exponen-
tial) sweeps, the offset allows much more flexibility
in defining the range and acceleration of a sweep.

9. Press [START/CONT] Start the scan. Aux Out 1 will linearly ramp from

2-32
 Aux Outputs and Inputs

1 V to 5 V in 100 seconds updating every second.

The output voltage is measured on Aux In 1,
recorded in Trace 1 and displayed on the top
graph.

10. Press [DISPLAY/SCALE] Show the Display and Scale menu.

Press <Type / Trace> to highlight the type of The top display is a bar graph. Let's change it to a
the top display. chart to show the history of Aux In 1.

Use the knob to change the display type to The chart display shows the history of the sweep.
Chart.
The SR850 can be used as a general purpose 4
channel digital chart recorder. The displays can be
scaled vertically and horizontally with full cursor
readouts. Data can be stored on disk and output to
a printer or plotter.

2-33
Aux Outputs and Inputs

2-34
 Trace Math

TRACE MATH
This example is designed to familiarize the user with the trace math functions in the lock-in. You will need
BNC cables and a 50Ω terminator.

Specifically, you will record the input noise in a trace and perform various calculations with the trace. The
internal oscillator will also be used to provide signal data for curve fits.

There are a few points to remember about the trace math functions.

Math functions may only be performed on trace data which is stored in a trace buffer and displayed in
the active chart display. Data which are not within the time window of the chart are not operated upon. Use
the horizontal chart scale to select the size of the time window and move the cursor to pan the window to the
desired portion of the trace buffer. Data which exceeds the upper or lower display range of the graph are, of
course, operated upon.

The amount of time a math function takes to complete depends upon its complexity and the number of data
points which are operated on. For example, 25-point smoothing takes longer than 5-point smoothing while
each type of smoothing takes longer the more points there are. Do not operate on more points than
necessary.

Math functions can only be performed while data acquisition is stopped, either by pausing or finishing a scan.
Some math operations change the stored trace data. Resuming a scan after smoothing, for example, will
result in a trace where a region of the trace is smoothed and other regions are not.

1. Disconnect all cables from the lock-in. Turn When the power is turned on with the backspace
the power on while holding down the [←] key depressed, the lock-in returns to its default
(backspace) key. Wait until the power-on tests settings. See the Default Settings list in the Menu
are completed. section for a complete listing of the settings.

The display is the "normal" lock-in display. The

lock-in setup is displayed across the top of the
screen. The upper numeric readout and bar graph
shows the value of X (Rcosθ) and the lower graph
shows the the value of Y (Rsinθ).

2. Connect a 50Ω terminator to the A input. The input impedance of the lock-in is 10 MΩ. The
terminator effectively provides a short at the input
so that the input noise is predominantly the volt-
age noise of the input transistors.

The lock-in defaults to the internal oscillator refer-

ence set at 1.000 kHz. All measurements will be
made at 1 kHz in this example.

3. Press [GAIN/TC] Display the Gain and Time Constant menu.

Press <Sensitivity> Highlight the sensitivity.

2-35
 Trace Math

Use the knob to select 50 nV. To measure the input noise, we need to use an
appropriate sensitivity.

4. Press [TRACE/SCAN] Display the Trace and Scan menu.

Press <Sample Rate> Since the time constant is 100 ms, we need a
sample rate greater than 1 Hz to record the output.

Use the knob to change the sample rate to Choose 16 Hz as the sample rate.
16 Hz.
Leave the scan mode on Loop. Data will be
recorded indefinitely with the trace buffer storing
the last 16k (1000 seconds) of data.

5. Press [DISPLAY/SCALE] Show the Display and Scale menu.

Press <Format> to select Single. Use a full screen display.

Press <Type> Highlight the display type.

Use the knob to select Chart. Math functions require a chart display.

Press <± Range> Highlight the chart range.

Press [5] [0] [EXP] [-] [9] [ENTER] Enter 50 nV for the chart range.

Press <sec/Div> (the last softkey). Highlight the horizontal time scale.

Use the knob to select 5.0 S/Div. Change the scale to 5.0 S/Div so 50 seconds of
data will fill the graph.

6. Press [START/CONT] Start the scan. The X output is recorded on the

chart display. The chart shows the last 50 seconds
of data. The graph should be a noisy trace about 2
divisions peak to peak.

Wait until the data fills the graph (50 sec) and
data starts scrolling past the left edge.

Press [PAUSE/CONT] Pause the data acquisition. No new data is record-

ed and the graph stops scrolling to the left.

7. Press [MATH] Display the Math menu.

Press <Stats> Choose the Statistics menu.

Press <Do Stats> The mean, standard deviation, total and time
span are calculated for the data between the left
and right limits. The limits are shown as vertical
heavy dashed lines. The limits default to the left

2-36
 Trace Math

and right edge of the graph display. In this case,

50 seconds of data (800 data points at 16 Hz
sample rate).

The results are displayed at the bottom of the

screen. The standard deviation (σ)should be about
6 nV or so. This is the rms noise of the input in a
noise equivalent bandwidth of 1.2 Hz (100 ms, 12
dB/oct time constant). The input noise (in Volts/
√Hz) is thus the standard deviation divided by the
square root of 1.2 Hz.

The lock-in can measure noise directly in V/√Hz,

this measurement is meant to illustrate the statisti-
cal functions.

Press <Return> twice. Return to the main Math menu.

8. Press <Smooth> Choose the Smoothing menu.

Press <17 point> Perform 17 point smoothing on the noisy data. The
data should become less noisy and smoother.
Smoothing reduces narrow variations in the data.

Press [CURSOR] Let the knob move the cursor.

Use the knob to move the cursor past the left The smoothing operation changed the data within
edge of the graph. The data will scroll to the the time window of the graph. Data which was not
right to display unsmoothed portions of the displayed was not smoothed. This trace now con-
trace. tains a region which has been smoothed and a
region which is untouched.

Smoothing changes the data in the buffer and the

original unsmoothed points are lost.

Press <Return> Return to the main Math menu.

8. Press <Calc> Choose the Calculator menu.

Press <Operation> Highlight the operation.

Use the knob to select x2. Let's square the data.

Press <Do Calc.> Calculations are performed on all of the data

within the time window of the graph. Let the calcu-
lation finish.

Press [AUTO SCALE] X squared is a positive quantity. The magnitude of

the data is now 10-18 so auto scale is required to
view the data.

Use the knob to select √. Select square root.

2-37
 Trace Math

Press <Do Calc.> The net effect is to take the absolute value of X.
Let the calculation finish.

Press [AUTO SCALE] The magnitude of the data is back to 10 -9.

Use the knob to select log10. Take the log of |X|.

Press <Do Calc.> Let the calculation finish.

Use the knob to select ❊. Let's multiply the data by something.

Press <Argument Type> to select Constant. Multiply the data by a constant.

Press <Constant Value> Highlight the constant value.

Press [2] [0] [ENTER] Enter 20.

Press <Do Calc.> The final data is 20log|X| which results in a graph
of X scaled in dBV. Let the calculation finish.

Press [AUTO SCALE] Auto scale the graph.

Press [CURSOR] Activate the cursor.

Use the knob to read points from the graph. The values of the data should be in the range
below -160 dBV and below.

9. Press [PAUSE/RESET] Clear the data buffers for the next measurement.

10. Press [DISPLAY/SCALE] Show the Display and Scale menu.

Press <Format> to select Up/Down. Display the bar graphs.

11. Press [GAIN/TC] Display the Gain and Time Constant menu.

Press <Sensitivity> Highlight the sensitivity.

Use the knob to change the sensitivity to 1V. Change the sensitivity to measure the Sine Out.

Press <Time Constant> Highlight the time constant.

Use the knob to change the time constant to Use a long time constant.
3S.

Press <Filter db/oct.> until 6 db is selected. Choose the simplest filter response.

12. Press [TRACE/SCAN] Show the Trace and Scan menu.

Press <Scan Length> Highlight the scan length.

Press [5] [0] [ENTER] Enter a scan length of 50 seconds.

2-38
 Trace Math

Press <1 Shot/Loop> to select 1 Shot. Stop data acquisition after the scan is complete.

13. Connect the Sine Out to the A input using a The input impedance of the lock-in is 10 MΩ. The
BNC cable. Sine Out has an output impedance of 50Ω. Since
the Sine Output amplitude is specified into a high
Wait until the value of X reaches 1 V. impedance load, the output impedance does not
affect the amplitude.

The sine amplitude is 1.000 Vrms and the

sensitivity is 1 V(rms). Since the phase shift of the
sine output is very close to zero, the upper display
(X) should read close to 1.000 V and the lower dis-
play (Y) should read close to 0.000 V.

14. Press [DISPLAY/SCALE] Show the Display and Scale menu.

Press <Format> to select Single. Display the full screen chart again.

Press the <± Range> softkey. This is the fifth Set the chart scale.
softkey from the top.

Press [1] [ENTER] Set the range to ±1 V.

Press the <± Range> softkey again to high- Set the chart center.
light the center (@) value.

Press [0] [ENTER] Set the chart center to zero.

15. Press [START/CONT] and after about 10 sec- Start the scan. When the cable is removed, the
onds, remove the cable from the A input. value of X should decrease to zero over the next
15 seconds or so.

Wait until the scan finishes. When the scan is fin-

ished, the DONE indictor at the bottom left of the
screen will switch on.

The graph should be an exponential decay starting

when the cable was removed from the input. Let's
fit a curve to this data.

16. Press [MATH] Display the Math menu.

Press <Fit> Choose the Fit menu.

Press <Fit Type> to select Exp. Choose exponential fit.

Press [CURSOR] Activate the cursor.

Use the knob to position the cursor at the point Use the cursor to determine the graph region over
where the signal starts to decay. which the curve fit will be calculated.

2-39
 Trace Math

Press <Left Limit> Set the left limit of the region at the start of the
signal decay.

Use the knob to position the cursor 3 divisions Select the smallest region which covers the signal
to the right of the left limit. decay.

Press <Right Limit> Set the right limit.

Move the cursor farther to the right. The fit region is between the two limit marks (verti-
cal heavy dashed lines). Only the data between
the limits is used to calculate the fit.

Press <Do Fit> Curve fit calculations can take a long time if the fit
region encompasses a lot of data points. Try to
use the smallest region possible when performing
fits.

The curve fit uses a multi-iteration chi-squared

minimization technique. After each iteration, the
value of chi 2 is displayed at the bottom of the
screen. Pressing the last softkey during the fit will
terminate the calculation after the current iteration.

The fit parameters are displayed in a window in

the center of the screen. The decay parameter b
should be 3 seconds (6 db time constant).

17. Press any key to continue. The first time a key is pressed, the parameter
window is removed. The curve fit is plotted over
the data on the graph.

Press any key to continue. The next key removes the curve fit from the graph.

18. Press <Fit Type> twice to select Line. Try fitting a line to this region.

Press <Do Fit> Fit a line to this region.

Press any key to continue. Remove the parameter window. The calculated fit
is terrible of course.

Press any key to continue. Remove the curve fit.

19. Press [DISPLAY/SCALE] Show the Display and Scale menu.

Press <S/Div> Highlight the horizontal scale.

Use the knob to change the horizontal time Zoom in on the graph.
scale to 1 S/Div.

Press [CURSOR] Activate the cursor.

2-40
 Trace Math

Move the cursor past the left edge of the Scroll the data to show the signal decay region.
graph to pan the data window until the signal
decay becomes visible again.

20. Press [MATH] Go back to the Math menu.

Press <Fit> Choose the Fit menu.

Press <View Params> View the most recent fit. The most recent fit is
stored in memory and can be viewed again.

Press any key to continue. Remove the parameter window so that the plotted
fit can be seen. The fit is now being displayed at a
different graph scale than before. Details on the
quality of the fit can be examined up close.

Press any key to continue. Remove the fit from the graph.

The math functions are very powerful data analy-

sis tools. Together with the flexible trace defini-
tions, the SR850 can perform complex data acqui-
sition and analysis tasks.

2-41
Trace Math

2-42
 SR850 BASICS

WHAT IS A LOCK-IN AMPLIFIER?

Lock-in amplifiers are used to detect and measure experiment at the reference frequency. In the dia-
very small AC signals - all the way down to a few gram below, the reference signal is a square wave
nanovolts! Accurate measurements may be made at frequency ωr. This might be the sync output
even when the small signal is obscured by noise from a function generator. If the sine output from
sources many thousands of times larger. the function generator is used to excite the experi-
ment, the response might be the signal waveform
Lock-in amplifiers use a technique known as shown below. The signal is Vsig sin(ωrt + θsig )
phase-sensitive detection to single out the compo- where V sig is the signal amplitude.
nent of the signal at a specific reference frequency
AND phase. Noise signals at frequencies other The SR850 generates its own sine wave, shown
than the reference frequency are rejected and do as the lock-in reference below. The lock-in refer-
not affect the measurement. ence is VLsin(ωLt + θref).

Why use a lock-in? Reference

Let's consider an example. Suppose the signal is a
10 nV sine wave at 10 kHz. Clearly some amplifi-
cation is required. A good low noise amplifier will θ sig
have about 5 nV/√Hz of input noise. If the amplifier
bandwidth is 100 kHz and the gain is 1000, then Signal
we can expect our output to be 10 µV of signal
(10 nV x 1000) and 1.6 mV of broadband noise
(5 nV/√Hz x √100 kHz x 1000). We won't have
much luck measuring the output signal unless we
single out the frequency of interest.
θ ref
If we follow the amplifier with a band pass filter Lock-in Reference
with a Q=100 (a VERY good filter) centered at
10 kHz, any signal in a 100 Hz bandwidth will be The SR850 amplifies the signal and then multiplies
detected (10 kHz/Q). The noise in the filter pass it by the lock-in reference using a phase-sensitive
band will be 50 µV (5 nV/√Hz x √100 Hz x 1000) detector or multiplier. The output of the PSD is
and the signal will still be 10 µV. The output noise simply the product of two sine waves.
is much greater than the signal and an accurate
measurement can not be made. Further gain will V psd = V sig VLsin(ωrt + θsig )sin(ωLt + θref)
not help the signal to noise problem.
= 1/2 Vsig V Lcos([ω r - ωL]t + θsig - θref) -
Now try following the amplifier with a phase- 1/2 Vsig V Lcos([ω r + ωL]t + θsig + θref)
sensitive detector (PSD). The PSD can detect the
signal at 10 kHz with a bandwidth as narrow as The PSD output is two AC signals, one at the dif-
0.01 Hz! In this case, the noise in the detection ference frequency (ω r - ωL) and the other at the
bandwidth will be only 0.5 µV (5 nV/√Hz x √.01 Hz sum frequency (ω r + ωL).
x 1000) while the signal is still 10 µV. The signal to
noise ratio is now 20 and an accurate measure- If the PSD output is passed through a low pass
ment of the signal is possible. filter, the AC signals are removed. What will be
left? In the general case, nothing. However, if ω r
What is phase-sensitive detection? equals ω L, the difference frequency component
Lock-in measurements require a frequency refer- will be a DC signal. In this case, the filtered PSD
ence. Typically an experiment is excited at a fixed output will be
frequency (from an oscillator or function generator)
and the lock-in detects the response from the V psd = 1/2 Vsig V Lcos(θsig - θref)

3-1
 SR850 Basics

This is a very nice signal - it is a DC signal propor- sync) which is always phase-locked to the refer-
tional to the signal amplitude. ence oscillator.

Narrow band detection Magnitude and phase

Now suppose the input is made up of signal plus Remember that the PSD output is proportional
noise. The PSD and low pass filter only detect sig- to Vsig cosθ where θ = (θsig - θref). θ is the phase
nals whose frequencies are very close to the lock- difference between the signal and the lock-in refer-
in reference frequency. Noise signals at frequen- ence oscillator. By adjusting θref we can make θ
cies far from the reference are attenuated at the equal to zero, in which case we can measure Vsig
PSD output by the low pass filter (neither ωnoise - (cosθ=1). Conversely, if θ is 90°, there will be no
ωref nor ωnoise +ωref are close to DC). Noise at fre- output at all. A lock-in with a single PSD is called a
quencies very close to the reference frequency will single-phase lock-in and its output is V sig cosθ.
result in very low frequency AC outputs from the
PSD (|ωnoise -ωref| is small). Their attenuation This phase dependency can be eliminated by
depends upon the low pass filter bandwidth and adding a second PSD. If the second PSD multi-
roll-off. A narrower bandwidth will remove noise plies the signal with the reference oscillator shifted
sources very close to the reference frequency, a by 90°, i.e. VLsin(ωLt + θref + 90°), its low pass fil-
wider bandwidth allows these signals to pass. The tered output will be
low pass filter bandwidth determines the band-
width of detection. Only the signal at the reference V psd2 = 1/2 Vsig V Lsin(θsig - θref)
frequency will result in a true DC output and be
unaffected by the low pass filter. This is the signal V psd2 ~ V sig sinθ
we want to measure.
Now we have two outputs, one proportional to
Where does the cosθ and the other proportional to sinθ. If we call
lock-in reference come from? the first output X and the second Y,
We need to make the lock-in reference the same
as the signal frequency, i.e. ωr = ωL. Not only do X = Vsig cosθ Y = Vsig sinθ
the frequencies have to be the same, the phase
between the signals can not change with time, oth- these two quantities represent the signal as a
erwise cos(θsig - θref) will change and V psd will not vector relative to the lock-in reference oscillator. X
be a DC signal. In other words, the lock-in refer- is called the 'in-phase' component and Y the
ence needs to be phase-locked to the signal 'quadrature' component. This is because when
reference. θ=0, X measures the signal while Y is zero.

Lock-in amplifiers use a phase-locked-loop (PLL) By computing the magnitude (R) of the signal
to generate the reference signal. An external refer- vector, the phase dependency is removed.
ence signal (in this case, the reference square
wave) is provided to the lock-in. The PLL in the R = (X 2 + Y2)1/2 = Vsig
lock-in locks the internal reference oscillator to this
external reference, resulting in a reference sine R measures the signal amplitude and does not
wave at ωr with a fixed phase shift of θref. Since depend upon the phase between the signal and
the PLL actively tracks the external reference, lock-in reference.
changes in the external reference frequency do
not affect the measurement. A dual-phase lock-in, such as the SR850, has two
PSD's, with reference oscillators 90° apart, and
All lock-in measurements can measure X, Y and R directly. In addition, the
require a reference signal. phase θ between the signal and lock-in reference,
In this case, the reference is provided by the exci- can be measured according to
tation source (the function generator). This is
called an external reference source. In many situa- θ = tan -1 (Y/X)
tions, the SR850's internal oscillator may be used
instead. The internal oscillator is just like a func-
tion generator (with variable sine output and a TTL

3-2
 SR850 Basics

WHAT DOES A LOCK-IN MEASURE?

So what exactly does the SR850 meas- lowing the multiplier. This "bandwidth narrowing" is
ure?Fourier's theorem basically states that any the primary advantage that a lock-in amplifier pro-
input signal can be represented as the sum of vides. Only inputs at frequencies at the reference
many, many sine waves of differing amplitudes, frequency result in an output.
frequencies and phases. This is generally consid-
ered as representing the signal in the "frequency RMS or Peak?
domain". Normal oscilloscopes display the signal Lock-in amplifiers as a general rule display the
in the "time domain". Except in the case of clean input signal in Volts RMS. When the SR850 dis-
sine waves, the time domain representation does plays a magnitude of 1V (rms), the component of
not convey very much information about the vari- the input signal at the reference frequency is a
ous frequencies which make up the signal. sine wave with an amplitude of 1 Vrms or
2.8 V pk-pk.
What does the SR850 measure?
The SR850 multiplies the signal by a pure sine Thus, in the previous example with a2 V pk-pk
wave at the reference frequency. All components square wave input, the SR850 would detect the
of the input signal are multiplied by the reference first sine component, 1.273sin(ωt). The measured
simultaneously. Mathematically speaking, sine and displayed magnitude would be 0.90 V (rms)
waves of differing frequencies are orthogonal, i.e. (1/√2 x 1.273).
the average of the product of two sine waves is
zero unless the frequencies are EXACTLY the Degrees or Radians?
same. In the SR850, the product of this multiplica- In this discussion, frequencies have been referred
tion yields a DC output signal proportional to the to as f (Hz) and ω (2πf radians/sec). This is
component of the signal whose frequency is exact- because people measure frequencies in cycles
ly locked to the reference frequency. The low pass per second and math works best in radians. For
filter which follows the multiplier provides the aver- purposes of measurement, frequencies as meas-
aging which removes the products of the reference ured in a lock-in amplifier are in Hz. The equations
with components at all other frequencies. used to explain the actual calculations are some-
times written using ω to simplify the expressions.
The SR850, because it multiplies the signal with a
pure sine wave, measures the single Fourier (sine) Phase is always reported in degrees. Once again,
component of the signal at the reference frequen- this is more by custom than by choice. Equations
cy. Let's take a look at an example. Suppose the written as sin(ωt + θ) are written as if θ is in
input signal is a simple square wave at frequency radians mostly for simplicity. Lock-in amplifiers
f. The square wave is actually composed of many always manipulate and measure phase in
sine waves at multiples of f with carefully related degrees.
amplitudes and phases. A 2V pk-pk square wave
can be expressed as

S(t) = 1.273sin(ωt) + 0.4244sin(3ωt) +

0.2546sin(5ωt) + ...

where ω = 2πf. The SR850, locked to f will single

out the first component. The measured signal will
be 1.273sin(ωt), not the 2V pk-pk that you'd meas-
ure on a scope.

In the general case, the input consists of signal

plus noise. Noise is represented as varying signals
at all frequencies. The ideal lock-in only responds
to noise at the reference frequency. Noise at other
frequencies is removed by the low pass filter fol-

3-3
SR850 Basics

3-4
 SR850 Basics

THE FUNCTIONAL SR850

The functional block diagram of the SR850 DSP
Lock-In Amplifier is shown below. The functions in
the gray area are handled by the digital signal pro-
cessor (DSP). We'll discuss the DSP aspects of
the SR850 as they come up in each functional
block description.

Low Noise 50/60 Hz 100/120 Hz

Differential Notch Notch
Amp Filter Filter Gain
A
Voltage
B

Current I
DC Gain
Offset
Expand
90° Low
Phase Pass Y Out
Shift Filter
Phase
Sensitive
Detector R
R and
Ø Calc Ø

Reference In Low
Phase
Sine or TTL PLL Pass X Out
Shifter
Filter
Discriminator Phase Internal Phase DC Gain
Locked Oscillator Sensitive Offset
Loop Detector Expand

Sine Out

TTL Out

SR850 FUNCTIONAL BLOCK DIAGRAM Discriminator

3-5
SR850 Basics

3-6
 SR850 Basics

REFERENCE CHANNEL
A lock-in amplifier requires a reference oscillator oscillator sine wave is phase-locked to the refer-
phase-locked to the signal frequency. In general, ence. The rising zero crossing is locked to the
this is accomplished by phase-locking an internal detected reference zero crossing or edge. In this
oscillator to an externally provided reference mode, the SINE OUT provides a sine wave phase-
signal. This reference signal usually comes from locked to the external reference. At low frequen-
the signal source which is providing the excitation cies (below 10 Hz), the phase locking is accom-
to the experiment. plished digitally by the DSP. At higher frequencies,
a discrete phase comparator is used.
Reference Input
The SR850 reference input can accept an analog The internal oscillator may be used without an
signal (like a sine wave) or a TTL logic signal. The external reference. In the Internal Reference
first case is called External Sine. The input is AC mode, the SINE OUT provides the excitation for
coupled (above 1 Hz) and the input impedance is the experiment. The phase-locked-loop is not used
1 MΩ. A sine wave input greater than 200 mV pk in this mode since the lock-in reference is provid-
will trigger the input discriminator. Positive zero ing the excitation signal.
crossings are detected and considered to be the
zero for the reference phase shift. The TTL OUT on the rear panel provides a TTL
sync output. The internal oscillator's rising zero
TTL reference signals can be used at all frequen- crossings are detected and translated to TTL
cies up to 102 kHz. For frequencies below 1 Hz, levels. This output is a square wave.
a TTL reference signal is required. Many func-
tion generators provide a TTL SYNC output which Reference Oscillators and Phase
can be used as the reference. This is convenient The internal oscillator sine wave is not the refer-
since the generator's sine output might be smaller ence signal to the phase sensitive detectors. The
than 200 mV or be varied in amplitude. The SYNC DSP computes a second sine wave, phase shifted
signal will provide a stable reference regardless of by θref from the internal oscillator (and thus from
the sine amplitude. an external reference), as the reference input to
the X phase sensitive detector. This waveform is
When using a TTL reference, the reference input sin(ωrt + θref). The reference phase shift is adjust-
can be set to External Rising (detect rising edges) able in .001° increments.
or External Falling (detect falling edges). In each
case, the internal oscillator is locked (at zero The input to the Y PSD is a third sine wave, com-
phase) to the detected edge. puted by the DSP, shifted by 90° from the second
sine wave. This waveform is sin(ωrt + θref + 90°).
Internal Oscillator
The internal oscillator in the SR850 is basically a Both reference sine waves are calculated to 20
100 kHz function generator with sine and TTL bits of accuracy and a new point is calculated
sync outputs. The oscillator can be phase-locked every 4 µs (256 kHz). The phase shifts (θ ref and
to the external reference. the 90° shift) are also exact numbers and accurate
to better than .001°. Neither waveform is actually
The oscillator generates a digitally synthesized output in analog form since the phase sensitive
sine wave. The digital signal processor, or DSP, detectors are actually multiply instructions inside
sends computed sine values to a 16 bit digital-to- the DSP.
analog converter every 4 µs (256 kHz). An anti-
aliasing filter converts this sampled signal into a Phase Jitter
low distortion sine wave. The internal oscillator When an external reference is used, the phase-
sine wave is output at the SINE OUT BNC on the locked loop adds a little phase jitter. The internal
front panel. The amplitude of this output may be oscillator is supposed to be locked with zero
set from 4 mV to 5 V. phase shift relative the external reference. Phase
jitter means that the average phase shift is zero
When an external reference is used, this internal but the instantaneous phase shift has a few milli-

3-7
 SR850 Basics

degrees of noise. This shows up at the output as Harmonic Detection

noise in phase or quadrature measurements. It is possible to compute the two PSD reference
sine waves at a multiple of the internal oscillator
Phase noise can also cause noise to appear at the frequency. In this case, the lock-in detects signals
X and Y outputs. This is because a reference at Nxfref which are synchronous with the refer-
oscillator with a lot of phase noise is the same as ence. The SINE OUT frequency is not affected.
a reference whose frequency spectrum is spread The SR850 can detect at any harmonic up to
out. That is, the reference is not a single frequen- N=32767 as long as Nxfref does not exceed
cy, but a distribution of frequencies about the true 102 kHz.
reference frequency. These spurious frequencies
are attenuated quite a bit but still cause problems.
The spurious reference frequencies result in sig-
nals close to the reference being detected. Noise
at nearby frequencies now appears near DC and
affects the lock-in output.

Phase noise in the SR850 is very low and general-

ly causes no problems. In applications requiring no
phase jitter, the internal reference mode should be
used. Since there is no PLL, the internal oscillator
and the reference sine waves are directly linked
and there is no jitter in the measured phase.
(Actually, the phase jitter is the phase noise of a
crystal oscillator and is very, very small).

3-8
 SR850 Basics

THE PHASE SENSITIVE DETECTORS (PSD's)

The SR850 multiplies the signal with the reference scale signal, the analog PSD measures the signal
sine waves digitally. The amplified signal is con- with an error. The error is caused by non-linearity
verted to digital form using a 16 bit A/D converter in the multiplication (the error at the output
sampling at 256 kHz. The A/D converter is preced- depends upon the amplitude of the input). This
ed by a 102 kHz anti-aliasing filter to prevent error can be quite large (10% of full scale) and
higher frequency inputs from aliasing below depends upon the noise amplitude, frequency, and
102 kHz. The signal amplifier and filters will be dis- waveform. Since noise generally varies quite a bit
cussed later. in these parameters, the PSD error causes quite a
bit of output uncertainty.
This input data stream is multiplied, a point at a
time, with the computed reference sine waves In the digital lock-in, the dynamic reserve is limited
described previously. Every 4 µs, the input signal by the quality of the A/D conversion. Once the
is sampled and the result is multiplied by the two input signal is digitized, no further errors are intro-
reference sine waves (90° apart). duced. Certainly the accuracy of the multiplication
does not depend on the size of the numbers. The
Digital PSD vs Analog PSD A/D converter used in the SR850 is extremely
The phase sensitive detectors (PSD's) in the linear, meaning that the presence of large noise
SR850 act as linear multipliers, that is, they multi- signals does not impair its ability to correctly digi-
ply the signal with a reference sine wave. Analog tize a small signal. In fact, the dynamic reserve of
PSD's (both square wave and linear) have many the SR850 can exceed 100 dB without any prob-
problems associated with them. The main prob- lems. We'll talk more about dynamic reserve a little
lems are harmonic rejection, output offsets, limited later.
dynamic reserve and gain error.
An analog linear PSD multiplies the signal by an
The digital PSD multiplies the digitized signal with analog reference sine wave. Any amplitude varia-
a digitally computed reference sine wave. tion in the reference amplitude shows up directly
Because the reference sine waves are computed as a variation in the overall gain. Analog sine wave
to 20 bits of accuracy, they have very low harmon- generators are susceptible to amplitude drift, espe-
ic content. In fact, the harmonics are at the cially as a function of temperature. The digital ref-
-120 dB level! This means that the signal is multi- erence sine wave has a precise amplitude and
plied by a single reference sine wave (instead of a never changes. This eliminates a major source of
reference and its many harmonics) and only the gain error in a linear analog lock-in.
signal at this single reference frequency is detect-
ed. The SR850 is completely insensitive to signals The overall performance of a lock-in amplifier is
at harmonics of the reference. In contrast, a largely determined by the performance of its
square wave multiplying lock-in will detect at all of phase sensitive detectors. In virtually all respects,
the odd harmonics of the reference (a square the digital PSD outperforms its analog
wave contains many large odd harmonics). counterparts.

Output offset is a problem because the signal of We've discussed how the digital signal processor
interest is a DC output from the PSD and an in the SR850 computes the internal oscillator and
output offset contributes to error and zero drift. two reference sine waves and handles both phase
The offset problems of analog PSD's are eliminat- sensitive detectors. In the next section, we'll see
ed using the digital multiplier. There are no errone- the same DSP perform the low pass filtering and
ous DC output offsets from the digital DC amplification required at the output of the
multiplication of the signal and reference. In fact, PSD's. Here again, the digital technique eliminates
the actual multiplication is totally free from errors. many of the problems associated with analog lock-
in amplifiers.
The dynamic reserve of an analog PSD is limited
to about 60 dB. When there is a large noise signal
present, 1000 times or 60 dB greater than the full

3-9
SR850 Basics

3-10
 SR850 Basics

TIME CONSTANTS and DC GAIN

Remember, the output of the PSD contains many 12 dB/oct. This limitation is usually due to space
signals. Most of the output signals have frequen- and expense. Each filter needs to have many dif-
cies which are either the sum or difference ferent time constant settings. The different settings
between an input signal frequency and the refer- require different components and switches to
ence frequency. Only the component of the input select them, all of which is costly and space
signal whose frequency is exactly equal to the ref- consuming.
erence frequency will result in a DC output.
The digital signal processor in the SR850 handles
The low pass filter at the PSD output removes all all of the low pass filtering. Each PSD can be fol-
of the unwanted AC signals, both the 2F (sum of lowed by up to four filter stages for up to 24 dB/oct
the signal and the reference) and the noise com- of roll off. Since the filters are digital, the SR850 is
ponents. This filter is what makes the lock-in such not limited to just two stages of filtering.
a narrow band detector.
Why is the increased roll off desirable? Consider
Time Constants an example where the reference is at 1 kHz and a
Lock-in amplifiers have traditionally set the low large noise signal is at 1.05 kHz. The PSD noise
pass filter bandwidth by setting the time constant. outputs are at 50 Hz (difference) and 2.05 kHz
The time constant is simply 1/2πf where f is the (sum). Clearly the 50 Hz component is the more
-3 dB frequency of the filter. The low pass filters difficult to low pass filter. If the noise signal is
are simple 6 dB/oct roll off, RC type filters. A 1 80 dB above the full scale signal and we would
second time constant referred to a filter whose like to measure the signal to 1% (-40 dB), then the
-3 dB point occurred at 0.16 Hz and rolled off at 50 Hz component needs to be reduced by 120 dB.
6 dB/oct beyond 0.16 Hz. Typically, there are two To do this in two stages would require a time con-
successive filters so that the overall filter can roll stant of at least 3 seconds. To accomplish the
off at either 6 dB or 12 dB per octave. The time same attenuation in four stages only requires
constant referred to the -3 dB point of each filter 100 ms of time constant. In the second case, the
alone (not the combined filter). output will respond 30 times faster and the experi-
ment will take less time.
The notion of time constant arises from the fact
that the actual output is supposed to be a DC Synchronous Filters
signal. In fact, when there is noise at the input, Another advantage of digital filtering is the ability
there is noise on the output. By increasing the time to do synchronous filtering. Even if the input signal
constant, the output becomes more steady and has no noise, the PSD output always contains a
easier to measure reliably. The trade off comes component at 2F (sum frequency of signal and ref-
when real changes in the input signal take many erence) whose amplitude equals or exceeds the
time constants to be reflected at the output. This is desired DC output depending upon the phase. At
because a single RC filter requires about 5 time low frequencies, the time constant required to
constants to settle to its final value. The time attenuate the 2F component can be quite long. For
constant reflects how slowly the output responds, example, at 1 Hz, the 2F output is at 2 Hz and to
and thus the degree of output smoothing. attenuate the 2 Hz by 60 dB in two stages requires
a time constant of 3 seconds.
Note that the SR850 displays the time constant
and the equivalent noise bandwidth (ENBW) in the A synchronous filter, on the other hand, operates
time constant menu. The ENBW is NOT the filter totally differently. The PSD output is averaged
-3 dB pole, it is the effective bandwidth for over a complete cycle of the reference frequency.
Gaussian noise. More about this later. The result is that all components at multiples of
the reference (2F included) are notched out com-
Digital Filters vs Analog Filters pletely. In the case of a clean signal, almost no
The SR850 improves on analog filters in many additional filtering would be required. This is
ways. First, analog lock-ins provide at most, two increasingly useful the lower the reference fre-
stages of filtering with a maximum roll off of quency. Imagine what the time constant would

3-11
 SR850 Basics

need to be at 0.001 Hz! is one of the reasons why analog lock-ins do not
perform well at very high dynamic reserve.
In the SR850, synchronous filters are available at
detection frequencies below 200 Hz. At higher fre- The digital lock-in does not have an analog DC
quencies, the filters are not required (2F is easily amplifier. The output gain is yet another function
removed without using long time constants). handled by the digital signal processor. We
Below 200 Hz, the synchronous filter follows either already know that the digital PSD has no DC
one or two stages of normal filters. The output of output offset. Likewise, the digital DC amplifier has
the synchronous filter is followed by two more no input offset. Amplification is simply taking input
stages of normal filters. This combination of filters numbers and multiplying by the gain. This allows
notches all multiples of the reference frequency the SR850 to operate with 100 dB of dynamic
and provides overall noise attenuation as well. reserve without any output offset or zero drift.

Long Time Constants What about resolution?

Time constants above 100 seconds are difficult to Just like the analog lock-in where the noise can
accomplish using analog filters. This is simply not exceed the input range of the PSD, in the digi-
because the capacitor required for the RC filter is tal lock-in, the noise can not exceed the input
prohibitively large (in value and in size!). Why range of the A/D converter. With a 16 bit A/D con-
would you use such a long time constant? verter, a dynamic reserve of 60 dB means that
Sometimes you have no choice. If the reference is while the noise has a range of the full 16 bits, the
well below 1 Hz and there is a lot of low frequency full scale signal only uses 6 bits. With a dynamic
noise, then the PSD output contains many very reserve of 80 dB, the full scale signal uses only
low frequency components. The synchronous filter 2.5 bits. And with 100 dB dynamic reserve, the
only notches multiples of the reference frequency, signal is below a single bit! Clearly multiplying
the noise is filtered by the normal filters. these numbers by a large gain is not going to
result in a sensible output. Where does the output
The SR850 can provide time constants as long as resolution come from?
30000 seconds at reference frequencies below
200 Hz. Obviously you don't use long time con- The answer is filtering. The low pass filters effec-
stants unless absolutely necessary, but they're tively combine many data samples together. For
available. example, at a 1 second time constant, the output
is the result of averaging data over the previous 4
DC Output Gain or 5 seconds. At a sample rate of 256 kHz, this
How big is the DC output from the PSD? It means each output point is the exponential aver-
depends on the dynamic reserve. With 60 dB of age of over a million data points. (A new output
dynamic reserve, a noise signal can be 1000 times point is computed every 4 µs and is a moving
(60 dB) greater than a full scale signal. At the exponential average). What happens when you
PSD, the noise can not exceed the PSD's input average a million points? To first order, the result-
range. In an analog lock-in, the PSD input range ing average has more resolution than the incoming
might be 5V. With 60 dB of dynamic reserve, the data points by a factor of million . This represents
signal will be only 5 mV at the PSD input. The a gain of 20 bits in resolution over the raw data. A
PSD typically has no gain so the DC output from 1 bit input data stream is converted to 20 bits of
the PSD will only be a few millivolts! Even if the output resolution from 1 out of a million all the way
PSD had no DC output errors, amplifying this milli- up to a million out of a million or 1.
volt signal up to 10 V is error prone. The DC
output gain needs to be about the same as the The compromise here is that with high dynamic
dynamic reserve (1000 in this case) to provide a reserve (large DC gains), some filtering is
10 V output for a full scale input signal. An offset required. The shortest time constants are not
as small as 1 mV will appear as 1 V at the output! available when the dynamic reserve is very high.
In fact, the PSD output offset plus the input offset This is not really a limitation since presumably
of the DC amplifier needs to be on the order of there is noise which is requiring the high dynamic
10 µV in order to not affect the measurement. If reserve and thus substantial output filtering will
the dynamic reserve is increased to 80dB, then also be required.
this offset needs to be 10 times smaller still. This

3-12
 SR850 Basics

DC OUTPUTS and SCALING

The SR850 has X and Y outputs on the rear panel output proportional to simply X, Y or R. This is the
and Channel 1 and 2 (CH1 and CH2) outputs on output scale for the X and Y rear panel outputs as
the front panel. well as the CH1 and CH2 outputs when configured
to output X, Y or R. When the CH1 or CH2 outputs
X and Y are proportional to a data trace which is simply
The X and Y rear panel outputs are the outputs defined as X, Y or R, the output scale is also 10 V
from the two phase sensitive detectors with low full scale.
pass filtering, offset and expand. These outputs
are the traditional outputs of an analog lock-in. Lock-in amplifiers are designed to measure the
The X and Y outputs have an output bandwidth of RMS value of the AC input signal. All sensitivities
100 kHz. and X, Y and R outputs and displays are RMS
values.
CH1 and CH2
The two front panel outputs can be configured to Phase is a quantity which ranges from -180° to
output voltages proportional to X, Y, R, θ, or +180° regardless of the sensitivity. When the CH1
Traces 1-4. or CH2 outputs a voltage proportional to θ, the
output scale is 18°/Volt or 180°=10V.
If the outputs are set to X or Y, these outputs
duplicate the rear panel outputs. X, Y and R Output Offset and Expand
The SR850 has the ability to offset the X, Y and R
If they are set to R or θ the output voltages are outputs. This is useful when measuring deviations
proportional to the calculated values of R and θ. in the signal around some nominal value. The
These calculations are performed at a rate of 512 offset can be set so that the output is offset to
Hz and the R and θ outputs are updated at the zero. Changes in the output can then be read
512 Hz rate. directly from the display or output voltages. The
offset is specified as a percentage of full scale and
If the outputs are proportional to a data trace, then the percentage does not change when the sensi-
the output is also updated at 512 Hz. The traces tivity is changed. Offsets up to ±105% can be
are defined in the TRACE menu as A•B/C where programmed.
A,B,C can be X, Y, R, θ, Xnoise, Ynoise, Rnoise,
Frequency, Aux Inputs 1-4, or unity (C may also The X, Y and R outputs may also be expanded.
be any quantity squared). If a trace is defined as This simply takes the output (minus its offset) and
simply X, this trace, when output through CH1 or multiplies by an expansion factor. Thus, a signal
CH2, will only update at 512 Hz. It is better in this which is only 10% of full scale can be expanded to
case to set CH1 to output X directly, rather than provide 10 V of output rather than only 1 V. The
the trace defined as X. The output scale of a data normal use for expand is to expand the measure-
trace is discussed later in this section. ment resolution around some value which is not
zero. For example, suppose a signal has a nomi-
X, Y, R and Output scales nal value of 0.9 mV and we want to measure small
The sensitivity of the lock-in is the rms amplitude deviations, say 10 µV or so, in the signal. The sen-
of an input sine (at the reference frequency) which sitivity of the lock-in needs to be 1 mV to accom-
results in a full scale DC output. Traditionally, full modate the nominal signal. If the offset is set so to
scale means 10 VDC at the X, Y or R BNC output. 90% of full scale, then the nominal 0.9 mV signal
The overall gain (input to output) of the amplifier is will result in a zero output. The 10 µV deviations in
then 10 V/sensitivity. This gain is distributed the signal only provide 100 mV of DC output. If the
between AC gain before the PSD and DC gain fol- output is expanded by 10, these small deviations
lowing the PSD. Changing the dynamic reserve at are magnified by 10 and provide outputs of 1 VDC.
a given sensitivity changes the gain distribution
while keeping the overall gain constant. The SR850 can expand the output by a factor from
1 to 256 provided the expanded output does not
The SR850 considers 10 V to be full scale for any exceed full scale. In the above example, the 10 µV

3-13
 SR850 Basics

deviations can be expanded up to 100 times example, if a trace is defined as X•θ/Aux 1 and
before they exceed full scale (at 1 mV sensitivity). X=1 mV, θ=37°, and Aux 1= 2.34 V, then the
trace value is 0.001 x 37/2.34 Volt•degrees per
The analog output with offset and expand is Volt or 0.01581 Vdeg/V. This value is not changed
by the sensitivity (X is the input signal, not the
Output = (signal/sensitivity - offset) x Expand x10V output voltage) or by X expand. An X offset will,
however, change the value of this trace.
where offset is a fraction of 1 (50%=0.5), expand
is an integer from 1 to 256 and the output can not Trace output scaling
exceed 10 V. In the above example, What about CH1 or CH2 outputs proportional to
data traces which are not simply X, Y, R or θ? If a
Output = (0.91mV/1mV - 0.9) x 10 x 10V = 1V trace is defined as A•B/C, then the trace output
voltage depends upon the values of each parame-
for a signal which is 10 µV greater than the 0.9 mV ter. Trace output voltages are calculated by deter-
nominal. (Offset = 0.9 and expand =10). mining the output voltages for the individual
quantities, A, B and C. The individual output volt-
The X and Y offset and expand functions in the ages (-10 V to +10 V) are then combined using the
SR850 are output functions, they do NOT affect trace definition to determine the trace output
the calculation of R or θ. R has its own output voltage.
offset and expand.
For example, suppose a trace is defined as X/R.
Trace displays The parameters X and R scale as 10 V for a full
Only data traces may be displayed on the screen. scale input signal. If the sensitivity is 1 V and the
In order to display the quantity X, it is necessary to measured values are X=500 mV and R=1 V, the
define a trace to be X and then choose to display X output would be 5 V and the R output would be
that trace. 10 V. The trace output voltage is simply
(X=5 V)/(R=10 V)=0.5 V.
Output offsets ARE reflected in data trace displays
which depend upon X, Y or R. For example, a Output voltages for traces which are defined as A,
trace which is defined as X is affected by the X B, A/C, B/C or A•B/C are calculated using the
offset. When the X output is offset to zero, the dis- output voltages for A, B and C. Traces defined as
played trace value on the screen will drop to zero A•B (A,B≠1, C=1) have output voltages which are
also. Any display which is showing a trace which is the product of the A and B output voltages divided
affected by a non-zero offset will display a high- by 10.
lighted Offst indicator at the lower left of the
display. For example, suppose a trace is defined as X•θ.
The parameter X scales as 10 V for a full scale
Output expands do NOT increase the displayed input signal and θ scales as 10 V for 180° of phase
values of X, Y or R in data traces. Expand increas- shift. If the measured X is 1 V on the 1 V sensitivi-
es the resolution of the X, Y or R value used to ty, X would be 100% of full scale or 10 V. If the
calculate the trace value. For example, a trace phase is 180°, then θ is also 10 V. The trace
which is defined as X does not increase its dis- output voltage is thus, (X=10 V)•(θ=10 V)/10=10 V.
played value when X is expanded. This is because The extra factor of 10 allows products of two full
the expand function increases the resolution with scale quantities to be output.
which the signal is measured, not the size of the
input signal. The displayed value will show an X, Y and R output offsets ARE reflected in trace
increased resolution but will continue to display outputs which depend upon X, Y or R. For exam-
the original value of X minus the X offset. Any dis- ple, a trace which is defined as X and output
play which is showing a trace which is affected by through CH1 or CH2 is affected by the X offset.
a non-unity expand will display a highlighted Expd When the X output is offset to zero, the trace
indicator at the lower left of the display. output voltage will drop to zero also.

Complex data traces are displayed and stored in Output expands DO increase the output voltage of
the actual units of the computed quantity. For X, Y or R in trace outputs. Expand increases the

3-14
 SR850 Basics

output voltages of X, Y or R in trace output calcu-

lations. For example, a trace which is defined as X
and output through CH1 or CH2 increases its
output voltage by the expand factor when X is
expanded. This is because the output voltage of X
is expanded.

The output voltage scales for the individual quanti-

ties are listed below.

X,Y,R (signal/sensitivity-offset)xExpandx10V
θ 10V/180°
Xn,Yn,Rn (noise signal/sensitivity)xExpandx10V
Aux In 1-4 output voltage = Aux input voltage
1 1V
F 5V - 10V for each octave in frequency.
For example,
1000 Hz = 5V
1200 Hz = 6V
1600 Hz = 8V
1800 Hz = 9V
1990 Hz = 9.95V
2000 Hz = 5V (next octave)
The octaves are defined as follows,
...
62.5 Hz - 125 Hz
125 Hz - 250 Hz
250 Hz - 500 Hz
500 Hz - 1000 Hz
1 kHz - 2 kHz
4 kHz - 8 kHz
8 kHz - 16 kHz
...

3-15
SR850 Basics

3-16
 SR850 Basics

DYNAMIC RESERVE
We've mentioned dynamic reserve quite a bit in high gain and low frequency noise and offset drift
the preceding discussions. It's time to clarify at the PSD output or the DC amplifier input will be
dynamic reserve a bit. amplified and appear large at the output. The
noise is more tolerable than the DC drift errors
What is dynamic reserve really? since increasing the time constant will attenuate
Suppose the lock-in input consists of a full scale the noise. The DC drift in an analog lock-in is usu-
signal at fref plus noise at some other frequency. ally on the order of 1000ppm/°C when using 60 dB
The traditional definition of dynamic reserve is the of dynamic reserve. This means that the zero point
ratio of the largest tolerable noise signal to the full moves 1% of full scale over 10°C temperature
scale signal, expressed in dB. For example, if full change. This is generally considered the limit of
scale is 1 µV, then a dynamic reserve of 60 dB tolerable.
means noise as large as 1 mV (60 dB greater than
full scale) can be tolerated at the input without Lastly, dynamic reserve depends on the noise fre-
overload. quency. Clearly noise at the reference frequency
will make its way to the output without attenuation.
The problem with this definition is the word 'tolera- So the dynamic reserve at fref is 0dB. As the noise
ble'. Clearly the noise at the dynamic reserve limit frequency moves away from the reference fre-
should not cause an overload anywhere in the quency, the dynamic reserve increases. Why?
instrument - not in the input signal amplifier, PSD, Because the low pass filter after the PSD attenu-
low pass filter or DC amplifier. This is accom- ates the noise components. Remember, the PSD
plished by adjusting the distribution of the gain. To outputs are at a frequency of |fnoise -fref|. The rate
achieve high reserve, the input signal gain is set at which the reserve increases depends upon the
very low so the noise is not likely to overload. This low pass filter time constant and roll off. The
means that the signal at the PSD is also very reserve increases at the rate at which the filter
small. The low pass filter then removes the large rolls off. This is why 24 dB/oct filters are better
noise components from the PSD output which than 6 or 12 dB/oct filters. When the noise fre-
allows the remaining DC component to be ampli- quency is far away, the reserve is limited by the
fied (a lot) to reach 10 V full scale. There is no gain distribution and overload level of each gain
problem running the input amplifier at low gain. element. This reserve level is the dynamic reserve
However, as we have discussed previously, referred to in the specifications.
analog lock-ins have a problem with high reserve
because of the linearity of the PSD and the DC off- actual reserve
sets of the PSD and DC amplifier. In an analog
60 dB 60 dB specified reserve
lock-in, large noise signals almost always disturb
the measurement in some way.

The most common problem is a DC output error 40 dB

caused by the noise signal. This can appear as an
offset or as a gain error. Since both effects are
dependent upon the noise amplitude and frequen- 20 dB
cy, they can not be offset to zero in all cases and low pass filter
will limit the measurement accuracy. Because the bandwidth
errors are DC in nature, increasing the time con- 0 dB
stant does not help. Most lock-ins define tolerable
noise as noise levels which do not affect the fref fnoise
output more than a few percent of full scale. This
is more severe than simply not overloading. The above graph shows the actual reserve vs the
frequency of the noise. In some instruments, the
Another effect of high dynamic reserve is to gener- signal input attenuates frequencies far outside the
ate noise and drift at the output. This comes about lock-in's operating range (fnoise>>100 kHz). In
because the DC output amplifier is running at very these cases, the reserve can be higher at these

3-17
 SR850 Basics

frequencies than within the operating range. While decrease and the output noise will decrease also.
this may be a nice specification, removing noise at In general, do not run with more reserve than nec-
frequencies very far from the reference does not essary. Certainly don't use ultra high reserve when
require a lock-in amplifier. Lock-ins are used when there is virtually no noise at all.
there is noise at frequencies near the signal. Thus,
the dynamic reserve for noise within the operating The frequency dependence of dynamic reserve is
range is more important. inherent in the lock-in detection technique. The
SR850, by providing more low pass filter stages,
Dynamic reserve in the SR850 can increase the dynamic reserve close to the ref-
The SR850, with its digital phase sensitive detec- erence frequency. The specified reserve applies to
tors, does not suffer from DC output errors caused noise signals within the operating range of the
by large noise signals. The dynamic reserve can lock-in, i.e. frequencies below 100 kHz. The
be increased to above 100 dB without measure- reserve at higher frequencies is actually higher but
ment error. Large noise signals do not cause is generally not that useful.
output errors from the PSD. The large DC gain
does not result in increased output drift. Minimum dynamic reserve
The SR850 always has a minimum amount of
In fact, the only drawback to using ultra high dynamic reserve. This minimum reserve changes
dynamic reserves (>60 dB) is the increased output with the sensitivity (gain) of the instrument. At high
noise due to the noise of the A/D converter. This gains (full scale sensitivity of 50 µV and below),
increase in output noise is only present when the the minimum dynamic reserve increases from
dynamic reserve is increased above 60 dB AND 37 dB at the same rate as the sensitivity increas-
above the minimum reserve. (If the minimum es. For example, the minimum reserve at 5 µV
reserve is 80 dB, then increasing to 90 dB may sensitivity is 57 dB. In many analog lock-ins, the
increase the noise. As we'll discuss next, the mini- reserve can be lower. Why can't the SR850 run
mum reserve does not have increased output with lower reserve at this sensitivity?
noise no matter how large it is.)
The answer to this question is - Why would you
To set a scale, the SR850's output noise at 100 dB want lower reserve? In an analog lock-in, lower
dynamic reserve is only measurable when the reserve means less output error and drift. In the
signal input is grounded. Let's do a simple experi- SR850, more reserve does not increase the output
ment. If the lock-in reference is at 1 kHz and a error or drift. More reserve can increase the output
large signal is applied at 9.5 kHz, what will the noise though. However, if the analog signal gain
lock-in output be? If the signal is increased to the before the A/D converter is high enough, the
dynamic reserve limit (100 dB greater than full 5 nV/√Hz noise of the signal input will be amplified
scale), the output will reflect the noise of the signal to a level greater than the input noise of the A/D
at 1 kHz. The spectrum of any pure sine generator converter. At this point, the detected noise will
always has a noise floor, i.e. there is some noise reflect the actual noise at the signal input and not
at all frequencies. So even though the applied the A/D converter's noise. Increasing the analog
signal is at 9.5 kHz, there will be noise at all other gain (decreasing the reserve) will not decrease the
frequencies, including the 1 kHz lock-in reference. output noise. Thus, there is no reason to decrease
This noise will be detected by the lock-in and the reserve. At a sensitivity of 5 µV, the analog
appear as noise at the output. This output noise gain is sufficiently high so that A/D converter noise
will typically be greater than the SR850's own is not a problem. Sensitivities below 5 µV do not
output noise. In fact, virtually all signal sources will require any more gain since the signal to noise
have a noise floor which will dominate the lock-in ratio will not be improved (the front end noise dom-
output noise. Of course, noise signals are general- inates). The SR850 does not increase the gain
ly much noisier than pure sine generators and will below the 5 µV sensitivity, instead, the minimum
have much higher broadband noise floors. reserve increases. Of course, the input gain can
be decreased and the reserve increased, in which
If the noise does not reach the reserve limit, the case the A/D converter noise might be detected in
SR850's own output noise may become detectable the absence of any signal input.
at ultra high reserves. In this case, simply lower
the dynamic reserve and the DC gain will

3-18
 SR850 Basics

SIGNAL INPUT AMPLIFIER and FILTERS

A lock-in can measure signals as small as a few lock-in will measure the input noise with an ENBW
nanovolts. A low noise signal amplifier is required of 2.5 Hz. This translates to 7.9 nVrms at the
to boost the signal to a level where the A/D con- input. At the output, this represents about 0.16%
verter can digitize the signal without degrading the of full scale (7.9 nV/5 µV). The peak to peak noise
signal to noise. The analog gain in the SR850 will be about 0.8% of full scale.
ranges from roughly 7 to 1000. As discussed pre-
viously, higher gains do not improve signal to All of this assumes that the signal input is being
noise and are not necessary. driven from a low impedance source. Remember
resistors have Johnson noise equal to
The overall gain (AC plus DC) is determined by 0.13x√R nVrms/√Hz. Even a 50Ω resistor has
the sensitivity. The distribution of the gain (AC almost 1 nVrms/√Hz of noise! A signal source
versus DC) is set by the dynamic reserve. impedance of 2kΩ will have a Johnson noise
greater than the SR850's input noise. To deter-
Input noise mine the overall noise of multiple noise sources,
The input noise of the SR850 signal amplifier is take the square root of the sum of the squares of
about 5 nVrms/√Hz. What does this noise figure the individual noise figures. For example, if a 2kΩ
mean? Let's set up an experiment. If an amplifier source impedance is used, the Johnson noise will
has 5 nVrms/√Hz of input noise and a gain of be 5.8 nVrms/√Hz. The overall noise at the SR850
1000, then the output will have 5 µVrms/√Hz of input will be [52 + 5.82]1/2 or 7.7 nVrms/√Hz.
noise. Suppose the amplifier output is low pass fil-
tered with a single RC filter (6 dB/oct roll off) with a We'll talk more about noise sources later in this
time constant of 100 ms. What will be the noise at section.
the filter output?
At lower gains (sensitivities above 50 µV), there is
Amplifier input noise and Johnson noise of resis- not enough gain at high reserve to amplify the
tors are Gaussian in nature. That is, the amount of input noise to a level greater than the noise of the
noise is proportional to the square root of the A/D converter. In these cases, the output noise is
bandwidth in which the noise is measured. A determined by the A/D noise. Fortunately, at these
single stage RC filter has an equivalent noise sensitivities, the DC gain is low and the noise at
bandwidth (ENBW) of 1/4T where T is the time the output is negligible.
constant (RxC). This means that Gaussian noise
at the filter input is filtered with an effective band- Notch filters
width equal to the ENBW. In this example, the The SR850 has two notch filters in the signal
filter sees 5 µVrms/√Hz of noise at its input. It has amplifier chain. These are pre-tuned to the line fre-
an ENBW of 1/(4x100ms) or 2.5 Hz. The voltage quency (50 or 60 Hz) and twice the line frequency
noise at the filter output will be (100 or 120 Hz). In circumstances where the larg-
5 µVrms/√Hz x√2.5Hz or 7.9µVrms. For est noise signals are at the power line frequencies,
Gaussian noise, the peak to peak noise is about 5 these filters can be engaged to remove noise sig-
times the rms noise. Thus, the output will have nals at these frequencies. Removing the largest
about 40 µV pk-pk of noise. noise signals before the final gain stage can
reduce the amount of dynamic reserve required to
Input noise for a lock-in works the same way. For perform a measurement. To the extent that these
sensitivities below about 5 µV full scale, the input filters reduce the required reserve to either 60 dB
noise will determine the output noise (at minimum or the minimum reserve (whichever is higher), then
reserve). The amount of noise at the output is some improvement might be gained. If the
determined by the ENBW of the low pass filter. required reserve without these notch filters is
The SR850 displays the ENBW in the Time below 60 dB or if the minimum reserve is suffi-
Constant menu. The ENBW depends upon the cient, then these filters do not significantly improve
time constant and filter roll off. For example, sup- the measurement.
pose the SR850 is set to 5 µV full scale with a 100
ms time constant and 6 dB/oct of filter roll off. The Using either of these filters precludes making

3-19
 SR850 Basics

measurements in the vicinity of the notch frequen-

cies. These filters have a finite range of attenua-
tion, generally 10 Hz or so. Thus, if the lock-in is
making measurements at 70 Hz, do not use the
60 Hz notch filter! The signal will be attenuated
and the measurement will be in error. When meas-
uring phase shifts, these filters can affect phase
measurements up to an octave away.

Anti-aliasing filter
After all of the signal filtering and amplification,
there is an anti-aliasing filter. This filter is required
by the signal digitization process. According to the
Nyquist criterion, signals must be sampled at a fre-
quency at least twice the highest signal frequency.
In this case, the highest signal frequency is
100 kHz and the sampling frequency is 256 kHz
so things are ok. However, no signals above 128
kHz can be allowed to reach the A/D converter.
These signals would violate the Nyquist criterion
and be undersampled. The result of this under-
sampling is to make these higher frequency sig-
nals appear as lower frequencies in the digital
data stream. Thus a signal at 175 kHz would
appear below 100 kHz in the digital data stream
and be detectable by the digital PSD. This would
be a problem.

To avoid this undersampling, the analog signal is

filtered to remove any signals above 154 kHz
(when sampling at 256 kHz, signals above
154 kHz will appear below 102 kHz). This filter has
a flat pass band from DC to 102 kHz so as not to
affect measurements in the operating range of the
lock-in. The filter rolls off from 102 kHz to 154 kHz
and achieves an attenuation above 154 kHz of at
least 100 dB. Amplitude variations and phase
shifts due to this filter are calibrated out at the fac-
tory and do not affect measurements. This filter is
transparent to the user.

Input Impedance
The input impedance of the SR850 is 10 MΩ. If a
higher input impedance is desired, then the SR550
remote preamplifier must be used. The SR550 has
an input impedance of 100 MΩ and is AC coupled
from 1 Hz to 100 kHz.

3-20
 SR850 Basics

INPUT CONNECTIONS
In order to achieve the best accuracy for a given Differential Voltage Connection (A-B)
measurement, care must be taken to minimize the The second method of connection is the differen-
various noise sources which can be found in the tial mode. The lock-in measures the voltage differ-
laboratory. With intrinsic noise (Johnson noise, 1/f ence between the center conductors of the A and
noise or input noise), the experiment or detector B inputs. Both of the signal connections are shield-
must be designed with these noise sources in ed from spurious pick-up. Noise pickup on the
mind. These noise sources are present regardless shields does not translate into signal noise since
of the input connections. The effect of noise sourc- the shields are ignored.
es in the laboratory (such as motors, signal gener-
ators, etc.) and the problem of differential grounds When using two cables, it is important that both
between the detector and the lock-in can be mini- cables travel the same path between the experi-
mized by careful input connections. ment and the lock-in. Specifically, there should not
be a large loop area enclosed by the two cables.
There are two basic methods for connecting a volt- Large loop areas are susceptible to magnetic
age signal to the lock-in - the single-ended con- pickup.
nection is more convenient while the differential
connection eliminates spurious pick-up more Experiment SR850 Lock-In
effectively. Signal A
Source +
Single-Ended Voltage Connection (A) -
In the first method, the lock-in uses the A input in a B
Loop
single-ended mode. The lock-in detects the signal R
Area
as the voltage between the center and outer con-
ductors of the A input only. The lock-in does not
force the shield of the A cable to ground, rather it Grounds may be at different potentials
is internally connected to the lock-in's ground via a
resistor. The value of this resistor is chosen in the
INPUT menu. Float uses 1 kΩ and Ground uses Common Mode Signals
10Ω. This avoids ground loop problems between Common mode signals are those signals which
the experiment and the lock-in due to differing appear equally on both center and shield (A) or
ground potentials. The lock-in lets the shield both A and B (A-B). With either connection
'quasi-float' in order to sense the experiment scheme, it is important to minimize both the
ground. However, noise pickup on the shield will common mode noise and the common mode
appear as noise to the lock-in. This is bad since signal. Notice that the signal source is held near
the lock-in cannot reject this noise. Common mode ground potential in both illustrations above. If the
noise, which appears on both the center and signal source floats at a nonzero potential, the
shield, is rejected by the 100 dB CMRR of the signal which appears on both the A and B inputs
lock-in input, but noise on only the shield is not will not be perfectly cancelled. The common mode
rejected at all. rejection ratio (CMRR) specifies the degree of can-
cellation. For low frequencies, the CMRR of 100
Experiment SR850 Lock-In dB indicates that the common mode signal is can-
Signal celed to 1 part in 105. Even with a CMRR of
A
Source + 100 dB, a 100 mV common mode signal behaves
- like a 1 µV differential signal! This is especially
bad if the common mode signal is at the reference
R
frequency (this happens a lot due to ground
loops). The CMRR decreases by about 6 dB/
octave (20 dB/decade) starting at around 1 kHz.
Grounds may be at different potentials

3-21
 SR850 Basics

Current Input (I) AC vs DC Coupling

The current input on the SR850 uses the A input The signal input can be either AC or DC coupled.
BNC. Voltage or current input is chosen in the The AC coupling high pass filter passes signals
INPUT menu. The current input has a 1 kΩ input above 160 mHz (0.16 Hz) and attenuates signals
impedance and a current gain of either 106 or at lower frequencies. AC coupling should be used
108 Volts/Amp. Currents from 1 µA down to 2 fA at frequencies above 50 mHz whenever possible.
full scale can be measured. At lower frequencies, DC coupling is required.

The impedance of the signal source is the most A DC signal, if not removed by the AC coupling
important factor to consider in deciding between filter, will multiply with the reference sine wave and
voltage and current measurements. produce an output at the reference frequency. This
signal is not normally present and needs to be
For high source impedances, greater than 1 MΩ removed by the low pass filter. If the DC compo-
(106 gain) or 100 MΩ (108 gain), and small cur- nent of the signal is large, then this output will be
rents, use the current input. Its relatively low impe- large and require a long time constant to remove.
dance greatly reduces the amplitude and phase AC coupling removes the DC component of the
errors caused by the cable capacitance-source signal without any sacrifice in signal as long as the
impedance time constant. The cable capacitance frequency is above 160 mHz.
should still be kept small to minimize the high fre-
quency noise gain of the current preamplifier. The current input current to voltage preamplifier is
always DC coupled. AC coupling can be selected
For moderate to low source impedances, or larger following the current preamplifier to remove any
currents, the voltage input is preferred. A small DC current signal.
value resistor may be used to shunt the signal cur-
rent and generate a voltage signal. The lock-in
then measures the voltage across the shunt resis-
tor. Select the resistor value to keep the shunt volt-
age small (so it does not affect the source current)
while providing enough signal for the lock-in to
measure.

Which current gain should you use? The current

gain determines the input current noise of the lock-
in as well as its measurement bandwidth. Signals
far above the input bandwidth are attenuated by
6 dB/oct. The noise and bandwidth are listed
below.

Gain Noise Bandwidth

106 130 fA/√Hz 70 kHz

108 13 fA/√Hz 700 Hz

The current gain is selected in the INPUT menu

when the I input is in use.

3-22
 SR850 Basics

INTRINSIC (RANDOM) NOISE SOURCES

Random noise finds its way into experiments in a amount of broadband noise that will be amplified.
variety of ways. Good experimental design can This affects the dynamic reserve. The time con-
reduce these noise sources and improve the stant sets the amount of noise which will be meas-
measurement stability and accuracy. ured at the reference frequency. See the SIGNAL
INPUT AMPLIFIER discussion for more informa-
There are a variety of intrinsic noise sources which tion about Johnson noise.
are present in all electronic signals. These sources
are physical in origin. Shot noise
Electric current has noise due to the finite nature
Johnson noise of the charge carriers. There is always some non-
Every resistor generates a noise voltage across its uniformity in the electron flow which generates
terminals due to thermal fluctuations in the elec- noise in the current. This noise is called shot
tron density within the resistor itself. These fluctua- noise. This can appear as voltage noise when cur-
tions give rise to an open-circuit noise voltage, rent is passed through a resistor, or as noise in a
1/2 current measurement. The shot noise or current
V noise (rms) = ( 4k TR∆f) noise is given by
1/2
where k=Boltzmann's constant (1.38x10-23 J/°K), Inoise (rms) = (2q I∆f)
T is the temperature in °Kelvin (typically 300°K), R
is the resistance in Ohms, and ∆f is the bandwidth where q is the electron charge (1.6x10 -19
in Hz. ∆f is the bandwidth of the measurement. Coulomb), I is the RMS AC current or DC current
depending upon the circuit, and ∆f is the
Since the input signal amplifier in the SR850 has a bandwidth.
bandwidth of approximately 300 kHz, the effective
noise at the amplifier input is Vnoise = 70√R nVrms When the current input of a lock-in is used to
or 350√R nV pk-pk. This noise is broadband and if measure an AC signal current, the bandwidth is
the source impedance of the signal is large, can typically so small that shot noise is not important.
determine the amount of dynamic reserve
required. 1/f noise
Every 10 Ω resistor, no matter what it is made of,
The amount of noise measured by the lock-in is has the same Johnson noise. However, there is
determined by the measurement bandwidth. excess noise in addition to Johnson noise which
Remember, the lock-in does not narrow its detec- arises from fluctuations in resistance due to the
tion bandwidth until after the phase sensitive current flowing through the resistor. For carbon
detectors. In a lock-in, the equivalent noise band- composition resistors, this is typically 0.1 µV-3 µV
width (ENBW) of the low pass filter (time constant) of rms noise per Volt of applied across the resis-
sets the detection bandwidth. In this case, the tor. Metal film and wire-wound resistors have
measured noise of a resistor at the lock-in input, about 10 times less noise. This noise has a 1/f
typically the source impedance of the signal, is spectrum and makes measurements at low fre-
simply quencies more difficult.

V noise (rms) = 0.13 R ENBW nV Other sources of 1/f noise include noise found in
vacuum tubes and semiconductors.
The SR850 displays the ENBW in the TIME
CONSTANT menu. This is the correct noise band- Total noise
width for the time constant and the number of All of these noise sources are incoherent. The
poles and should be used to calculate the detect- total random noise is the square root of the sum of
ed Johnson noise. The displayed ENBW does not the squares of all the incoherent noise sources.
take the synchronous filter into account.

The signal amplifier bandwidth determines the

3-23
SR850 Basics

3-24
 SR850 Basics

EXTERNAL NOISE SOURCES

In addition to the intrinsic noise sources discussed For example, if the noise source is a power circuit,
in the previously, there are a variety of external then f = 60 Hz and V noise = 120 V. Cstray can be
noise sources within the laboratory. estimated using a parallel plate equivalent capaci-
tor. If the capacitance is roughly an area of 1 cm2
Most of these noise sources are asynchronous, at a separated by 10 cm, then Cstray is 0.009 pF.
i.e. they are not related to the reference and do The resulting noise current will be 400 pA (at
not occur at the reference frequency or its harmon- 60 Hz). This small noise current can be thousands
ics. Examples include lighting fixtures, motors, of times larger than the signal current. If the noise
cooling units, radios, computer screens, etc. source is at a higher frequency, the coupled noise
These noise sources affect the measurement by will be even greater.
increasing the required dynamic reserve or length-
ening the time constant. If the noise source is at the reference frequency,
then the problem is much worse. The lock-in
Some noise sources, however, are related to the rejects noise at other frequencies, but pick-up at
reference and, if picked up in the signal, will add or the reference frequency appears as signal!
subtract from the actual signal and cause errors in
the measurement. Typical sources of synchronous Cures for capacitive noise coupling include:
noise are ground loops between the experiment,
detector and lock-in, and electronic pick up from 1) Removing or turning off the noise source.
the reference oscillator or experimental apparatus.
2) Keeping the noise source far from the
Many of these noise sources can be minimized experiment (reducing Cstray). Do not bring
with good laboratory practice and experiment the signal cables close to the noise
design. There are several ways in which noise source.
sources are coupled into the signal path.
3) Designing the experiment to measure volt-
Capacitive coupling ages with low impedance (noise current
An AC voltage from a nearby piece of apparatus generates very little voltage).
can couple to a detector via a stray capacitance.
Although Cstray may be very small, the coupled 4) Installing capacitive shielding by placing
noise may still be larger than a weak experimental both the experiment and detector in a
signal. This is especially damaging if the coupled metal box.
noise is synchronous (at the reference frequency).
Inductive coupling
Stray Capacitance An AC current in a nearby piece of apparatus can
Experiment Noise couple to the experiment via a magnetic field. A
Source changing current in a nearby circuit gives rise to a
changing magnetic field which induces an emf
(dØ B/dt) in the loop connecting the detector to the
Detector
experiment. This is like a transformer with the
experiment-detector loop as the secondary
winding.
We can estimate the noise current caused by a
stray capacitance by, B(t)
Experiment

i = C stray dV = ωC stray V noise

dt
Detector Noise
Source
where ω is 2π times the noise frequency, Vnoise is
the noise amplitude, and Cstray is the stray
capacitance.

3-25
 SR850 Basics

Cures for inductively coupled noise include: Microphonics

Not all sources of noise are electrical in origin.
1) Removing or turning off the interfering Mechanical noise can be translated into electrical
noise source. noise by microphonic effects. Physical changes in
the experiment or cables (due to vibrations for
2) Reduce the area of the pick-up loop by example) can result in electrical noise over the
using twisted pairs or coaxial cables, or entire frequency range of the lock-in.
even twisting the 2 coaxial cables used in
differential connections. For example, consider a coaxial cable connecting
a detector to a lock-in. The capacitance of the
3) Using magnetic shielding to prevent the cable is a function of its geometry. Mechanical
magnetic field from crossing the area of vibrations in the cable translate into a capacitance
the experiment. that varies in time, typically at the vibration fre-
quency. Since the cable is governed by Q=CV,
4) Measuring currents, not voltages, from taking the derivative, we have
high impedance detectors.
C dV + V dC = dQ = i
dt dt dt
Resistive coupling or ground loops
Currents flowing through the ground connections Mechanical vibrations in the cable which cause a
can give rise to noise voltages. This is especially a dC/dt will give rise to a current in the cable. This
problem with reference frequency ground currents. current affects the detector and the measured
signal.
Experiment
Detector
Some ways to minimize microphonic signals are:

1) Eliminate mechanical vibrations near the

experiment.
I(t)
2) Tie down cables carrying sensitive signals
so they do not move.
Noise Source
3) Use a low noise cable that is designed to
In this illustration, the detector is measuring the reduce microphonic effects.
signal relative to a ground far from the rest of the
experiment. The experiment senses the detector Thermocouple effects
signal plus the voltage due to the noise source's The emf created by junctions between dissimilar
ground return current passing through the finite metals can give rise to many microvolts of slowly
resistance of the ground between the experiment varying potentials. This source of noise is typically
and the detector. The detector and the experiment at very low frequency since the temperature of the
are grounded at different places which, in this detector and experiment generally changes slowly.
case, are at different potentials. This effect is large on the scale of many detector
outputs and can be a problem for low frequency
Cures for ground loop problems include: measurements, especially in the mHz range.

1) Grounding everything to the same physi- Some ways to minimize thermocouple effects are:
cal point.
1) Hold the temperature of the experiment or
2) Using a heavy ground bus to reduce the detector constant.
resistance of ground connections.
2) Use a compensation junction, i.e. a
3) Removing sources of large ground cur- second junction in reverse polarity which
rents from the ground bus used for small generates an emf to cancel the thermal
signals. potential of the first junction. This second
junction should be held at the same tem-
perature as the first junction.
3-26
 SR850 Basics

NOISE MEASUREMENTS
Lock-in amplifiers can be used to measure noise. moving average of X is computed. This is the
Noise measurements are generally used to char- mean value of X over some past history. The
acterize components and detectors. present mean value of X is subtracted from the
present value of X to find the deviation of X from
The SR850 measures input signal noise AT the the mean. Finally, the moving average of the abso-
reference frequency. Many noise sources have a lute value of the deviations is calculated. This cal-
frequency dependence which the lock-in can culation is called the mean average deviation or
measure. MAD. This is not the same as an RMS calculation.
However, if the noise is Gaussian in nature, then
How does a lock-in measure noise? the RMS noise and the MAD noise are related by
Remember that the lock-in detects signals close to a constant factor.
the reference frequency. How close? Input signals
within the detection bandwidth set by the low pass The SR850 uses the MAD method to estimate the
filter time constant and roll-off appear at the output RMS noise quantities Xn, Yn and Rn. The advan-
at a frequency f=fsig -fref. Input noise near fref tage of this technique is its numerical simplicity
appears as noise at the output with a bandwidth of and speed.
DC to the detection bandwidth.
The noise calculations for X, Y and R occur at
The noise is simply the standard deviation (root of 512 Hz. At each sample, the mean and moving
the mean of the squared deviations)of the meas- average of the absolute value of the deviations is
ured X, Y or R . The SR850 can measure this calculated. The averaging time (for the mean and
noise exactly by recording the output quantity on a average deviation) depends upon the time con-
chart display and then calculating the standard stant. The averaging time is selected by the
deviation using the trace math functions. The SR850 and ranges from 10 to 80 times the time
noise, in Volts/√Hz, is simply the standard devia- constant. Shorter averaging times yield a very
tion divided by the square root of the equivalent poor estimate of the noise (the mean varies rapidly
noise bandwidth of the time constant. and the deviations are not averaged well). Longer
averaging times, while yielding better results, take
For Gaussian noise, the equivalent noise band- a long time to settle to a steady answer.
width (ENBW) of a low pass filter is the bandwidth
of the perfect rectangular filter which passes the To change the settling time, change the time con-
same amount of noise as the real filter. The stant. Remember, shorter settling times use small-
ENBW is displayed along with the time constant in er time constants (higher noise bandwidths) and
the GAIN/TC menu. yield noisier noise estimates.

Noise estimation The quantities Xn, Yn and Rn are displayed in

The above technique, while mathematically sound, units of Volts/√Hz. The ENBW of the time constant
can not provide a real time output or an analog is already factored into the calculation. Thus, the
output proportional to the measured noise. For mean value of Xn should not depend upon the
these measurements, the SR850 can estimate the time constant.
X, Y or R noise directly.
The SR850 performs the noise calculations all of
To display or record the noise of X, for example, the time, whether or not Xn, Yn or Rn are being
simply define a trace as Xn (in the Trace/Scan recorded or displayed. Thus, as soon as Xn is dis-
menu). The quantity Xn is computed in real time played, the value shown is up to date and no set-
and is an estimate of the noise of X. The quantities tling time is required. If the sensitivity is changed,
Yn and Rn are estimations of the Y noise and R then the noise estimate will need to settle to the
noise. correct value.

The quantity Xn is computed from the measured For most applications, noise estimation and stan-
values of X using the following algorithm. The dard deviation calculations yield the same answer.

3-27
 SR850 Basics

Which method you use depends upon the require-

ments of the experiment.

R noise
The quantity Rn can be somewhat hard to under-
stand. For example, suppose X and Y are equally
noisy and centered about zero. The values of R
are always positive (magnitude) and thus average
to a nonzero value. In this case, X and Y noise
result in an average R which can be interpreted as
the minimum detectable value of R. Increasing the
time constant reduces the X and Y output noise
and reduces this average value of R. The calcula-
tion of R noise by either method will typically yield
a value smaller than either Xn or Yn. This is
because X and Y have both positive and negative
values with a zero center yielding large deviations
while R is always positive with a non zero mean
and has smaller deviations. In this case, R noise is
mathematically defined but not indicative of the
Gaussian noise typically measured.

If there is a nonzero steady state value of R such

that the noise excursions of R are small compared
with the mean R, then R noise is meaningful. This
is the case when measuring noise in the presence
of real detectable signal. In this case, the value Rn
approaches Xn and Yn.

3-28
 FRONT PANEL

Brightness Control Soft Keys Spin Knob Key Pad Disk Drive

MODEL SR850 DSP LOCK-IN AMPLIFIER CONTROL SYSTEM

START PAUSE CURSOR ACTIVE PRINT HELP

CONT RESET DISPLAY
A B C D E LOCAL F

ENTRY MENU

7 8 9 MARK REF
PHASE
INPUT
FILTERS

G H I

4 5 6 EDIT
MARK
GAIN
TC
OUTPUT
OFFSET

J K L

1 2 3 CURSOR
SETUP
TRACE
SCAN
DISPLAY
SCALE
AUTO
M N O

AUTO AUTO . _
RESERVE GAIN 0 CURSOR
MAX/MIN
AUX
OUTPUTS
MATH

P Q R S T

AUTO AUTO ALT EXP ENTER DISK SYSTEM

PHASE SCALE SETUP

U V W X Y Z

REFERENCE IN SINE OUT OUTPUT SIGNAL IN

CH1 CH2 A-I B

SRS STANFORD RESEARCH SYSTEMS

1M Ω 50 Ω <20mA 100M Ω/15pF

Power Button Video Display Front Panel BNC Connectors

POWER BUTTON

The SR850 is turned on by pushing in the power backspace [←] key while the power is
button. The video display may take a few seconds turned on. The unit will use the default set-
to warm up and become visible. Adjust the bright- tings. The default setup is listed in a later
ness until the screen is easily readable.The model, chapter.
firmware version and serial number of the unit are
displayed when the power is turned on. CLK This test checks the CMOS clock and cal-
endar for a valid date and time. If the there
A series of internal tests are performed at this is an error, the time will be reset to a default
point. Each test is displayed as it is performed and time. Change the clock settings using the
the results are represented graphically as OK or SYSTEM SETUP menu.
NOT OK. The tests are described below.
DSP This test checks the digital signal processor
RAM This test performs a read/write test to the (DSP).
processor RAM. In addition, the nonvolatile
backup memory is tested. All instrument VIDEO DISPLAY
settings are stored in nonvolatile memory
and are retained when the power is turned The monochrome video display is the user inter-
off. If the memory check passes, then the face for data display and front panel programming
instrument returns to the settings in effect operations. The resolution of the display is 640H
when the power was last turned off. If there by 480V. The brightness is adjusted using the
is a memory error, then the stored settings brightness control knob located at the upper left
are lost and the default settings are used. corner. As with most video displays, do not set the
brightness higher than necessary. The display
ROM This test checks the processor ROM. may be adjusted left/right and up/down in the
Screen Settings function in the SYSTEM SETUP
CLR This test indicates whether the unit is being menu.
reset. To reset the unit, hold down the

4-1
 Front Panel

The main area of the display is occupied by the In these cases, the knob function is selected by
output display(s). Both single and dual trace dis- the soft keys. The [CURSOR] key, which can be
plays are available. In addition, each display can pressed at any time, will set the knob function to
be formatted as a large numeric readout with bar scrolling the cursor if there is a strip chart dis-
graph, a polar graph, or a strip chart. played.

A complete description of the screen display DISK DRIVE

options follows in the next section.
The 3.5" disk drive is used to store data and instru-
SOFT KEYS ment settings. Double sided, double density disks
should be used. The disk capacity is 720k bytes
The SR850 has a menu driven user interface. The formatted. The disk format is DOS compatible.
6 soft keys to the right of the video display have Disks written by the SR850 may be read by PC
different functions depending upon the information compatible computers equipped with a 3.5" drive
displayed in the menu boxes at the right of the and DOS 3.0 or higher.
screen. In general, the soft keys have two uses.
The first is to toggle a feature on and off or to Only use double sided double density (DS/DD)
choose between various options. The second is to disks. Do not use high density (DS/HD) disks.
highlight a parameter which is then changed using
the spin knob or numeric keypad. In both cases, FRONT PANEL BNC CONNECTORS
the soft keys select the parameters which are dis-
played adjacent to them. Refer to the previous section, SR850 Basics, for
detailed information about each input or output.
KEYPAD
Reference Input
The keypad consists of five groups of keys. The The reference input can be a sine wave (rising
ENTRY keys are used to enter numeric parame- zero crossing detected) or a TTL pulse or square
ters which have been highlighted by a soft key. wave (rising or falling edge). The input impedance
The MENU keys select a menu of soft keys. is 1 MΩ AC coupled (>1 Hz) for the sine input. For
Pressing a menu key will change the menu boxes low frequencies (<1 Hz), it is necessary to use a
which are displayed next to the soft keys. Each TTL reference signal. The TTL input provides the
menu presents a group of related parameters and best overall performance and should be used
functions. The CONTROL keys start and stop whenever possible.
actual data acquisition, select the cursor and
toggle the active display. These keys are not in a Sine Out
menu since they are used frequently and while dis- The internal oscillator output has a 50Ω output
playing any menu. The SYSTEM keys print the impedance and varies in amplitude from 4 mVrms
screen to a printer and display help messages. to 5 Vrms. The output level is specified into a high
Once again, these keys can be accessed from any impedance load. If the output is terminated in a
menu. The AUTO keys perform auto functions and low impedance, such as 50Ω, the amplitude will be
are accessible from any menu. less than the programmed amplitude (half for a
50Ω load).
A complete description of the keys follows in the
next section. This output is active even when an external refer-
ence is used. In this case, the sine wave is phase
SPIN KNOB locked to the reference and its amplitude is pro-
grammable.
The spin knob is used to adjust parameters which
have been highlighted using the soft keys. Most A TTL sync output is provided on the rear panel.
numeric entry fields may be adjusted using the This output is useful for triggering scopes and
knob. Some parameters with many options, sensi- other equipment at the reference frequency. The
tivity for example, use the knob to select the TTL sync output is a square wave derived from the
desired option. In addition, functions such as dis- zero crossings of the sine output.
play zooming and scrolling use the knob as well.

4-2
 Front Panel

Ch1 & Ch2 Outputs

The Channel 1 and Channel 2 outputs can be con-
figured to output a voltage from -10 V to +10 V
proportional to X, Y, R, θ, or Traces 1 through 4.
±10 V is full scale. The outputs can source 10 mA
maximum.

Signal Inputs
The input mode may be single-ended, A, or diffe-
rential, A-B. The A and B inputs are voltage inputs
with 10 MΩ, 25 pF input impedance. Their connec-
tor shields are isolated from the chassis by 10 Ω
(Ground) or 1 kΩ (Float). Do not apply more than
50 V to either input. The shields should never
exceed 1 V. The I (current) input is 1 kΩ to a virtu-
al ground.

4-3
Front Panel

4-4
 SCREEN DISPLAY

Soft Key Definitions.

Pressing the corresponding
Lock-in Parameters soft key will either highlight a
field or select an option.
Sensitivity and Time Constant Input configuration
Dynamic Reserve and Slope and signal filters Soft Keys

Full Scale = 10 mV 100 mS Syncro Sensitivity

Dyn Reserve = 0 dB 12 dB/oct Line 2xLin AC A 10 mV f.s.
Trace 1 X 60 dB gain
Reserve
Top
Display
X = 9.7284 mV Max Min
Manual

± 10.000 e-3 0.0 V

Trace 2 Y Time Constant

100 mS

Bottom
Display
Y =-1.2050 mV 1.2 Hz
Filter dB/oct.
6 12
18 24
± 10.000 e-3 0.0 V
Synchronous
Stop Intrnl Fr= 100.00 Hz Off
LOCK Harmonic= 1 LOC < 200Hz

Status and
activity
indicators

DEFAULT DISPLAY

The SR850's default display is shown above. This the left end, and zero is in the middle. Whenever
is the display format in effect when the unit is the sensitivity is changed, the bar graphs are
turned on. scaled to the full scale sensitivity. The
[AUTO SCALE] key will scale the active display to
This screen resembles a "normal" lock-in front the actual measured signal (the center remains
panel. The lock-in setup is displayed across the zero). The range and center of a bar graph may be
top of the screen. The sensitivity, reserve, time manually adjusted to expand a portion of the
constant, prefilters and input configuration are all scale.
easily visible. The upper numeric readout and bar
graph show the value of X (Rcosθ) and the lower Status indicators are displayed across the bottom
graph shows the value of Y (Rsinθ). of the screen. These include the reference mode,
unlock alert, reference frequency, harmonic
The bar graphs are normally scaled so that plus detect, overloads, and GPIB/RS232 activity, error
full scale is at the right end, minus full scale is at and remote status.

4-5
 Screen Display

DATA TRACES

The SR850 collects and displays data in the form In most cases, the default trace definitions will suf-
of traces. There are four data traces which may be fice. For specialized situations, the traces may be
defined. Each trace is defined as A•B/C where the redefined to fit the experiment. Some examples:
parameters A, B, and C are chosen from X, Y, R,
θ, Xnoise, Ynoise, Rnoise, Aux Inputs 1-4, Trace 3 R/AI1 Magnitude/Aux Input 1. This
Frequency, and unity (1). C can also be any quan- normalizes the magnitude to
tity squared. The traces are defined in the TRACE/ an external slowly varying
SCAN menu. signal. (detector output nor-
malized to laser power for
Only data traces may be displayed. In order to instance.)
display the quantity X, it is necessary to define a Trace 4 Xn Xnoise. The SR850 calculates
trace to be X and then choose to display that the rms noise of X in the band-
trace. width determined by the time
constant.
When the unit is reset, the traces are defined as Trace 3 AI3 Aux Input 3. Store and display
follows: the value of Aux Input 3. The
Trace 1 X SR850 can monitor an exter-
Trace 2 Y nal voltage while recording
Trace 3 R normal lock-in quantities such
Trace 4 as X, Y, R or θ.
where B and C are set to unity in each case. Trace 4 F Frequency. Store the refer-
ence frequency along with the
X, Y, R or θ.

4-6
 Screen Display

SINGLE and DUAL TRACE DISPLAYS

The screen can be formatted as a single trace Remember, only data traces may be displayed.
(Single) display or a dual trace (Up/Down) display. The traces are defined in the TRACE/SCAN
The screen format is selected in the DISPLAY/ menu. The choices of which traces are displayed,
SCALE menu. There are three displays which may and in which formats, are selected in the
be configured, the Single screen display and the DISPLAY/SCALE menu.
Top and Bottom displays for the split screen. Each
display can show a different trace using a separ- A dual trace screen showing both Bar and Chart
ate display type. displays is shown below. Each display is labelled
with a trace identifier indicating which trace is
There are three different display types - Bar (with being displayed. The trace definition is also
large numbers), Polar, and Chart (of stored traces shown. In the screen below, the top display is
only). The Bar graph resembles a "normal" lock-in showing Trace 1 which is defined to be X.
display. The Polar graph plots X and Y on a circu-
lar graph to illustrate the signal as a vector relative One of the displays is the active display. The
to the reference. The Chart displays stored data in active display is denoted by displaying the trace
a strip chart form, complete with zooming, panning identifier in inverse video (bottom display below).
and cursor. In order to use the analysis functions Certain functions, such Auto Scale and cursor
such as curve fitting, the data must be stored in movement, affect the active display only. The
the buffer and displayed in a strip chart. [ACTIVE DISPLAY] key is used to switch the
active display between the top and bottom dis-
The default screen (pg. 4-5) is a dual trace display plays. A full screen display is always the active
where the top display shows Trace 1 (X) and the display.
bottom display shows Trace 2 (Y). Both displays
are bar graphs.

Full Scale = 10 mV 100 mS Syncro Format

Top display trace Dyn Reserve = 0 dB 12 dB/oct Line 2xLin AC A Single
identifier and trace Trace 1 X Up/Down
definition.
X = 9.7284 mV Monitor
Settings
Input/Output
Display Scale
± 10.000 e-3 0.0 V Full Top
Bottom display trace
identifier and trace Bottom
definition. Shown in Trace
Trace 22 Y 36.000 S 58.332 e-3
inverse to indicate the Type: Chart
active display. Trace: 2

± 50.0 e-3

10 S /div 0.000 S @ 0.0

center = 0.0 ± 50.00 e-3 V
Stop
Stop Intrnl Fr= 100.00 Hz 10 S /div
LOCK Harmonic= 1 LOC

4-7
Screen Display

4-8
 Screen Display

BAR GRAPHS

The most commonly used display type is the Bar graph with large numeric readout. This display most closely
resembles a "normal" lock-in. The bar graph display is shown below. The bar graph only occupies half of the
screen, even when the screen format is full height. Thus, it generally makes sense to use the bar graph in
split screen mode and show two bar graphs.

Trace Identifier Trace Definition

Trace 1 X

X = 9.7284 mV
Full scale range ± 10.000 e-3 0.0 V
Offst Expd

Center value and Trace Units

Trace Offset
and Expand
Indicators

Trace Identifier and Active Display graph to expand a portion of the full scale range
The bar graph is labelled with a trace identifier around a nominal value. The bar will always be
above it. This indicates which trace is being dis- drawn from the center (nominal value).
played. The trace definition is shown next to the
identifier. If this display is the active display, the For the simple traces, X, Y, and R, changing the
trace identifier will be in inverse. When a bar graph sensitivity will automatically scale the bar graphs
is the active display, the [AUTO SCALE] key will so the range is equal to the sensitivity and zero is
scale the bar graph. There is no cursor function for at the center. For other trace definitions, the bar
this display. Pressing the [CURSOR] key will not scaling is not changed when the sensitivity is
activate a cursor. changed.

When the trace definition is simple (X, Y, R, θ or F) Using [AUTO SCALE] will adjust the range to
the trace definition is displayed in the large numer- make the measured output greater than 40% of
ic readout (X=). If the trace is defined as Xn, Yn, the new range. [AUTO SCALE] always returns the
Rn, AI1, AI2, AI3 or AI4, or involves a product or center to zero.
ratio (A•B/C where either B or C or both are non-
unity), then the large readout simply shows 'T1=' Rate
(for Trace 1) instead of the actual parameter(s) The bar graph is updated at a rate of about 7 Hz
being monitored. The trace definition above the while the numeric readout changes at about 2 Hz.
readout is always displayed fully however. When the data is noisy, the bar graph more accu-
rately shows the "noisiness" while with steady
Bar Range and Center readings, the numeric display is an accurate
The graph range and center value are displayed measure of the signal.
below the graph. These values are in the units of
the displayed trace. Offset and Expand
If the trace being shown is affected by a non-zero
Bar Scaling offset or a non-unity expand, then the Offst and
The bar graph scaling can be changed in the Expd alert indicators are turned on.
DISPLAY/SCALE menu. Both the center value
and the range can be changed. This allows the bar

4-9
POLAR GRAPHS

The polar graph is a convenient way to view magnitude and phase. The signal is represented as a vector on
an X-Y coordinate axes. The full screen polar display is shown below. The split screen polar graph is half as
big.

Y Axis (90°)

Signal Vector

X Axis (0°)

Trace Offset
and Expand
Indicators

Offst Expd

Plot of X and Y Signal Vector

The polar graph is not labelled - there is no trace Coherent signals have a steady phase and the
identifier above it. This is because the polar graph signal vector will have a steady direction. Signals
always plots X and Y as a vector. This display which are noisy will move around in direction as
cannot be changed to display any other traces. well as magnitude. The polar display can quickly
Changes made to X and Y, such as offsets, will give a feeling for whether a signal is coherent or
change the vector on the polar graph. Changes not. Signals whose frequencies are close to, but
made to R, such as offset, will not. not synchronous with the reference frequency will
to rotate at the difference frequency between the
The [ACTIVE DISPLAY] key will not select this dis- signal and reference.
play since there is no cursor associated with it and
it cannot be autoscaled. Offset and Expand
If the either X or Y has a non-zero offset or a non-
Scale unity expand, then the Offst and Expd alert indica-
The graph is oriented like a normal X-Y axes. tors are turned on. The vector is plots the offset
Positive X is to the right and positive Y is up, and and expanded quantities X and Y. If X and Y have
zero is in the center. The four circles indicate 25%, unequal expands (differing gains), the signal
50%, 75% and 100% of full scale. The polar graph vector is generally not meaningful.
is always scaled to the full scale sensitivity. Note
that X and Y can both be full scale in amplitude
and the resultant vector exceed full scale by √2 (at
45°).

4-10
 Screen Display

STRIP CHARTS

Chart displays are used to view stored traces. Only stored traces have a time history, thus, only stored traces
may be displayed on a chart. The full screen chart display is shown below. If the split screen format is used,
the chart will display half as many vertical divisions but will be the same as the full size display in all other
aspects.

Trace Identifier Trace Definition Cursor Readout

Trace 2 Y 36.000 S 58.332 e-3

Cursor region is
defined by heavy
dashed lines

Cursor is located at
the Min, Max, or
Mean of the data
within the cursor
region

Trace Offset
and Expand Time value of
Offst Expd 10 S /div 0.000 S
Indicators center = 0.0 ± 50.00 e-3 V right most point

Vertical Vertical range Horizontal scale

center value

Trace Identifier and Active Display

The chart is labelled with a trace identifier at the The chart scaling can be changed in the
upper left. This indicates which trace is being dis- DISPLAY/SCALE menu. Both the vertical scale
played. The trace definition is shown next to the (center value and range) and horizontal scale can
identifier. If this display is the active display, the be changed. [AUTO SCALE] will automatically
trace identifier will be in inverse. When a chart is adjust the vertical center and range to display all
the active display, the [AUTO SCALE] key will of the data within the graph. [AUTO SCALE] will
scale the chart so all of the displayed data is on not change the horizontal scale.
the graph. In addition, when a chart is the active
display, pressing the [CURSOR] key will activate By changing the horizontal scale, the entire trace
the cursor. buffer can be displayed at once or a small portion
may be expanded. If only a portion of the buffer is
Chart Scaling being displayed, use the cursor to pan right and
The graph vertical range is the center value plus left within the buffer.
and minus the range. The center value is the value
of a data point located at the vertical midpoint of Offset and Expand
the graph. The horizontal scale is the number of If the trace being shown is affected by a non-zero
seconds per division across the graph. The time offset or a non-unity expand, then the Offst and
value of the right most point is shown at the Expd alert indicators are turned on.
bottom right. When the most recent point is at the
right, the time shown will be 0.000 S.

4-11
 Screen Display

Data Scrolling
The chart display acts like a strip chart recorder desired display (top or bottom). When the cursor
where the pen is drawing the most recent data. readout is surrounded by this box, the knob
For example, if the sample rate is 1 Hz (1 point adjusts the position of the cursor region. Moving
taken per second) and the horizontal scale is the cursor beyond the edge of the graph pans the
10 S/div, then the graph displays 100 data points display left (showing older data points) and right
(10 divisions x 10 points per division). As new data (showing more recent data points). Remember,
is taken, the old data scrolls to the left at the rate the time window shown in the graph does not
of 10 S/div. This is because new points are added change with time. As the data points get older, the
at a fixed location (right edge of the graph) just like data will scroll to the left as new points are taken.
a strip recorder. In this case, the time value of the
right most point is 0.000 S meaning the most Cursor Display
recent data point. The cursor readout displays the horizontal position
and the trace data at the cursor. The horizontal
The chart displays a fixed window in time which is position is displayed as time (from the beginning of
10 divisions wide (100 seconds in this case) start- the trace), delay (time from the most recent point),
ing Tright seconds ago (where Tright is the time bin (number of data points since the start), and fre-
value of the right most point). Since the data is quency (if the reference is internally swept). In this
always getting older, it scrolls left continuously illustration, the cursor point was taken 36 seconds
(whenever data is being taken). before the most recent point.

Cursor Marks
The cursor region is the graph region between the While data is being added to the data buffer,
two heavy vertical dashed lines. The cursor region events may be marked using the [MARK] key.
may be set to 1 division (wide), 1/2 division Pressing [MARK] will tag the next trace buffer
(norm), or a single vertical line (spot). The cursor location. A mark will appear on the chart and will
region does not change with horizontal scaling. scroll with the data. This is analogous to marking a
The cursor is the small square which seeks the real strip chart while it is recording. Marks are
minimum, maximum, or mean of the data within useful for marking when an external event
the cursor region. When seeking min or max, the occurred or when the experimental conditions
cursor is located at the position of the data point changed.
which is the min or max. This allows peaks and
valleys in the data to be easily specified. When A maximum of eight marks may be placed in the
seeking the mean, the X position of the cursor is at data buffer. A mark will appear on ALL stored
the center of the cursor region and the Y position traces at the same buffer location. The different
is the mean of the data within the region. The mark symbols are shown below.
cursor type is defined in the CURSOR SETUP
menu.

Often the display is scaled such that there are A mark is always placed at the buffer start to mark
many more data points than can be resolved on the oldest (first) data point at the start of a scan.
the display. The chart display is 496 pixels wide. If
more than that number of data points are being The [EDIT MARK] key allows the mark data to be
displayed, then each horizontal position repre- viewed. The value of each stored trace and the
sents multiple data points. In this case, a vertical time the mark was placed is displayed. The user
line is drawn between the minimum and maximum can add comments to the mark data to label a spe-
data points represented by a single horizontal cific event.
location. In this case, even the spot cursor region
represents multiple data points. The cursor will When trace data is saved to disk, the marks are
seek the max, min or mean of these data points. saved as well. When a trace is recalled from disk,
the marks are recalled as well. Existing marks are
Pressing the [CURSOR] key will draw a box replaced with the recalled marks.
around the cursor readout of the active chart dis-
play. Use the [ACTIVE DISPLAY] key to select the

4-12
 Screen Display

TRACE SCANS, SWEEPS & ALIASING

Trace and Scan parameters are selected in the imum scan length is 125 seconds at 512 Hz or 12
TRACE/SCAN menu. days at 62.5 mHz (64000 points). Changing the
sample rate will only change the scan length if the
Trace Storage maximum number of data points is already being
Having defined up to four data traces for an exper- used. Otherwise, the number of data points in the
iment, the issue of data storage needs to be scan is changed to keep the scan length constant.
addressed. Only traces that are stored may be The number of points in the buffer can vary from 1
displayed in strip chart form. If a graph or to a maximum of 16000, 32000, or 64000 depend-
record of a trace over time is desired, then that ing upon the number of traces being stored.
trace's data must be stored. The SR850 can
record up to 64000 data points in memory. The There is only one Scan Length, i.e. the number of
data buffer can store 64000 points of a single points stored will be the same for all traces being
trace, 32000 points of two traces, or 16000 points stored.
of all four traces. When defining the traces, the
Store or Do Not Store option needs to be decided. Sweep Time
The default is all four traces stored. The scan length is the sweep time for frequency
sweeps and Aux Output sweeps. Swept parame-
Data Points and Bins ters are synchronized with the data acquisition.
Data points stored in a trace are sometimes For example, if the internal reference is pro-
referred to by their bin position within the trace grammed to sweep from 1 kHz to 2 kHz, the
buffer. The oldest data point is bin0, the next point sweep will take a scan length to finish. The fre-
is bin1, etc. A trace with N points numbers them quency will change once per stored point. Thus, if
from 0 to N-1. the sample rate is 1 Hz and the scan length is 100
seconds, the frequency will change 100 times and
Sample Rate move from 1 kHz to 2 kHz in 100 seconds. At each
The Sample Rate can be varied from 512 Hz down sample, the trace data is stored before the swept
to 62.5 mHz (1 point every 16 sec). The sample parameter is changed. The next data point is
rate sets how often points are added to the stor- taken after one sample interval to allow the out-
age buffers. All stored traces are sampled at the puts to settle as long as possible.
same rate (and at the same times).
End of Scan
In addition to the internal sample rates, samples When the scan is complete, data storage can stop
can be triggered by an external TTL trigger. This or continue.
mode is selected by increasing the sample rate
past 512 Hz. In this mode, a sample is recorded The first case is called 1 Shot (data points are
within 2 ms of a rising edge trigger on the rear stored for a single Scan Length). At the end of the
panel Trigger input. Triggers which occur faster scan, data acquisition stops and swept parameters
than 512 Hz are ignored. When viewing an exter- are held at their final stop values.
nally triggered data trace on a chart graph, set the
cursor readout to Bin (in the CURSOR SETUP The second case is called Loop. In this case, a
menu). This displays the horizontal position of the new scan is started at the end of each scan.
cursor as bin or data point number rather than Scans repeat indefinitely until halted by the user.
time (for scaling purposes, the time scale of the The data buffer will store as many points as possi-
graph is based upon a 1 Hz sample rate - bins and ble (16000, 32000 or 64000 depending upon the
seconds are equivalent). number of stored traces). The buffer will start filling
at the start and will hold as many scans as will fit.
Scan Length The buffer always holds at least one complete
The Scan Length is the time duration of a single scan. If the scan is short, then the buffer will hold
scan expressed in seconds. The maximum scan multiple scans of data. When the buffer end is
length is determined by the number of stored reached, the buffer starts filling at the beginning
traces (maximum storage buffer length) and the again. The oldest data will be overwritten and lost.
sample rate. When storing a single trace, the max- This looping continues indefinitely. In this mode,

4-13
 Screen Display

the scan length is only meaningful is parameters The samples represent a sine wave much slower
are being swept. Once the trace buffer has looped than 2 Hz that isn't actually present in the output!
around, the oldest point (at any time) is at bin#0 The chart display of this trace will show a sine
and the most recent point is at bin#k where k is wave at a very low frequency and will be rather
the buffer length (minus 1). misleading. In this case, a much higher sampling
rate will solve the problem.
The default mode is Loop.
Aliasing occurs whenever the output signal
Default Scan being sampled contains signals at frequencies
Upon reset, all four traces are stored for a maxi- greater than 1/2 the sample rate. The effect is
mum of 16000 points. The sample rate is 1 Hz, the most noticeable when trying to sample an output
scan length is 16000 seconds and the scan mode frequency at an integer multiple of the sample rate
is Loop. The trace definitions are X, Y, R and θ for (as above). The above aliasing problem will be the
Traces 1-4. same for a 1 kHz output (500 times the sample
rate) as for the 2 Hz output.
Starting and Stopping a Scan
The [START/CONT] and [PAUSE/RESET] keys Generally, the highest possible sample rate should
are used to control data acquisition. Basically, the be used given the desired scan length and number
[START/CONT] key starts a scan or continues a of stored traces. The lock-in time constant and
paused scan and the [PAUSE/RESET] key pauses filter slope should be chosen to attenuate signals
a scan or resets a finished scan. See the discus- at frequencies higher than 1/2 the sample rate as
sion of keypad operation later in this section for much as possible.
details. Scans can also be controlled via the com-
puter interfaces. See the programming section for Aliasing can occur with the polar and bar graph
an explanation. displays as well. These displays sample the output
signal at a fixed rate.
In addition, the rear panel Trigger input can be
used to start a scan. To select this mode, set the
Trigger Starts option in the AUX menu. In this
mode, a rising TTL trigger will act the same as the
[START/CONT] key. The sample rate can be
either internal or Triggered. In the first case, the
trigger starts the scan and data is sampled at the
programmed sample rate (up to 512 Hz). In the
latter case, the first trigger will start the scan and
data will be sampled at every subsequent trigger.

Aliasing Effects
In any sampled data stream, it is possible to
sample a high frequency signal such that it will
appear to be a much lower frequency. This is
called aliasing.

For example, suppose the lock-in is detecting a

signal near 1 Hz with a relatively short time con-
stant. The X output will have a DC component and
a 2 Hz component (2xf). If the sample rate is 2 Hz,
then the samples may be taken as illustrated
below.

1 second

4-14
 Screen Display

SETTINGS & INPUT/OUTPUT MONITOR MENU DISPLAY

The upper two lines of the screen are the monitor The Soft Key menu boxes define the functions of
display (see the screen on pg. 4-5). The lock-in the 6 soft keys to the right of the screen. The menu
settings (sensitivity, time constant, etc.) or the boxes are grouped into menus. Pressing each of
lock-in signal measurements (X, Y, R, θ, and the the ten Menu keys will display a different menu of
Aux Inputs) may be monitored. Use the DISPLAY boxes. Related functions are grouped into a single
menu to select the type of monitor (Settings or menu.
Input/Output).
In general, pressing a soft key does one of two
things. One is to toggle between 2 or 3 specific
Full Scale = 10 mV 100 mS Syncro DigPll options. An example is the Filter Slope box illus-
Dyn Reserve = 40 dB 12 dB/oct Line 2xLin AC A
trated on page 4-5. Pressing the fourth soft key
toggles the slope from 6 to 12 to 18 to 24 and back
The Settings Monitor is shown above. The sensi- to 6 dB/oct.
tivity, dynamic reserve, time constant and roll-off
are always displayed. When the synchronous The second soft key mode is to highlight an entry
output filter is selected AND the detection frequen- field and knob function. An example would be the
cy is below 200 Hz, then Syncro will be displayed. Phase Adjust. Pressing this soft key will highlight
If the detection frequency is above 200 Hz, syn- the phase setting. The phase may then be adjust-
chronous filtering is not active and Syncro is not ed with the knob or entered as a value using the
displayed. When the external reference is below numeric entry keys. Each menu is described at
10 Hz, the digital phase lock loop is active and length in a following section.
DigPll is displayed.

The input filters are shown when they are in, their
display boxes are empty when the corresponding
filter is out. The input coupling and type (A, A-B, or
I) are always shown.

X= 135.23 mV R= 137.14 mV A1= 0.000 V A3= 0.000 V

Y= 22.78 mV θ = 9.56 ° A2= 0.000 V A4= 0.000 V

The Input/Output Monitor is shown above. The

values of X, Y, R and θ are shown, regardless of
the trace definitions or displays chosen. In addi-
tion, the readings of the rear panel Aux Inputs are
displayed. These readings are updated a few
times a second.

4-15
STATUS INDICATORS
Run FILTR Ext S Fr= 100.00 Hz GPIB ERR SRQ TRIG
RESRV OUTPT UNLOCK Harmonic= 1 LOC ALT

There are a number of status indicators which are OUTPT

displayed at the bottom of the screen. These If the output (either X, Y, R or a trace output volt-
include the scan, unlock, and overload indicators, age) is greater than 1.09 times full scale, then
the reference frequency and source, and interface OUTPT is displayed. This can occur if the sensitiv-
status. ity is too low or if the output is expanded such that
the output voltage exceeds 10 V. Note that a trace
Stop • Run 1 • Run • Pause • Done output can overload even if it is not being dis-
When the data buffers are reset (pressing played on the screen or output to CH1 or CH2.
[PAUSE RESET] while paused or done), then
Stop will be indicated. Intrnl • Sweep • Ext S • Ext + • Ext -
If the internal reference is being used, then Intrnl is
When a scan is in progress in the 1 Shot mode, displayed. If the internal reference frequency is
Run 1 is indicated. The storage of trace data in the being swept, then Sweep is displayed. When
buffer continues until the scan is complete at using an external reference source, the reference
which time Done is displayed. mode may be set to Sine (Ext S), Rising TTL edge
(Ext +), or Falling TTL edge (Ext -).
If a Loop scan is in progress, Run is displayed.
The storage of trace data in the buffer may contin- LOCK • UNLOCK
ues indefinitely. When the buffer fills, the oldest The UNLOCK indicator turns on if the SR850 can
data is written over. not lock to the external reference. LOCK is dis-
played when the SR850 is successfully locked to
If the scan is paused (with the [PAUSE/RESET] the reference. LOCK is always on when in internal
key for instance), then the Pause indicator will be reference mode.
on. Pressing [START/CONT] will continue the
scan from a paused state. Fr= XX.YYY Hz
The reference frequency (internal or external) is
RESRV • INPUT displayed continuously.
If the analog signal amplifier overloads before the
phase sensitive detector, then RESRV or INPUT is Harmonic = N
displayed. The SR850 can detect synchronous signals at N
times the reference frequency. Generally, N is
RESRV indicates that the signal amplifier is over- equal to 1.
loaded. Change the sensitivity or increase the
dynamic reserve. GPIB • RS232
Flashes when there is activity on the computer
INPUT indicates that the actual signal input is interfaces. This does not flash for printer or plotter
overloaded. This occurs for voltage inputs greater activity.
than 1.4Vpk (unless removed by AC coupling) or
current inputs greater than 10 µA DC or 1.4 µA AC ERR
(1MΩ gain) or 100 nA DC or 14 nA AC (100MΩ Flashes whenever there is a computer interface
gain). Reduce the input signal level. error such as an illegal command or out of range
parameter is received. This does not flash for a
FILTR printer or plotter error.
If an overload occurs in the low pass filters after
the PSD's, then FILTR is displayed. Increase the LOC • REM
time constant or filter roll-off or decrease the REM is on when the front panel is locked out by a
dynamic reserve. computer interface. No front panel adjustments
may be made. To return the unit to local control (if

4-16
 Screen Display

allowed), press the [HELP] key. LOC is on when-

ever local front panel control is allowed (usually
on).

SRQ
This indicator is on whenever a GPIB Service
Request is generated by the SR850. SRQ stays
on until a serial poll is completed.

ALT
Indicates that the ALTERNATE keypad is in use.
The ALTERNATE keypad uses the alphabetic leg-
ends printed below each key. To enter the ALT
mode, press the [ALT] key once. Pressing the
keys will now enter letters into the active entry
field. The [0]...[9], [.], [-], [←] and [ALT] have the
same function in the ALTERNATE keypad. To
return to the normal keypad, press the [ALT] key
again.

4-17
Screen Display

4-18
 KEYPAD

CONTROL SYSTEM

START PAUSE CURSOR ACTIVE PRINT HELP

CONT RESET DISPLAY
A B C D E LOCAL F

ENTRY MENU

INPUT
7 8 9 MARK REF
PHASE FILTERS

G H I

4 5 6 EDIT
MARK
GAIN
TC
OUTPUT
OFFSET

J K L

1 2 3 CURSOR
SETUP
TRACE
SCAN
DISPLAY
SCALE
AUTO
M N O

AUTO AUTO . _
RESERVE GAIN 0 CURSOR
MAX/MIN
AUX
OUTPUTS
MATH

P Q R S T

AUTO AUTO ALT EXP ENTER DISK SYSTEM

PHASE SCALE SETUP

U V W X Y Z

REFERENCE IN SINE OUT OUTPUT SIGNAL IN

NORMAL AND ALTERNATE KEYS
CH1 [REF/PHASE]
CH2 A-I B
Sets the reference source and phase shift. Also
The normal key definitions are printed on each sets the internal oscillator frequency, sweep limits
key. In addition,
1M Ω
each key also
50 Ω
has an alternate <20mA
and output level. 100M Ω/15pF
definition printed below it. The [ALT] key toggles
the keypad between the two definitions. The ALT [INPUT/FILTERS]
screen indicator is on when the alternate defini- Configures the signal inputs and selects the notch
tions are in use. The [0]...[9], [.], [-], [←] and [ALT] prefilters.
keys have the same definition in both modes. The
alternate keys should only be used when access- [GAIN/TC]
ing files on the disk drive or entering labels. Select the full scale sensitivity, dynamic reserve,
time constant and roll-off.
MENU KEYS
[OUTPUT/OFFSET]
All operating parameters of the SR850 are Configures the Channel 1 and 2 front panel out-
grouped into function menus. The ten menu keys puts and sets the X, Y and R output offsets and
select which menu of parameters is displayed next output expands.
to the six soft keys. The soft keys then either
toggle a parameter, highlight a parameter entry [TRACE/SCAN]
field (for numeric entry or knob adjustment), or dis- Define the four data traces, the scan length and
play a submenu. These menus are listed below. sample rate.

4-19
[DISPLAY/SCALE] A new phase shift may now be Phase Adjust
Select full screen or split screen display, settings entered using the numeric 0.000 deg.
or input/output monitor, and display scaling. keys. For example, to set the
phase shift to 12.34 degrees,
[AUX OUTPUTS] press [1] [2] [.] [3] [4] and then Rotate
Program the four Aux Output voltages and sweep the [ENTER] key. Entries may 90 deg.
limits. Also select scan starts with trigger. be made in exponential form
using the [EXP] key. The entry
[MATH] above may be made by pressing [1] [.] [2] [3] [4]
Provides data smoothing, curve fitting, statistical [EXP] [1] and then the [ENTER] key.
analysis, and calculator functions for operating on
stored data traces. The backspace [←] key may be used to correct
any entry errors made before pressing [ENTER].
[DISK] To cancel the entry before pressing [ENTER],
This menu stores and recalls data and settings to press the same soft key which highlighted the
and from the disk. Also contains a disk utilities field. The entry will revert to its original value.
submenu.
In general, whenever a numeric entry field is high-
[SYSTEM SETUP] lighted, the knob may also be used to adjust the
The SETTINGS submenu configures the computer value. In this case, the knob will adjust the phase
interfaces, sound, real time clock, plotter, printer, in 0.001° increments for fine adjustments. If the
and screen location. The PLOT submenu plots knob is turned while making a numeric entry but
trace data on a plotter. The TEST submenu tests before the [ENTER] key has been pressed, the
the keypad, external keyboard, knob, RS232 inter- knob will adjust the original value (the numeric
face, printer interface, disk drive, video screen, entry is cancelled).
and memory. The INFO submenu displays various
information screens. Some entry fields allow only knob adjustment or
only numeric entry.
ADDITIONAL MENUS
[START/CONT] and [PAUSE/RESET]
In addition to the menus described above, there
are two other menus. These are accessed by the The [START/CONT] and [PAUSE/RESET] keys
[CURSOR SETUP] and [EDIT MARK] keys. are used to start, pause, continue, and reset data
acquisition scans. The [START/CONT] key starts
[CURSOR SETUP] a scan (and any programmed sweep). Stored
Sets the cursor type, width and readout. traces are sampled at the sample rate and stored
in the data buffer. If charts are displayed, the dis-
[EDIT MARK] played data will scroll across the graph. Swept
This menu is used to edit marks and move the parameters such as internal reference frequency
cursor to the next mark. and Aux Outputs start changing at the sample
rate. The scan indicator at the bottom left of the
Detailed descriptions of each menu are provided screen will show Run (Loop) or Run 1 (1 Shot
in the next chapter. scan) to indicate that data is being acquired in the
loop buffer or single shot scan mode.
ENTRY KEYS
If the unit is acquiring and displaying data, then
The numeric entry keys can be used to directly pressing the [PAUSE/RESET] key will pause data
enter parameter values. Parameters may be acquisition. The scan indicator switches to Pause
entered only if their menu box is displayed and and no new data points will be stored and the
their entry field is highlighted. For example, if the chart display will not scroll. Any sweeps in
REF/PHASE menu is displayed, the first soft key progress will also pause. Bar and polar graphs are
is next to the Phase Shift box. Pressing this soft not affected. Pressing [PAUSE/RESET] again will
key will highlight the entry field displaying the erase the data buffer and reset sweeps. Pressing
phase shift. The menu box will appear as below. [START/CONT] will resume data acquisition.

4-20
 Keypad

[PAUSE/RESET] will erase the data buffer lighted trace identification at the upper left of each
whenever data acquisition is Paused or Done.
To clear a buffer while a scan is in progress, two
Trace 2 Y 36.000 S 58.332 e-3
presses of the [PAUSE/RESET] key are required.
However, at the end of a single shot scan, the
data acquisition will be Done. This state is equiva-
lent to a paused state and a single press of the
[PAUSE/RESET] key will destroy the data!
display as illustrated below.
Whenever the scan is reset and the data buffers
are empty, Stop is displayed. The active display determines which display the
[AUTO SCALE], [CURSOR] and [CURSOR
[CURSOR] MAX/MIN] keys will affect. [AUTO SCALE] auto-
scales the active display. If the active display is a
Pressing the [CURSOR] key will draw a box chart, the [CURSOR] key selects the cursor for
around the cursor readout of the active chart dis- knob movement and the [CURSOR MAX/MIN] key
play as illustrated below. finds the max or min of the graph. Polar graphs
are never the active display since they can not be
Trace 2 Y 36.000 S 58.332 e-3 scaled and have no cursor.

[MARK]

While data is being added to the data buffer,

Use the [ACTIVE DISPLAY] key to select the events may be marked using the [MARK] key.
desired (top or bottom) display. When the cursor Pressing the [MARK] key will tag the next buffer
readout is surrounded by this box, the knob location. A mark will appear on the chart and will
adjusts the position of the cursor region. Moving scroll with the data. This is analogous to marking a
the cursor beyond the edge of the graph will pan real strip chart while it is recording. Marks are
the display left (showing older data points) and useful for marking when an external event
right (showing more recent data points). occurred or when the experimental conditions
Remember, the time window shown in the graph changed.
does not change. As the data points get older,
data will scroll off the left as new points are taken. A maximum of eight marks may be placed in the
data buffer. A mark will appear on all stored traces
When the [CURSOR] key is pressed, any previ-
ously highlighted parameter field (in a menu box)
will become non-highlighted. Pressing a soft key to
again highlight a new parameter field will let the
knob adjust the new parameter while the cursor at the same buffer location. The different mark
becomes unselected. symbols are shown below.

This key has no affect unless the active display is A mark is always placed at the buffer start to mark
a chart graph. Bar and polar graphs have no the first and oldest data point in the scan.
cursor.
The [EDIT MARK] menu allows the mark data to
[ACTIVE DISPLAY] be viewed. The value of each stored trace and the
time the mark was placed is displayed. The user
Pressing [ACTIVE DISPLAY] toggles the active can add comments to the mark data to label a spe-
display. In the single full height display format, this cific event.
key does nothing (the displayed graph is always
the active one). In the dual screen display, When trace data is saved to disk, the marks are
[ACTIVE DISPLAY] switches which display is
active (top or bottom), as indicated by the high-

4-21
saved as well. When a trace is recalled from disk, [AUTO PHASE]
the marks are recalled as well. Existing marks are
replaced with the recalled marks. [AUTO PHASE] adjusts the reference phase shift
so that the measured signal phase is 0°. This is
[CURSOR MAX/MIN] done by subtracting the measured value of θ from
the programmed reference phase shift. It will take
Pressing [CURSOR MAX/MIN] will center the several time constants for the outputs to reach
cursor region around the maximum or minimum their new values during which time θ will move
data value on the active chart display. The Cursor towards 0°. Do not press [AUTO PHASE] again
Seek mode in the CURSOR SETUP menu choos- until the outputs have stabilized. When the meas-
es whether this key finds the max or min. If the urement is noisy or if the outputs are changing,
cursor seeks the mean, then the [CURSOR Auto Phase may not result in a zero phase.
MAX/MIN] key finds the maximum on-screen
point. The cursor will be positioned at the Min, AUTO SETUP
Max, or Mean of the data within the region,
depending upon the cursor seek mode. The There is no truly reliable way to automatically
[CURSOR MAX/MIN] key only searches the data setup a lock-in amplifier for all possible input sig-
which is on the screen. If the max/min value nals. In most cases, the following procedure
occurs at more than one location, then the one should setup the SR850 to measure the input
closest to the left edge is found. signal.

[AUTO RESERVE] 1. Press [AUTO GAIN] to set the sensitivity.

Pressing [AUTO RESERVE] will adjust the dynam- 2. Press [AUTO RESERVE].
ic reserve to the minimum reserve required. To do
this, the reserve is decreased until a RESRV over- 3. Adjust the time constant and roll-off until
load is detected, indicating that the analog input there is no FILTR overload.
amplifier is overloaded. The reserve is then
increased to remove the overload. 4. Press [AUTO PHASE] if desired.

Auto Reserve will work only if the overloading 5. Repeat if necessary.

noise source has a frequency greater than a few
Hz. Lower frequency noise sources may overload At very low frequencies, the auto functions may
so infrequently that Auto Reserve can not detect it. not function properly. This is because very low fre-
quency signals overload very infrequently and the
[AUTO RESERVE] does not change the notch pre- time constants used tend to be very long.
filter settings.
[AUTOSCALE]
[AUTO GAIN]
Chart displays and bar graphs may be Auto
[AUTO GAIN] will adjust the sensitivity so that the Scaled. Auto Scaling only affects the displays - the
detected signal magnitude is a sizable percentage data values and the front and rear panel analog
of full scale. If the present value of R is a very outputs are not affected.
small percentage of full scale when [AUTO GAIN]
is pressed, then Auto Gain will respond very quick- Pressing [AUTOSCALE] when a bar graph is the
ly. If R is very much greater than full scale, then active display sets the range of the graph so that
Auto Gain may take several time constants to the present reading will be a major percentage of
reach the optimum gain setting. Auto Gain will the range. The center will always be set to zero. If
stop before reaching the optimum sensitivity if a the data is rapidly changing, then Auto Scaling
RESRV overload is detected. may not result in the optimum scaling. Both the
range and center may be manually adjusted in the
[AUTO GAIN] does not adjust the time constant or DISPLAY/SCALE menu.
roll-off.

4-22
 Keypad

Pressing [AUTO SCALE] when a chart graph is where XXXX is a file number. PCX files can be
the active display will automatically set the vertical imported directly into many PC draw and paint pro-
range and center value to display the entire range grams and easily incorporated into word process-
of the data. [AUTOSCALE] does not affect the hor- ing documents.
izontal scaling. [AUTOSCALE] only operates on
the data which is presently displayed on the graph. [HELP]
Data which has scrolled past the left edge of the
graph does not affect the scaling. [HELP] provides on screen help with any key or
soft key. Pressing [HELP] followed by any key will
[AUTOSCALE] may be pressed at any time during display information about the function or use of
or after data acquisition. that key. [HELP] with a soft key will describe the
menu item next to the soft key. Pressing another
[AUTOSCALE] does not affect a polar graph. key will exit the help screen.

[PRINT] TO A PRINTER The [PRINT] key is the one key for which no help
is available. Pressing [PRINT] at any time will print
[PRINT] will print the screen display to a printer the screen, including the help screens.
attached to the rear panel parallel printer port. The
entire screen, including text and menus, is printed. [LOCAL]
The time and date will also be printed. The printer
type needs to be configured in the SYSTEM When a host computer places the unit in the
SETUP menu before using [PRINT]. A "Printing in REMOTE state, no keypad input or knob adjust-
Progress" message will appear on the screen ment is allowed. The REM indicator is on in the
while printing occurs. No other front panel opera- status bar at the bottom of the screen. To return to
tions may be performed until printing is completed. front panel operation, press the [HELP] key.
If no printer is attached or there is a printer error,
then the print operation is aborted after about 10
seconds. A "Print Aborted!" message will appear
briefly on the screen.

Pressing the backspace [←] key will abort the

printout.

[PRINT] TO A DISK FILE

If File is chosen as the printer type (in the

SYSTEM SETUP menu), then [PRINT] will save
the screen image as a PCX format file on the disk.
Files are automatically named SCRNXXXX.PCX

4-23
Keypad

4-24
 REAR PANEL
WARNING!:
NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.
REFER TO USER MANUAL FOR SAFETY NOTICE.
FOR USE BY QUALIFIED PERSONNEL ONLY. AUX IN AUX OUT X Y
STANFORD RESEARCH SYSTEMS - MADE IN U.S.A.

1 1

MONITOR OUT
2 2

Fuse : 1A @100/120V & 1/2A @ 220/240V

FUSE
PULL

3 3

PRINTER PORT
PREAMP TRIG IN TTL OUT
PC KEYBOARD (8088)
IEEE-488 STD PORT

4 4 Power
RS232 (DCE)
Entry
Module

Rear Panel BNC Connectors PC Keyboard Connector

RS232 Connector
Preamp Connector IEEE-488 (GPIB) Connector
Parallel Printer Connector

POWER ENTRY MODULE connect the SR850 to a PC serial adapter, which

is usually a DTE, use a straight thru serial cable.
The power entry module is used to fuse the AC
line voltage input, select the line voltage, and Also, a serial plotter with HPGL compatible graph-
block high frequency noise from entering or exiting ics may be connected to the RS232 port. The
the instrument. Refer to the first page of this SR850 will drive the plotter to generate plots of the
manual for instructions on selecting the correct screen graph. Use the SYSTEM SETUP menu to
line voltage and fuse. configure the SR850 for use with a serial plotter.

IEEE-488 CONNECTOR PARALLEL PRINTER CONNECTOR

The 24 pin IEEE-488 connector allows a computer The [PRINT] key will print the screen to an Epson
to control the SR850 via the IEEE-488 (GPIB) compatible graphics printer or an HP LaserJet
instrument bus. The address of the instrument is compatible laser printer. Use a standard printer
set in the SETUP GPIB menu. cable to attach the printer to the printer port. Use
the SYSTEM SETUP menu to choose the printer.
Also, a GPIB plotter with HPGL compatible graph-
ics may be connected to the IEEE-488 port. In this PC KEYBOARD CONNECTOR
case, the SR850 will control the plotter to generate
plots of the screen graph. Use the SYSTEM An IBM PC compatible keyboard may be attached
SETUP menu to configure the SR850 for use with to the keyboard connector. An AT keyboard must
a GPIB plotter. be in its PC or 8088 mode. Pressing ALT with a
letter on the keyboard is equivalent to pressing the
RS232 CONNECTOR front panel key associated with that letter. (The let-
ters are shown under each key.) For example,
The RS232 interface connector is configured as a ALT-A is [START] and ALT-Q is [AUTO GAIN].
DCE (transmit on pin 3, receive on pin 2). The The function keys F1-F6 are equivalent to the six
baud rate, parity, and word length are pro- soft keys. The right and left arrow keys function as
grammed from the SYSTEM SETUP menu. To the knob. Keyboard number, letter and Enter keys
function normally.
4-25
 REAR PANEL BNC CONNECTORS time is the scan length. Output voltage sweeps are
NSIDE. coordinated with the data acquisition. Sweeps
AFETY NOTICE.
NEL ONLY. AUX IN AUX OUT X Y
start and stop with the [START/CONT] and
DE IN U.S.A. [PAUSE/RESET] keys. Pausing data acquisition
will pause an Aux Out sweep. Resetting the data
buffer will reset a sweeping Aux Out to its starting
1 1
value.

X and Y
The X and Y lock-in outputs are always available
at these connectors. The bandwidth of these out-
MONITOR OUT puts is 100 kHz. A full scale input signal will gener-
2 2
ate ±10V at these outputs. The output impedance
is <1Ω and the output current is limited to 10 mA. Fuse : 1A @100/120

These outputs are affected by the X and Y offsets

and expands. The actual outputs are
3 3
X Output = (X/sensitivity - offset)xExpandx10V
PRINTER PORT
REAMP TRIG IN TTL OUT Y Output = (Y/sensitivity - offset)xExpandx10V
PC KEYBOA
whereIEEE-488 STD PORT
the offset is a percentage of full scale and
the expand is an integer from 1 to 256. The offsets
4 4
and expand are set in the OUTPUT/OFFSET
menu.
RS232 (DCE)
AUX IN 1-4 (A/D Inputs) MONITOR OUT
These are auxiliary analog inputs which can be This BNC provides a buffered output from the
digitized by the SR850. The range is -10V to +10V signal amplifiers and prefilters. This is the signal
and the resolution is 16 bits (1/3 mV). The input just before the A/D converter and PSD. The output
impedance is 1 MΩ. impedance is <1Ω and the output current is limited
to 10 mA.
These inputs may be displayed and stored as
traces on the displays. The inputs are sampled at The gain from the signal input to the monitor
the scan sample rate, which may be as fast as output is the overall gain minus the dynamic
512 Hz. These inputs allow signals other than the reserve minus 3dB. The overall gain is specified in
lock-in outputs to be acquired and stored. dB in the Sensivitiy menu box (in the Gain menu).
Furthermore, complex quantities such as X/Aux1 The actual dynamic reserve is shown in the moni-
(ratio) may be acquired and stored directly as tor settings display. For example, if the sensitivity
trace quantities. is 10 mV, the gain is 60dB. If the dynamic reserve
is 21dB, then the gain from the input to the monitor
AUX OUT 1-4 (D/A Outputs) output is 60-21-3=36dB or a gain of 63. A 10 mV
These are auxiliary analog outputs. The range is (rms) input will result in a .63 Vrms or.9 Vpk
-10V to +10V and the resolution is 1 mV. The output. The gain is only accurate to about 1.5dB or
output impedance is <1Ω and the output current is 20%.
limited to 10 mA.
This output is useful for determining the cause of
These outputs may be programmed from the front input overloads and the effects of prefiltering.
panel or via the computer interfaces. They may be However, because the analog gain never exceeds
set to fixed voltages or they may be programmed 2000, very small signals may not be amplified
to sweep between two voltages. Sweeps may be enough to viewed at the monitor output.
either linear or logarithmic. When sweeping, the
outputs change at the sample rate and the sweep

4-26
 Rear Panel

TRIG IN PREAMP CONNECTOR

This TTL input may be used to trigger data sam-
ples and/or to start data acquisition. When the This 9 pin "D" connector provides power and con-
sample rate is set to Trigger, samples are record- trol signals to external preamplifiers such as the
ed whenever there is a rising edge at the Trigger SR550 and SR552. The power connections are
input. The maximum sample rate is 512 Hz. If the described below.
Trigger Starts is selected (in the AUX menu), then
a rising edge will have the same effect as pressing Pin Voltage
the [START/CONT] key. Frequency and Aux 1 +20V
Output sweeps will also start with this trigger. If the 2 +5V
sample rate is internally set, then samples are 6 -20V
recorded at the programmed sample rate. If the 7 Signal Ground
sample rate is Trigger, then samples are recorded 8 Ground
at every subsequent trigger. (The first trigger starts
the scan and takes the first data point, subsequent
triggers record the rest of the data points.)
USING SRS PREAMPS
TTL OUT
When using either the SR550 or SR552, connect
This output is the TTL sync output for the internal
the power cable (standard 9 pin D connectors)
oscillator. The output is a square wave whose
from the preamp to the rear panel preamp connec-
edges are linked to the sine wave zero crossings.
tor on the SR850. Use BNC cables to connect the
This is useful when the sine output amplitude is
A output from the preamp to the A input of the
small and a synchronous trigger is required (to a
SR850. The B output from the preamp (preamp
scope for example). This output is active even
ground) may be connected to the B input of the
when locked to an external reference.
SR850. In this case, use A-B as the input configu-
ration. Be sure to twist the A and B cables so that
there is no differential noise pickup between the
cables.

The SR550 and SR552 are AC coupled from

1 Hz to 100 kHz. The SR550 has an input
impedance of 100 MΩ, the SR552 has 100 kΩ.
Set the SR850 to AC coupled since the signal
must be above 1 Hz.

The SR850 does NOT compensate for

the gain of the preamp. The SR850 sets
both preamps to their maximum gains.
Measurements made by the SR850 with a preamp
need to be divided by the gain of the preamp. The
SR550 has a gain of 10 and the SR552 has a gain
of 100.

Make sure that the preamp is at least 3

feet from the SR850 to avoid excess
interference from the video display. Do
not bring the preamp cables near the
CRT.

4-27
Rear Panel

4-28
 SR850 MENUS

Default Settings 5-2 Edit Mark 5-31

Marker Labels
Reference and Phase 5-3 Cursor To Next Mark
Internal/External Reference
Internal Osc Frequency and Amplitude Math 5-33
Internal Sweeps Smooth
External Reference Modes Fit Line, Exponential or Gaussian
Harmonic Detect Calculator
Stats
Input and Filters 5-7
Input Configuration Disk 5-41
Coupling and Grounding Save and Recall Data
Line Notch Filters Save and Recall Settings
Disk Utilities
Gain and Time Constant 5-9
Sensitivity System Setup
Dynamic Reserve Settings 5-49
Time Constant Com
Filter Slope Sound
Synchronous Filtering Plotter
Printer
Output and Offset 5-15 Screen
Front Panel CH1 and CH2 Time
X, Y and R Offset and Expand Plot 5-61
Auto Offset Plot All, Trace, Marker
Info 5-63
Trace and Scan 5-17 Specifications
Trace Definitions SRS
Sample Rate Operation
Scan Length and Mode Commands
Status bytes
Display and Scale 5-21 Test 5-65
Single or Dual Display Format Keypad
Monitor Keyboard
Display Scales Knob
Disk drive
Aux Outputs 5-25 RS232
Fixed or Swept Outputs Memory
Output Voltage and Sweep Limits Screen
Printer
Cursor Setup 5-29
Max, Min or Mean Seeking
Cursor Region Width
Vertical Grid
Linked Cursors
Cursor Readout

5-1
 SR850 Menus

DEFAULT SETTINGS
If the [←] (backspace) key is held down when the power is turned on, the lock-in settings will be set to the
defaults shown below rather than the settings that were in effect when the power was last turned off. The
default settings may also be recalled using the ❊RST command over the computer interface. In this case, the
communications parameters and status registers are not changed.

REFERENCE / PHASE DISPLAY / SCALE

Phase 0.000° Format Up/Down
Reference Source Internal Monitor Settings
Reference Slope Sine Top Display Bar, Trace 1
Harmonic 1 Top Display Scale 0±1.000e0
Sine Output 1.000 Vrms Bottom Display Bar, Trace 2
Internal Frequency 1.000 kHz Bottom Display Scale 0±1.000e0
Internal Sweep Linear Full Display Polar
Sweep Start 1.0000 kHz Horizontal Scales 10 s/div
Sweep Stop 2.0000 kHz
AUX OUTPUT
INPUT / FILTERS All Outputs Fixed
Source A All Output Voltages 0.000 V
Current Gain 1M All Start Voltages 1.000 V
Grounding Float All Stop Voltages 2.000 V
Coupling AC All Offset Voltages 0.000 V
Line Notches Out Trigger Starts No

GAIN / TC MATH
Sensitivity 1V Fit Type Line
Reserve Min Calc Operation x
Manual Reserve 3 dB Argument Type Trace
Time Constant 100 ms Argument Trace 4
Filter dB/oct. 12 dB Constant 0.0
Synchronous Off
SYSTEM SETUP
OUTPUT / OFFSET Output To GPIB
CH1 Source X GPIB Address 8
CH2 Source Y Overide Remote Yes
Offsets 0.00% RS232 Baud Rate 9600
Expands 1 Word Length 8 bits
Parity None
TRACE / SCAN Key Click On
Trace 1 X Alarms On
Trace 2 Y Plot Mode RS232
Trace 3 R Plotter Baud Rate 9600
Trace 4 θ Plotter GPIB Address 1
Store All Traces Plot Speed Fast
Sample Rate 1 Hz Trace Pen 1
Scan Length 16000 Grid Pen 1
Scan Mode Loop Alpha Pen 1
Cursor Pen 1
Printer Type Epson

STATUS ENABLE
REGISTERS Cleared

5-2
 REFERENCE AND PHASE MENU
Reference and Phase The Reference and Phase menu sets the reference source, phase shift,
and detection harmonic. The internal oscillator frequency , sweeps, and
amplitude are also specified in this menu.

Ref. Phase REFERENCE

12.345 deg. PHASE

Phase Shift
Rotate
90 deg.
90° Shift
Ref. Source
Internal
Reference Source
Ref Frequency Internal Internal Sweep External
50.000 Hz
Reference Sweep Menu Reference
Harmonic Frequency Slope
# 1
Sweep Type
Sine Output Harmonic
0.100 V rms
Sweep Limits
Sine Output

Return

Reference Phase Pressing the Reference Phase key (top soft key) selects the reference
phase shift as the active entry field. A new phase shift may be entered
from the numeric keypad or the knob may be used to adjust the phase.
The phase shift ranges from -180° to +180° with 0.001° resolution. A
numerically entered phase is rounded to the nearest 0.001°.

Pressing the Rotate 90 Degrees soft key will add 90.000° to the present
value of the phase shift.

When using an external reference, the reference phase shift is the phase
between the external reference and the digital sine wave which is multi-
plying the signal in the PSD. This is also the phase between the sine
output and the digital sine wave used by the PSD in either internal or
external reference mode. Changing this phase shift only shifts internal
sine waves. The effect of this phase shift can only be seen at the lock-in
outputs X, Y and θ. R is phase independent.

Auto Phase
Pressing [AUTO PHASE] will adjust the reference phase shift so that the
measured signal phase is 0°. This is done by subtracting the present
measured value of θ from the reference phase shift. It will take several
time constants for the outputs to reach their new values. Auto Phase may
not result in a zero phase if the measurement is noisy or changing.

5-3
 Reference and Phase Menu

Reference Source The Reference Source key selects the source of the lock-in reference.
Turn the knob to select the desired source, either Internal , Internal
Sweep, or External. Keypad entry is not allowed for this entry field.

Ref. Source External When the reference source is External, the SR850 will
External phase lock to the external reference provided at the Refer-
ence Input BNC. The SR850 will lock to frequencies
Ref Slope between 0.001 Hz and 102.0 kHz. The upper limit is
reduced to 102 kHz/N where N is the harmonic number if
Sine N is greater than 1.

Ref Slope This key selects the reference input discriminator mode.
This selection is only available when the reference source
is external.

When either TTL Rising Edge or TTL Falling Edge is

selected, the SR850 locks to the selected edge of a TTL
square wave or pulse train. For reliable operation, the TTL
signal should exceed 3.5 V when high and be less then 0.5
V when low. The input is directed past the analog discrimi-
nator and is DC coupled into a TTL input gate. This input
mode should be used whenever possible since it is less
noise prone than the sine wave discriminator. For very
low frequencies (<1 Hz), a TTL reference MUST be
used.

Sine input mode locks the SR850 to the rising zero cross-
ings of an analog signal at the Reference Input BNC. This
signal should be a clean sine wave at least 200 mVpk in
amplitude. In this input mode, the Reference Input is AC
coupled (above 1 Hz) with an input impedance of 1 MΩ.
This mode can not be used at frequencies far below 1 Hz.
At very low frequencies, the TTL input modes must be
used.

Ref. Source Internal When the reference source is Internal, the SR850's syn-
Internal thesized internal reference is used as the reference. The
Reference Input BNC is ignored in this case. In this mode,
Ref Frequency the Sine Out or TTL Sync Out provides the excitation for
the measurement.
50.000 Hz
Reference Frequency Pressing this key selects the internal oscillator frequency
as the active entry field. This field is only available when
the reference source is internal. The frequency may adjust-
ed with the knob or directly entered from the keypad. The
frequency has 5 digits or 0.1 mHz resolution, whichever is
larger.

The frequency can range from 0.001 Hz to 102.00 kHz.

The upper limit is decreased if the harmonic number is
greater than 1. In this case, the upper limit is 102 kHz/N
where N is the harmonic number.

5-4
 Reference and Phase Menu

Ref. Source Internal Sweep When the reference source is Internal Sweep, the SR850's
synthesized internal reference is used as the reference
Internal Sweep
and swept in frequency. Internal frequency sweeps are
linked to the data acquisition scan. The frequency is
Sweep
changed once per sample (after the trace data is recorded)
Menu: and sweeps from the start to stop frequency in one scan
length amount of time. Pausing a scan with the [PAUSE
RESET] key will pause a sweep. Resetting a scan will
reset the frequency to the start frequency.

When using a sweep, it is useful to set the cursor readout

to Fsweep (in the CURSOR SETUP menu). In this mode,
the cursor will read the frequency as the horizontal
coordinate.

Sweep Menu This key displays the internal reference sweep menu
described below. This menu is only available when the ref-
erence source is Internal Sweep.

Sweep Type Sweep Type The frequency sweep can be linear or logarithmic (actually
linear exponential). Remember, the resolution of the sweep is
determined by the number of samples in the scan, i.e. the
log
scan length times the sample rate. If the number of sam-
Sweep Limits
ples is small, the sweep will be very coarse.
Start:
1.0000 kHz Sweep Limits The upper field is the sweep start frequency and the lower
field is the sweep stop frequency. Pressing either key will
Stop: select an active entry field. The frequencies may be adjust-
2.0000 kHz ed using the knob or entered directly with the keypad. The
frequency can be swept in either direction.

Return This key returns to the main Reference Phase menu.

Return:

5-5
 Reference and Phase Menu

Harmonic The SR850 can detect signals at harmonics of the reference frequency.
The SR850 multiplies the input signal with digital sine waves at a multiple
of the reference. Only signals at this harmonic will be detected. Signals
at the original reference frequency are not detected and are attenuated
as if they were noise.

Pressing this key selects the harmonic number field as the active entry
field. The harmonic number may be adjusted using the knob or entered
directly with the keypad. Harmonics up to 32767 times the reference can
be detected as long as the harmonic frequency does not exceed
102 kHz.

If the harmonic number is set to N then the reference frequency is limited

to 102 kHz/N.

The harmonic number is always displayed in the status bar at the bottom
of the screen.

Sine Output Pressing this key selects the Sine Output Amplitude as the active entry
field. The sine amplitude may be set from 4 mVrms to 5 Vrms. The
output impedance of the Sine Out is 50Ω. If the signal is terminated in
50Ω, the amplitude will be half of the programmed value.

When the reference mode is internal, this is the excitation source provid-
ed by the SR850. When an external reference is used, this sine output
provides a sine wave phase locked to the external reference. The SR850
provides a synchronous sinusoidal excitation signal even when an exter-
nal TTL reference is used.

The rear panel TTL Output provides a TTL square wave at the reference
frequency. This square wave is generated by discriminating the zero
crossings of the sine output. This signal can provide a trigger or sync
signal to the experiment when the internal reference source is used. This
signal is also available when the reference is externally provided. In this
case, the TTL Output is phase locked to the external reference.

5-6
 INPUT AND FILTERS MENU
Input and Filters The Input and Filters menu sets the input signal source and configura-
tion. The input notch filters are also selected in this menu. See the
SR850 Basics section for a discussion of the different input configura-
tions and the signal filters.

Source INPUT
A A-B FILTERS
I
Current Gain Source
1M 100M
A A-B I
Grounding
Float Ground Current Gain

Coupling
Grounding
AC DC

Line Notches Coupling

Out Line
Both 2xLine Line Notch Filters

Source The Input Source key selects the front end signal input configuration. The
input amplifier can be either a single-ended (A) or differential (A-B) volt-
age or a current (I).

The voltage inputs have a 10 MΩ, 25 pF input impedance. Their connec-

tor shields are isolated from the chassis by either 10 Ω (Ground) or
10 kΩ (Float). Do not apply more than 50 V to either input. The shields
should never exceed 1 V.

The current input uses the A connector. The input is 1 kΩ to a virtual

ground. The largest allowable DC current before overload is 10 µA (1 M
gain) or 100 nA (100 M gain). No current larger than 10 mA should ever
be applied to this input.

Current Gain This key selects the current gain when using the current input as the
signal source. This menu box is only available if the current input is
selected above.

5-7
 Input and Filters Menu

The current gain determines the input current noise as well as the input
bandwidth. The 100 MΩ gain has 10 times lower noise but 100 times
lower bandwidth. Make sure that the signal frequency is below the input
bandwidth. The noise and bandwidth are listed below.

Gain Noise Bandwidth

1M 130 fA/√Hz 70 kHz
100M 13 fA/√Hz 700 Hz

The impedance of the signal source should be greater than 1 MΩ when

using the 1M gain or 100 MΩ when using the 100M gain.

Changing the current gain does not change the instrument sensitivity.
Sensitivities above 10 nA require a current gain of 1 MΩ. Sensitivities
between 20 nA and 1 µA automatically select the 1 MΩ current gain. At
sensitivities below 20 nA, changing the sensitivity does not change the
current gain.

Grounding This key chooses the shield grounding configuration. The shields of the
input connectors (A and B) are not connected directly to the lock-in chas-
sis ground. In Float mode, the shields are connected by 10 kΩ to the
chassis ground. In Ground mode, the shields are connected by 10 Ω to
ground. Typically, the shields should be grounded if the signal source is
floating and floating if the signal source is grounded. Do not exceed 1 V
on the shields.

Coupling This key selects the input coupling. The signal input can be either AC or
DC coupled. The current input is coupled after the current to voltage con-
version. The current input itself is always DC coupled (1 kΩ to virtual
ground).

The AC coupling high pass filter passes signals above 160 mHz and
attenuates signals at lower frequencies. AC coupling should be used at
frequencies above 160 mHz whenever possible. At lower frequencies,
DC coupling is required. AC coupling results in gain and phase errors at
low frequencies. Remember, the Reference Input is AC coupled when
a sine reference is used. This also results in phase errors at low
frequencies.

Line Notches This key selects no line notch filters engaged (Out), either the line fre-
quency (Line) or twice line frequency (2xLine) notch engaged, or Both fil-
ters engaged. The line notch filters are pre-tuned to the line frequency
(50 or 60 Hz) and twice the line frequency (100 or 120 Hz).

These filters have an attenuation depth of at least 30 dB. These filters

have a finite range of attenuation, generally 10 Hz or so. If the reference
frequency is 70 Hz, do not use the 60 Hz notch filter! The signal will be
attenuated and the phase shifted. See the SR850 Basics section for a
discussion of when these filters improve a measurement.

5-8
 GAIN AND TIME CONSTANT MENU
Gain and Time Cons The Gain and Time Constant menu sets the full scale sensitivity and
dynamic reserve. The low pass filter time constant and slope are also
selected in this menu. See the SR850 Basics section for a discussion of
gain, time constants and dynamic reserve.

Sensitivity GAIN
10 mV f.s. TIME CONSTANT
60 dB gain
Reserve Sensitivity
Max Min
Manual
Reserve
Manual Reserve
Max Min Manual
41 dB

Time Constant Manual Reserve

100 mS
1.2 Hz
Time Constant
Filter dB/oct.
6 12
18 24 Filter dB/oct
Synchronous
Off Synchronous
< 200Hz

Sensitivity The Sensitivity key selects the full scale sensitivity as the active entry
field. Use the knob to adjust the sensitivity. Keypad entry is not allowed
for this parameter. The gain displayed below the sensitivity is the overall
instrument gain, output divided by input. This is simply 10 V (full scale
DC output of X, Y, or R) divided by the sensitivity expressed in dB.

The full scale sensitivity can range from 2 nV to 1 V (rms) or 2 fA to 1 µA

(rms). The sensitivity indication is not changed by the X, Y, or R output
expand. The expand functions increase the output scale as well as the
resolution of the trace data. Whenever the sensitivity is changed, any dis-
played bar graph will change its range to full scale with zero at the
center.

Changing the sensitivity may change the dynamic reserve. Sensitivity

takes precedence over dynamic reserve. See the next page for more
details.

Auto Gain
Pressing the [AUTO GAIN] key will automatically adjust the sensitivity
based upon the detected signal magnitude (R). Auto Gain may take a
long time if the time constant is very long.

5-9
 Gain and Time Constant Menu

Reserve This key selects either maximum, minimum or manual dynamic reserve.
When the reserve is maximum, the SR850 automatically selects the max-
imum reserve available at the present full scale sensitivity. When the
reserve is minimum, the minimum available reserve is selected. The
dynamic reserve is displayed in the settings display at the top of the
screen (if selected in the DISPLAY/SCALE menu).

When the reserve is manual, the reserve is set by the user to a value
between the min and max reserve. The reserve is set in 10 dB
increments.

Changing the sensitivity may change the reserve. With max or min
reserve, the max or min reserve of the new sensitivity is used. With
manual reserve, the reserve is kept the same relative to the mini-
mum reserve. For example, if the sensivity is 10 mV and the reserve is
21 dB (20 dB above the minimum for this sensivity), changing the sensiv-
ity to 5 mV will change the reserve to 27 dB (20 dB above the 7 dB mini-
mum). If the new sensivity does not have a reserve high enough to satis-
fy this rule, then the max sensitivity will be used instead.

The minimum and maximum reserve limits for each sensitivity are listed
below.

Sensitivity Min Reserve (dB) Max Reserve (dB)

1V 0 0
500 mV 6 6
200 mV 4 14
100 mV 0 20
50 mV 6 26
20 mV 4 34
10 mV 0 40
5 mV 6 46
2 mV 4 54
1 mV 10 60
500 µV 16 66
200 µV 24 74
100 µV 30 80
50 µV 36 86
20 µV 44 94
10 µV 50 100
5 µV 56 106
2 µV 64 114
1 µV 70 120
500 nV 76 126
200 nV 84 134
100 nV 90 140
50 nV 96 146
20 nV 104 154
10 nV 110 160
5 nV 116 166
2 nV 124 174

Do not use ultra high dynamic reserves above 120 dB unless absolutely
necessary. It will be very likely that the noise floor of any interfering

5-10
 Gain and Time Constant Menu

signal will obscure the signal at the reference and make detection difficult
if not impossible. See the SR850 Basics section for more information.

Man Reserve This key selects the Manual Reserve entry field for knob adjustment.
Keypad entry is not allowed for this parameter. This menu box is availa-
ble only if manual reserve is selected above. The reserve may be set
between the minimum and maximum values in 10 dB increments. The
min and max reserve limits change with sensitivity (see the table on the
previous page). If the sensitivity is changed, the manual reserve may
also be changed as described above.

Auto Reserve
Pressing [AUTO RESERVE] will change the reserve to manual and
adjust the dynamic reserve to the minimum reserve required. Auto
Reserve will not work if there are low frequency noise sources which
overload infrequently.

Time Constant This key selects the Time Constant as the active field. Use the knob to
adjust the time constant. Keypad entry is not allowed for this parameter.
The time constant may be set from 10 µs to 30 s (det. freq.>200 Hz) or
30 ks (det. freq. <200 Hz).

The maximum time constant is 30 s if the detection frequency is above

200 Hz and 30 ks if the frequency is below 200 Hz. The actual range
switches at 203.12 Hz when the frequency is increasing and at
199.21 Hz when the frequency is decreasing. The time constant may not
be adjusted beyond the maximum for the present detection frequency. If
the frequency is below 200 Hz and 100 s is the time constant and the fre-
quency increases above 200 Hz, the time constant WILL change to 30 s.
Decreasing the frequency back below 200 Hz will NOT change the time
constant back to 100 s.

The absolute minimum time constant is 10 µs. The actual minimum time
constant depends upon the filter slope and the DC gain in the low pass
filter (dynamic reserve plus expand). The minimum time constant is only
restricted if the dynamic reserve plus expand is high and the filter slope
is low - not a normal operating situation. The tables below list the mini-
mum time constants for the different filter slopes and gains.

6 dB/oct DC gain (dB) min time constant

<45 10 µs
<55 30 µs
<65 100 µs
<75 300 µs
<85 1 ms
<95 3 ms
<105 10 ms
<115 30 ms
<125 100 ms
<135 300 ms
<145 1s
<155 3s

5-11
Gain and Time Constant Menu

<165 10 s
<175 30 s

12 dB/oct DC gain (dB) min time constant

<55 10 µs
<75 30 µs
<95 100 µs
<115 300 µs
<135 1 ms
<155 3 ms
<175 10 ms

18 dB/oct DC gain (dB) min time constant

<62 10 µs
<92 30 µs
<122 100 µs
<152 300 µs
<182 1 ms

24 dB/oct DC gain (dB) min time constant

<72 10 µs
<112 30 µs
<152 100 µs
<182 300 µs

To use these tables, choose the correct table for the filter slope in use.
Calculate the DC gain by adding the reserve to the expand (expressed in
dB). Find the smallest DC gain entry which is larger than the gain in use.
Read the minimum time constant for this entry. For example, if the slope
is 12 dB/oct, the reserve is 65 dB, and the X expand is 10 (20 dB), then
the DC gain is 85 dB and the min time constant is 100 µs.

Time constant is a low priority parameter. If the sensitivity, dynamic

reserve, or filter slope change, and the present time constant is below
the new minimum, the time constant WILL change to the new minimum.
Remember, changing the sensitivity may change the reserve and thus
change the time constant.

Choosing a short time constant limits the amount of expand available.

The X and Y expands may not be increased such that the present time
constant will be shorter than the minimum time constant for the reserve
plus expand. Changing the expand does NOT change the time constant.

Displayed below the time constant in the menu is the equivalent noise
bandwidth (ENBW) of the low pass filter. This is the measurement band-
width for Gaussian noise and depends upon the time constant and filter
slope. (See the Noise discussion in the SR850 Basics section.)

Analog Outputs with Short Time Constants

When using short time constants below 10 ms, the X and Y analog out-
puts from the rear panel or the CH1 and CH2 outputs configured to
output X or Y should be used. These outputs have a 100 kHz bandwidth
and are accurate even with short time constants. Trace outputs are
updated at a 512 Hz rate, as are the R and θ outputs. These outputs do
not accurately reflect high frequency outputs.
5-12
 Gain and Time Constant Menu

Filter dB/oct This key selects the low pass filter slope (number of poles). Each pole
contributes 6 dB/oct of roll off. Using a higher slope can decrease the
required time constant and make a measurement faster. The filter slope
affects the minimum time constant (see above). Changing the slope may
change the time constant if the present time constant is shorter than the
minimum time constant at the new filter slope.

Synchronous Pressing this key selects no synchronous filtering (Off) or synchronous

filtering on below 200 Hz (<200 Hz). In the second case, the synchro-
nous filter is switched on when the detection frequency decreases below
199.21 Hz and switched off when the detection frequency increases
above 203.12 Hz. The detection frequency is the reference frequency
times the harmonic detect number. The Syncro indicator in the Settings
monitor (at the top of the screen) is turned on whenever synchronous fil-
tering is on.

When the synchronous filter is on, the phase sensitive detectors (PSD's)
are followed by 2 poles of low pass filtering, the synchronous filter, then 2
more poles of low pass filtering. The low pass filters are set by the time
constant and filter slope. If the filter slope requires less then 4 poles
(<24 dB/oct), then the unused poles are set to a minimum time constant.
The poles which are set by the time constant are the ones closest to the
PSD's. For example, if the time constant is 100 ms with 12 dB/oct slope
and synchronous filtering is on, then the PSD's are followed by two poles
of low pass filtering with 100 ms time constant, the synchronous filter,
then two poles of minimum time constant.

Synchronous filtering removes outputs at harmonics of the reference fre-

quency, most commonly 2xf. This is very effective at low reference fre-
quencies since 2xf outputs would require very long time constants to
remove. The synchronous filter does NOT attenuate broadband noise
(except at the harmonic frequencies). The low pass filters remove out-
puts due to noise and interfering signals. See the SR850 Basics section
for a discussion of time constants and filtering.

Note :
The synchronous filter averages the outputs over a complete period.
Each period is divided into 128 equal time slots. At each slot, the aver-
age over the previous 128 slots is computed and output. This results in
an output rate of 128xf. This output is then smoothed by the two poles of
filtering which follow the synchronous filter.

The settling time of the synchronous filter is one period of the detection
frequency. If the amplitude, frequency, phase, time constant or slope is
changed, then the outputs will settle for one period. These transients are
because the synchronous filter provides a steady output only if the input
is repetitive from period to period. The transient response also depends
upon the time constants of the regular filters. Very short time constants
(<<period) have little effect on the transient response. Longer time con-
stants (<period) can magnify the amplitude of a transient. Much longer
time constants (≥ period) will increase the settling time far beyond a
period.

5-13
Gain and Time Constant Menu

Use of the synchronous filter results in a reduction in amplitude

resolution.

5-14
 OUTPUT AND OFFSET MENU
Output and Offset The Output and Offset menu selects the CH1 and CH2 outputs and sets
the X, Y and R offsets and expands. See the SR850 Basics section for a
discussion of the DC outputs and scaling.
Front Panel
OUTPUT
CH1 CH2 OFFSET

Source:
CH1 or CH2 Output
X

Offset & Expand Source

X Y R
X, Y or R Output
Offset:
0.00% Offset

Auto: Auto Offset

Expand: Expand
1

Front Panel CH1 and CH2 The SR850 has two front panel output BNC connectors called Channel 1
(CH1) and Channel 2 (CH2). These outputs can provide voltages propor-
tional to X, Y, R, θ, or traces 1-4. Outputs proportional to X or Y have a
bandwidth of 100 kHz (the outputs are updated at 256 kHz). These out-
puts are the traditional outputs of a lock-in. Outputs proportional to R, θ,
or a data trace (even if the trace is simply X or Y) have a bandwidth of
200 Hz (updated at 512 Hz).

CH1 or CH2 The Source entry field displays the quantity being output from either CH1
or CH2. The first soft key selects whether CH1 or CH2's output source
quantity is being displayed. Pressing this key toggles between CH1 and
CH2.

Source Pressing this key selects the output source quantity for either CH1 or
CH2 as the active entry field. Use the knob to select the desired output
parameter. Keypad entry is not allowed.

CH1 can be proportional to X, R, θ, Trace1, Trace2, Trace3, or Trace 4.

CH2 can be proportional to Y, R, θ, Trace1, Trace2, Trace3, or Trace 4.

Remember, outputs proportional X or Y have 100 kHz of bandwidth. The

other output quantities should only be used if the time constant is suffi-
ciently long so there are no high frequency outputs.

See the SR850 Basics section for output scaling information.

5-15
 Output and Offset Menu

Output Offset and Expand The X, Y and R outputs may be offset and expanded. See the SR850
Basics section for a complete discussion of scaling, offsets and expands.

Briefly, X, Y and R analog outputs (either the rear panel X and Y or the
front panel CH1 or CH2 proportional to X, Y or R) are determined by

Output = (signal/sensitivity - offset) x Expand x 10 V

The output is normally 10 V for a full scale signal. The offset subtracts a
percentage of full scale from the output. Expand multiplies the remainder
by a factor from 1 to 256 (output limited to 10 V).

Output offsets ARE reflected in data trace displays which depend upon
X, Y or R.

X and Y offsets do NOT affect the calculation of R or θ. X and Y offsets

WILL affect a polar graph since a polar graph plots X and Y. The R offset
does NOT affect a polar graph.

Output expands do NOT increase the displayed values of X, Y or R in

data traces. Expand increases the resolution of the X, Y or R value in a
trace.

Displays which are showing a trace which is affected by a non-zero offset

or a non-unity expand have their Offst and Expd indicators turned on (at
the lower left of each display).

X, Y or R This key selects which output quantity's offset and expand will be dis-
played and adjusted in this menu box. Only X, Y and R have offsets and
expands. θ can be offset by adjusting the reference phase shift.

Offset Pressing this key selects the Offset as the active entry field. This is the
offset of the output quantity selected above. The offset ranges from
-105.00% to 105.00% of full scale. This offset percentage does not
change with sensitivity - it is an output function. The offset may be
entered numerically or adjusted with the knob.

Auto Offset Pressing this key automatically sets the offset percentage to offset the
selected output quantity to zero.

Expand Pressing this key selects the Expand as the active entry field. This is the
output expand for the output quantity selected above (X, Y or R). The
expand ranges from 1 to 256. The output can never exceed full scale
when expanded. For example, if an output is 20% of full scale, the
largest expand (with no offset) which does not overload is 5. An output
expanded beyond full scale will OUTPT overload.

Short Time Constant Limitations

The maximum expand is also limited by short time constants. A short
time constant places a limit on the total amount of DC gain (reserve plus
expand) available. If the time constant is short, the filter slope low and
the dynamic reserve high, then the maximum expand may be less than
256. See the table of time constants and DC gains in the Gain and Time
Constant menu section.

5-16
 TRACE AND SCAN MENU
Trace and Scan The Trace and Scan menu defines the four data traces and the data
buffer usage. The sample rate and scan time for data storage and
sweeps are set in this menu. See the Data Traces and Trace Scans and
Sweeps discussion in the Screen Display Operation section for more
information.

Trace TRACE
1 2 3 4 SCAN

X ❊ 1 Trace 1, 2, 3 or 4
1
Define A•B/C
Do Not Store
Store
Store/Do Not Store
Sample Rate
1 Hz Sample Rate

Scan Length
Scan Length
16000.0
4:26:40.0
Single Shot/Loop
1 Shot
Loop

Trace The SR850 collects and displays data in the form of traces. There are
four data traces which may be defined. Each trace is defined as A•B/C
where the parameters A, B and C are chosen from X, Y, R, θ, Xnoise,
Ynoise, Rnoise, Aux Inputs 1-4 (rear panel), Frequency, and unity (1). C
can also be any quantity squared.

Only data traces may be displayed. In order to display the quantity X, a

trace must be defined to be X and then displayed (see the DISPLAY/
SCALE menu).

When the unit is reset, the traces are defined as

Trace 1 = X, Trace 2 = Y, Trace 3 = R, Trace 4 = θ.

Trace 1, 2, 3 or 4 Pressing this key selects Trace 1, 2, 3 or 4. The selected trace's defini-
tion and storage mode is displayed below the trace selection. Only the
selected trace's definition and storage mode may be changed.

A❊B/C Pressing this key highlights the boxed parameter (either A, B or C in the
equation A•B/C). The highlighted parameter may be changed using the
knob. Pressing the key again highlights the next parameter and so on. In
the illustration above, the A parameter is boxed and is set to X. The
parameters B and C are both unity.

5-17
 Trace and Scan Menu

The A, B and C parameters may be set to the quantities X, Y, R, θ,

Xnoise, Ynoise, Rnoise, Aux Inputs 1-4 (on the rear panel), Frequency,
and unity. C may also be any quantity squared. X, Y, R and θ are the
normal lock-in output quantities. Frequency is useful when the reference
is unknown or changing (as in an external sweep). The rear panel aux
inputs can digitize a slowly varying signal with16 bits of resolution to
monitor external parameters which affect the lock-in measurement. The
noise values are calculated by the SR850 and represent the noise of the
signal in the equivalent noise bandwidth of the low pass filter time con-
stant. See the SR850 Basics section for more about noise
measurements.

Normal measurements rarely require a trace other than simply X, Y, R or

θ. Ratio normalization to an external voltage requires a trace defined as
R/Aux Input 1 for example. Noise or frequency may be displayed by
defining a trace as Xnoise or Frequency.

Store/Do Not Store Pressing this key selects whether the trace selected above will be stored
in the data buffer or not. If store is chosen, when the scan begins, trace
data will be stored in the data buffer at the sample rate. The data buffer
can record up to 64000 data points in memory. This buffer can be 64000
points of a single trace, 32000 points of two traces, or 16000 points of all
four traces.

Data is stored only while data acquisition is in progress. The [START/

CONT] key starts a data scan. The Run or Run 1 scan indicators are
turned on in the status bar at the bottom of the screen.

Only traces that are stored may be displayed in strip chart form.

See the SR850 Operation section for more about trace scans.

Sample Rate This key selects the Sample Rate as the active field. Use the knob to
adjust the sample rate. The sample rate can be varied from 62.5 mHz (1
point every 16 sec.) up to 512 Hz. Increasing the sample rate past
512 Hz will select Triggered samples. In this mode, a sample is recorded
within 2 ms of a rising edge trigger on the rear panel Trigger input. Trig-
gers which occur faster than 512 Hz are ignored. When the sample rate
is set to Triggered, the chart displays assume a sample rate of 1 per
second for scaling purposes. Simply read the graphs as triggers per divi-
sion instead of seconds per division.

The sample rate sets how often points are added to the storage buffers.
All stored traces are sampled at the same rate (and at the same times).

Swept parameters (internal oscillator frequency or Aux Outputs) are syn-

chronized with the data acquisition. Swept parameters change once per
sample (even if no traces are being stored). The parameter is updated
after the data points for each sample are taken. The settling time for
each point is thus 1/(sample rate).

5-18
 Trace and Scan Menu

Aliasing effects can occur whenever the trace being sampled contains
signals at frequencies greater than twice the sample rate. The effect is
most noticeable when trying to sample an output whose frequency is a
multiple of the sample rate. Generally, the highest possible sample rate
should be used given the desired scan length and the buffer size. The
time constant and filter slope should be chosen to eliminate output sig-
nals at frequencies higher than twice the sample rate.

See the Trace Scan discussion in the Operation section for more details.

Scan Length The scan length is the length of the data acquisition scan (and sweeps)
in seconds. The minimum scan length is 1 second and the maximum
scan length is the maximum number of points in the data buffer (16000,
32000, or 64000) divided by the sample rate. Changing the sample rate
will only change the scan length if the present scan length is greater than
the new maximum scan length. Otherwise, the number of points in the
scan is changed to keep the scan length constant.

When the sample rate is triggered, the sample rate is assumed to be

1 Hz for display scaling and scan length purposes. The time (in seconds)
is equal to the sample number.

The sample rate sets how often points are added to the storage buffers.
All stored traces are sampled at the same rate (and at the same times).

See the Trace Scan and Sweep discussion in the Operation section for
more details.

Scan Length This key selects the Scan Length as the active entry field. Enter the scan
length numerically from the keypad or use the knob to adjust it. The scan
length is entered in seconds. The scan length is displayed in
hours:minutes:seconds format below the entry field.

1 Shot or Loop Pressing this key selects 1 Shot or Loop scan mode.

When the scan (or sweep) is complete, data storage (or sweeping) can
stop or continue.

1 Shot scan mode means that data points are stored for a single scan. At
the end of the scan, data acquisition stops and swept parameters are
held at their final stop values.

Loop scan mode means that a new scan (or sweep) is started at the end
of each scan. Scans (and sweeps) repeat indefinitely until halted by the
user. The data buffer will store as many scans as possible. The buffer
always holds at least one complete scan. If the scan does not fill the
entire buffer, then multiple scans of data are stored. When the buffer is
full, new data is added at the beginning of the buffer, overwriting the
oldest data.

5-19
Trace and Scan Menu

5-20
 DISPLAY AND SCALE MENU
Display and Scale The Display and Scale menu selects the screen format, the displayed
traces, and the display types. The bar graph and chart display scales
may be adjusted in this menu. See the Operation section for more infor-
mation about the different displays.

Format
DISPLAY
Single
SCALE
Up/Down
Monitor
Settings Format
Input/Output
Display Scale Monitor
Full Top
Bottom Full, Top or Bottom Display

Type: Chart
Trace: 1 Type Trace

± 1.000 e0 Range Center

@ 0.0
Seconds/div
10 S /div

Format The Format key toggles between single and dual display screen formats.
In dual display format, the [ACTIVE DISPLAY] key selects the active dis-
play for Auto Scale and Cursor functions.

Monitor The Monitor key toggles the monitor display between displaying the lock-
in settings and the lock-in inputs and outputs. The monitor display is the
upper two lines of the screen.

The settings monitor displays the sensitivity, dynamic reserve, time con-
stant and rolloff, signal filters, and input configuration.

The Input/Output monitor displays the values of X, Y, R and θ as well as

the rear panel Aux Inputs.

Display Scale Each of the displays (full screen, top and bottom) has a Type (bar, chart
or polar). Bars and charts display one of the four data traces. Polar
graphs always plot X and Y. Bars and charts have a range and center
trace value. Charts have a horizontal scale as well.

See the Operation section for a complete description of each type of

display.

5-21
 Display and Scale Menu

Full, Top or Bottom Display Pressing this key selects which display's type, trace and scaling will be
adjusted and displayed in this menu box. If the format is full screen, the
top and bottom displays can not be selected. If the format is dual display,
then only top or bottom can be selected.

Type and Trace Pressing this key highlights the boxed parameter (either Type or Trace).
The highlighted parameter may be changed using the knob. Pressing the
key again highlights the other parameter (either Type or Trace). In the
illustration above, the Trace parameter is boxed and is set to 1. Pressing
this key will highlight the trace number and allow the knob to change it.
Pressing this key again will highlight the type, Chart in this case.

The display type may be set to Polar, Bar, Chart or Blank.

The blank display clears the display area of the screen.

The polar graph has no trace or scale information since it always dis-
plays X and Y and the graph is scaled to the sensitivity. If the display is
polar, the trace and scale may not be selected or changed.

The bar graph has trace and range and center parameters displayed.
The bar graph has no horizontal (time) scale.

The chart graph has trace, range and center as well as horizontal scale
information.

The trace parameter selects which data trace will be displayed in the
selected display. Only data traces may be displayed. Only bar and
chart displays have a selectable trace. The trace number and definition is
shown in the screen display.

Range and Center Bar graph and chart vertical scales are represented as a center value
plus and minus a range. The range is the upper (±) parameter, the center
is the lower (@). Pressing this key highlights the boxed parameter (either
range or center). The highlighted parameter may be changed with the
knob or entered numerically. Pressing the key again highlights the other
parameter (either range or center). In the illustration above, the range is
boxed and set to 1.000 V and the center value is zero.

Both the center and range may be changed for a bar graph. This allows
the bar graph to expand a portion of the full scale range around a nomi-
nal value. The bar is always drawn from the center (nominal) value.
Pressing [AUTO SCALE] while a bar graph is the active display will set
the center to zero and adjust the range so that the bar is at least 40% of
the new range.

The vertical chart scale places the center value at the vertical midpoint of
the graph. The top of the graph is the center plus the range and the
bottom is the center minus the range. Pressing [AUTO SCALE] while a
chart graph is the active display will change both the center and range to
display all of the data within the graph. Data which has scrolled off the
graph edge is not taken into account when auto scaling.

5-22
 Display and Scale Menu

Seconds/div Chart graphs have a horizontal scale which determines how much of the
data buffer will be displayed. The horizontal scale is the number of sec-
onds per division across the graph. By changing the horizontal scale, the
entire trace buffer can be displayed at once or a small portion may be
expanded. If only a portion of the buffer is displayed, use the cursor to
pan right and left within the buffer. To activate the cursor, select the chart
as the active display and press [CURSOR].

The horizontal scale may be set from 2 ms/div to 100 ks/div. If the scale
is such that the amount of time across the graph is less than 1/sample
rate, there may not be any data points on the graph.

5-23
Display and Scale Menu

5-24
 AUX OUTPUTS MENU
Aux Outputs The Aux Outputs menu programs the rear panel auxiliary D/A outputs.
The outputs may be set to fixed voltages or programmed to sweep. In
addition, the Trigger input can be configured to start scans.

Aux. Output
AUX
1 2 3 4 OUTPUTS

Fixed Log Aux Output 1, 2, 3 or 4

Linear
Voltage Fixed Log or Linear
2.000 V
Voltage Start

Stop

Offset

Trigger Starts? Trigger Starts?

No Yes

Aux Outputs The four aux outputs on the rear panel are general purpose analog out-
puts which may be programmed by the user. They may be set to fixed
voltages or swept between two voltages. Sweeps may be either linear or
logarithmic (actually exponential).

When sweeping, the outputs change at the sample rate and the sweep
time is the scan length. Sweeps may be 1 Shot (single sweep) or Loop
(repeat) as set by the scan mode. Scan and sample parameters are set
in the Trace Scan menu. Sweeps start and stop with the [START/CONT]
and [PAUSE/RESET] keys. Pausing data acquisition will pause a sweep-
ing output. Resetting the scan will reset a swept output to its start volt-
age. At the end of a single shot sweep, a swept output is held at its stop
value.

Aux Out 1, 2, 3 or 4 Pressing this key selects which aux output's mode, voltage, limits and
offset are adjusted and displayed in this menu. Pressing this key toggles
from 1 through 4 and back to 1.

Fixed, Log or Linear Pressing this key selects the mode for the selected aux output. Each
output may be set to a fixed voltage or swept in log or linear fashion.
Choosing a sweep while a scan is in progress is not allowed.

5-25
 Aux Outputs Menu

Voltage This menu box displays the fixed voltage at the selected aux output. This
menu box is only displayed if the output is Fixed.

If the output is Fixed, pressing this key will select the voltage as the
active entry field. The fixed voltage level can be adjusted with the knob or
entered from the keypad. The voltage can range from -10 V to +10 V with
1 mV resolution.

Sweep Limits An output which is in linear or log sweep mode has its sweep limits and
offset value displayed.

A swept output is a linear or logarithmic progression from the start value

to the stop value, plus the offset value. Sweeps are computed based
upon the start and stop values and then offset by the offset value. This
allows a single definition to work for both linear and log sweeps. For
example, a linear sweep with a start of 1 V and a stop of 5 V and an
offset of -4 V will sweep linearly from -3 V to 1 V. A log sweep with the
same parameters will be computed as a sweep from 1 V to 5 V (a factor
of 5) and then be offset by -4 V. This allows log sweeps to provide nega-
tive outputs (for which log is not defined).

The sweep limits can range from 0.001 V to 21 V and the offset can
range from -10.5 V to +10.5 V. Outputs cannot be programmed to be out-
side the -10.5 V to 10.5 V range. Adjusting the limits such that an output
voltage would be outside this range will change the offset in the opposite
direction to pin the outputs to -10.5 V or 10.5 V. The same is true when
adjusting the offset - the limits will change to pin the outputs.

To number of points in the scan and the limits determine the actual
sweep progression. The number of points is the scan (sweep) length
multiplied by the sample rate. A 100 second scan with a 4 Hz sample
rate has 400 points. This is how many data points will be recorded in this
scan as well as the number of points in the sweep.

A linear sweep divides the sweep range (stop-start) into N equal incre-
ments where N is the number of points in the sweep. If the increment is
less than 1 mV, then two or more successive points may have the same
output value.

A log progression is one where the ratio of each point to the previous
point is a constant.

V i = Vi-1 x k

If N points are required to progress from the start to the stop, then k is
determined by

V stop = Vstart x k N

The start and stop voltages are restricted to positive values from 0.001 V
to 21 V.

5-26
 Aux Outputs Menu

A log sweep from a higher voltage to a lower voltage is just the reverse
progression as the sweep from lower to higher. More time will be spent at
lower voltages.

Sweep Limits Start If the selected aux output is in a sweep mode, then pressing this key will
Start: select the start voltage as the active entry field. The value may be adjust-
1.000 V ed with the knob or entered with the keypad. The start voltage can range
from 0.001 V to 21 V.
Stop:
2.000 V Stop If the selected aux output is in a sweep mode, then pressing this key will
select the stop voltage as the active entry field. The value may be adjust-
Offset: ed with the knob or entered with the keypad. The stop voltage can range
from 0.001 V to 21 V.
0.000 V

Offset If the selected aux output is in a sweep mode, then pressing this key will
select the offset voltage as the active entry field. The value may be
adjusted with the knob or entered with the keypad. The offset voltage can
range from -10.5 V to 10.5 V.

Trigger Starts? This key selects the scan start mode. Choosing Yes allows the rear
panel trigger input to start a data scan and frequency or aux output
sweep. If the sample rate is internally set, then samples are taken at the
sample rate and further triggers are ignored. If the sample rate is trig-
gered, then the first trigger starts the scan and data is sampled at every
subsequent trigger. Swept parameters are also changed at every trigger.

Choosing No requires that scans be started with the [START/CONT] key

or via an interface command.

5-27
Aux Outputs Menu

5-28
 CURSOR SETUP MENU
Cursor Setup The Cursor Setup menu is activated with the [CURSOR SETUP] key in
the Entry area of the keypad. This menu is used to set the cursor modes.
Each display (full, top or bottom) has its own cursor (which is active only
if the display is a chart). The cursor information displayed in this menu is
for the active display.

Cursor Seek CURSOR

Max Min SETUP
Mean
Cursor Width
Cursor Seek
Off Narrow
Spot Wide
Vert Grid Divs Cursor Width
8 10
None Vert Grid Divs
Cursor Control
Linked
Cursor Control
Separate
Cursor Readout
Cursor Readout
Delay Bin
Time Fsweep

Cursor Seek The cursor marker searches the data points within the cursor region for
the maximum or minimum data value, or calculates the mean of the
region. This key toggles between Max, Min, and Mean. Cursors are avail-
able only for chart displays. Each display (full, top or bottom) has its own
cursor seek type.

When seeking minimum or maximum, the cursor marker is located at the

minimum or maximum data point. This allows peaks and valleys in the
data to be read easily. When seeking mean, the horizontal position of the
cursor marker is the center of the cursor region and the vertical position
is the mean of the data within the region. When a spot cursor region is
used, the cursor marker is confined to a single horizontal screen location.
However, depending upon the horizontal scaling, each horizontal screen
location may represent multiple data points. The cursor marker can still
seek the minimum, maximum, or mean of the data at a single horizontal
screen location.

5-29
 Cursor Setup Menu

Cursor Width This function selects the width of the cursor region defined by the vertical
dashed lines on the chart display. Cursors are available only for chart
displays. Each display (full, top or bottom) has its own cursor width.

Narrow is 1/2 of a division, Wide is 1 division, and Spot is a single hori-

zontal position on the graph (the cursor is a single dashed line).

Off removes the cursor from the graph.

Vert Grid Divs This key selects the number of vertical divisions on the chart graph. The
full screen chart may have 8 or 10 divisions while the top and bottom
dual display charts may have 4 or 5 divisions. None selects no grid
marks on the graph at all. Depending upon the graph scaling, either 4 or
5 divisions should yield an even scale per division.

Cursor Control This function links the cursors in the dual chart display mode together.
Adjusting the position of the active chart cursor will move the other cursor
to the same horizontal position.

Cursor Readout This function sets the cursor horizontal position readout.

Delay displays the cursor position as time from the most recent point in
the buffer. Time increases to the left.

Time displays the cursor position as time from the first point in the buffer.
Time increases to the right.

Bin displays the cursor position as point number within the buffer with bin
0 being the first point.

Fsweep displays the cursor position as frequency based upon the inter-
nal reference sweep limits and sweep type. This readout uses the refer-
ence frequency sweep parameters even if the reference is not sweeping.

5-30
 EDIT MARK MENU
Edit Mark The Edit Mark menu is activated with the [EDIT MARK] key in the Entry
area of the keypad. This menu is used to label marks in the data buffer.
See the discussion on chart graphs in the Operation section for more
information about marks. The cursors may also be moved to the mark
locations.

Marks may only be inserted, edited or deleted if the active display is

a chart display.

Marks are saved with the trace data when data is saved to disk. When
data is recalled from disk, the existing marks are replaced with the
recalled marks.

Marker
EDIT
Insert: MARK

Insert Mark Entry Mode

Edit:

Edit Mark Space

Delete:
Delete Mark Delete
Cursor to
Next: Cursor to Next Mark Backspace

Cursor to Previous Mark Abandon

Previous:

Save

Insert Mark Marks are normally added to the data buffer by pressing the [MARK] key
while a scan is in progress. When a scan is paused or completed, marks
may added to the existing buffer by using the Insert Mark function. This
key will add a mark at the cursor location. This mark will behave exactly
the same as a mark added during the scan.

5-31
 Edit Mark Menu

Edit Mark This key activates a submenu which allows marks to be labelled and
viewed. This key will select the nearest mark to the left of the cursor
(towards older points) and display the trace values and mark time and
label on the screen. The mark label may be entered or edited with the
submenu.

Entry Mode The square entry cursor indicates where text will be entered in the label.
Overstrike Use the knob to move the square back and forth. To enter letters, press
Insert the [ALT] key to switch to the alternate keypad.
Character
Entry Mode Characters may be entered in the label by writing over the
Space: existing characters (Overstrike) or by moving the existing
characters to the right (Insert).

Delete: Space Press this key to enter a space in the mark label.

Delete Press this key to delete a character from the mark label.
Backspace:
Backspace Press this key to backspace the entry cursor to the left,
deleting existing characters to the left.
Marker Changes

Abandon: Abandon Changes Press this key to abandon any changes made to the mark
label. This key will return to the main Edit Mark menu.
Changes made to the mark label are ignored.
Save:
Save Changes Press this key to save the changes made to the mark
label. This key will return to the main Edit Mark menu.

Delete Mark This key will delete the nearest mark to the left of the cursor (towards
older points). Pressing this key successively will continue to delete marks
until no marks remain to the left of the cursor position!

Cursor to Next This key moves the cursor of the active chart display to the next mark to
the right. If the mark is off the right edge of the graph, then the display is
panned to the right until the next mark is on the graph.

Cursor to Previous This key moves the cursor of the active chart display to the next mark to
the left. If the mark is off the left edge of the graph, then the display is
panned to the left until the previous mark is on the graph.

5-32
 MATH MENU
Math The Math menu is used to smooth, fit, change and analyze trace data.
Math functions only operate on the data which is displayed within the
active display.

Math
MATH
Smooth:

Smooth
Fit:

Fit
Calc:
Calc

Stats: Stats

Math Keys Each Math key activates a sub menu. Each sub menu is described in
detail in the following pages.

Math functions may only be performed on trace data which is

stored in a trace buffer and displayed in the active chart display.
Data which are not within the time window of the chart are not operated
upon. Use the horizontal chart scale to select the size of the time window
and move the cursor to pan the window to the correct portion of the trace
buffer. Data which exceeds the upper or lower bounds of the graph are,
of course, operated upon.

The amount of time a math function takes to complete depends upon its
complexity and the number of data points which are operated on. For
example, 25-point smoothing takes longer than 5-point smoothing while
each type of smoothing takes longer the more points there are. Do not
operate on more points than necessary.

Math functions can only be performed while data acquisition is stopped,

either by pausing or finishing a scan. Some math operations change the
stored trace data. Resuming a scan after smoothing, for example, will
result in a trace where a region of the trace is smoothed and other
regions are not.

5-33
 Math Menu

Smooth The Smooth sub menu will smooth the data within the active chart dis-
play using the Savitsky-Golay algorithm. For details on the Savitsky-
Golay smoothing technique, see Abraham Savitsky and Marcel J. E.
Golay, "Smoothing and Differentiation of Data by Simplified Least
Squares Procedures", Analytical Chemistry, (36) 8, July 1964. In
essence, smoothing removes features which are narrower than the
number of smoothing points.

Smoothing is performed only on the data which is stored in a trace buffer

and displayed on a chart. The chart must be the active display. Data
which are outside the time window of the chart are not smoothed.

Smoothing alters the data in the trace memory. Original unsmoothed

data is replaced with new smoothed values. Once smoothed, the data
can not be restored to its original values. To avoid accidentally losing
original data, save the trace to a disk file before performing Smooth
menu operations.

MATH
25 point:

Smooth
21 point:

25 point

17 point:
21 point

11 point: 17 point

11 point
5 point:

5 point

Return:
Return

25 point Pressing a smoothing key will smooth the data within the active chart dis-
21 point play with the corresponding width. A width of 25 points means that fea-
17 point tures which span less than 25 points will be smoothed out. The smooth-
ing width in time is simply the number of points divided by the sample
11 point
rate.
5 point
While calculations are in progress, the "Smoothing..." message is dis-
played at the bottom of the screen. Smoothing may be repeated until the
desired noise reduction is attained.

Return The Return key will return to the main Math menu.

5-34
 Math Menu

Fit The Fit sub menu allows the user to fit one of three curves to the data
within the active chart display - lines, exponentials, and Gaussians. Fit-
ting is done using the Marquardt 'Gradient-expansion' algorithm to mini-
mize chi-squared.

MATH
Do Fit:

Type of Fit Fit

Line Exp
Gauss
Do Fit
View
Params:
Fit Type
Limits
Left: View Parameters

Left Limit
Right:

Right Limit

Return:
Return Abort

Do Fit Pressing this key starts the actual fit calculations. While calculations are
in progress, the "Calculating fit..." message is displayed at the bottom of
the screen. The algorithm is designed to iterate until the change in chi-
squared falls below 0.1%, although the fit may be terminated at any time
by pressing the Abort (Return) softkey. The value of chi-squared is
shown after each iteration.

When the fit terminates, the best fit curve is plotted and the parameters
of the fit are displayed in a window at the center of the screen. Pressing
any key to continue will remove the parameter window while leaving the
best fit curve on the display. Pressing another key to continue will
remove the curve and restore the graph to normal. See View Parameters
below for a description of each fit.

Type of Fit This function toggles the Type of Fit between line, exponential, and
Gaussian. The fit takes place only within the fit region defined by the Left
and Right Limits (see below) on the active chart graph.

View Parameters The View Parameters function displays the most recent curve fit and
parameter window. For example, if a fit was performed and then the Fit
menu exited, the fit will be erased from the screen. If the graph is then
scaled differently using the Display Scale menu and then the Fit menu

5-35
Math Menu

re-entered, the View Parameters function will re-display the best fit curve
and the parameter window.

Both the Do Fit and View Parameters functions result in a display screen
like the one shown below.

Full Scale = 100 mV 100 mS Syncro

Dyn Reserve = 23 dB 12 dB/oct Line 2xLin AC A Do Fit:
Trace 2 Y 7.000 S 36.100 e-3
Type of Fit
Line Exp
Gauss
y = a + b•(t-t0) View
t0 = 9.600000e+001 s
a = -2.875882e-003 Params:
b = 1.136381e-003
Limits
Left:

Right:
10 S /div 0.000 S
center = 0.0 ± 50.00 e-3 V
Return:
Press Any Key To Continue...

In this example screen, the fit is a line. The curve fit region is delimited by
the two limit markers (heavy dashed vertical lines) as described below.
The final curve fit is plotted between the limit markers along with the
data. The parameters of the fit are displayed in the window at the center.

Each type of fit has a different parameter display. The horizontal coordi-
nate is t (cursor readout in time, i.e. increasing to the right) and the verti-
cal coordinate is the trace value (in the units of the display).

Line Fit: y = a + b•(t - t0)

t0 = horizontal offset in time
a = vertical offset in trace units
b = slope in trace units/second

y = ae -(t - t0
)/b + c
Exp. Fit:
t0 = horizontal offset in time
a = amplitude in trace units
b = time constant in time
c = vertical offset in trace units
1/2( t/b) 2
Gauss. Fit: y = ae - + c where t = t - t 0
t0 = peak center position in time
a = amplitude in trace units
b = line width in time
c = vertical offset in trace units

5-36
 Math Menu

Full Scale = 100 mV 100 mS Syncro

Dyn Reserve = 23 dB 12 dB/oct Line 2xLin AC A Do Fit:
Trace 2 Y 7.000 S 36.100 e-3
Type of Fit
Line Exp
Gauss
View
Limit Markers Params:

Limits
Left:

Right:
10 S /div 0.000 S
center = 0.0 ± 50.00 e-3 V

Done Intrnl Fr= 100.00 Hz Return:

LOCK Harmonic= 1 LOC

Return The Return key will return to the main Math menu. Re-entering the Fit
menu and using the View Parameters function will re-display the most
recent fit.

5-37
 Math Menu

Calc The Calculation sub menu allows the user perform simple arithmetic cal-
culations with data displayed in the active chart. Operations are per-
formed only on the data within the chart, not the entire trace buffer.

An operation which overflows (such as divide by zero) will display an

error message and abort.

Performing a calculation on the data will change the data. Once

changed, the data can not be restored to its original values. To avoid
accidentally losing original data, save the trace data to a disk file
before performing Calc menu operations.

MATH
Do Calc:

Operation Calc
+

Do Calc
Argument Type
Trace
Constant Operation
Constant Value
0 Argument Type
Constant Trace
Cursor Value
to Arg:
Constant Value Trace Number

Return: Cursor to Arg

Return

Do Calc Pressing this key starts the actual calculation. While calculations are in
progress, the "Calculating..." message is displayed at the bottom of the
screen. The calculation uses the operation specified by the Operation
menu box below and uses the argument chosen by the Argument keys.
Note that many operations will require an AutoScale to display the result
on the graph.

Operation The Operation key highlights the operator as the active field for knob
selection. Turn the knob to select +, -, x, /, sin, cos, tan, √, x2, log 10,
10x . The add, subtract, multiply, and divide functions require a second
argument (entered below) which may be a constant or another trace.

5-38
 Math Menu

Argument Type The +, -, x, / operations require a second argument. The Argument Type
function selects between a constant argument and another trace. A con-
stant argument adds or subtracts a constant to the trace or multiplies or
divides the trace by a constant. A trace argument uses a data trace as
the argument. In this case, calculations are performed on a point by point
basis. The trace which is in the active chart display is where the results
are stored. The active chart determines the time window over which
these operations are performed. In the case of divide, the trace in the
active display is divided by the argument trace.

In all cases, the arguments are not corrected for units. Constants should
be entered in the trace units. Adding two traces adds their values, even if
their units are not the same. The units of the resulting trace are not
changed. A trace may be scaled before being used as an argument
using x or / with a constant conversion factor.

Argument Type If the Argument type is a constant, then the Argument and Cursor func-
Trace tions are displayed.
Constant
Constant Value Constant Value Pressing the Constant Value key activates the constant
argument entry field. Use the keypad to enter a numerical
0 argument. Integer (-3), real (-3.0), or floating point (-
0.3E+1) formats are all allowed.
Cursor Value
to Arg: Cursor Value to Arg. The Cursor Value to Arg key will copy the trace value of
the cursor marker to the constant argument field above.
This is convenient when subtracting a baseline or normal-
izing to a data point.

Argument Type If the Argument type is a trace, then the trace selection function is
Trace displayed.
Constant
Trace Trace Pressing the Trace key activates the trace number entry
field. Use the knob to select trace 1, 2, 3 or 4. A trace must
1 be stored in order to be used as an argument.

Return The Return key will return to the main Math menu.

5-39
 Math Menu

Stats The Stats sub menu calculates a variety of statistical information about a
chart display calculation region defined by the Left and Right Limits.

MATH
Do Stats:

Stats

Do Stats

Limits
Left:

Left Limit
Right:

Right Limit

Return:
Return

Do Stats Pressing this key starts the actual calculation. While calculations are in
progress, the "Calculating Statistics..." message is displayed at the
bottom of the screen. For the display region defined by the Left and Right
Limits, the mean, standard deviation, total, and delta time defined by the
region endpoints are calculated and displayed below the graph. The total
is the sum of all the data points within the region. The delta time is the
time difference between the limits.

Total = -4.799722e+000 σ = 1.139963e-001

Mean = -7.163765e-002 Delta t = 4.288000e+000 s

Left and Right Limit The Left and Right Limit functions set the left and right limits of the calcu-
lation region. The default positions of the limits are the the left and right
edges of the graph. To move a limit, use the knob to move the cursor to
the desired location of the limit (press [CURSOR] to activate the cursor).
Pressing the Left or Right Limit key will set the limit to the cursor position.
The Limits are set each time a limit key is pressed. The limits are shown
as heavy dashed vertical lines on the graph. See the description of Limits
under the Fit sub menu.

Return The Return key will return to the main Math menu.

5-40
 DISK MENU
Disk The Disk menu is used to save and recall data and settings to and from
disk. The Disk Utilities submenu can erase files and format blank disks.
Files are saved as DOS files and can be read by a DOS compatible com-
puter with a 3.5" disk drive.

The SR850 uses double sided, double density disks (DS/DD). Do not use
high density (DS/HD) disks.

The maximum number of files allowed on a disk is 114. This is the DOS
limitation on the number of directory entries in the root directory.

Data
DISK
Save:

Save Data
Recall: File Name
Recall Data
Settings
Catalog On/Off
Save:
Save Settings
Return
Recall: Recall Settings

Disk Disk Utilities

Utils:

Format Disk

Erase File

Return

Disk Keys Each softkey in this menu activates a submenu. The submenus are
described in detail on the following pages.

5-41
 Disk Menu

Save Data The Save Data submenu is used to save the trace data which is on the
active chart display to the disk.

Data Save Data Pressing this key will save the trace which is displayed
by the active chart display to the file specified in the File
Save: Name field. Only a single trace is saved in a file, even if
more traces are stored in the buffer. If the active display
ASCII is not a chart, no action is taken.
Save:
The ENTIRE trace is saved, including data which is cur-
rently not within the chart time window. Data is stored in
binary form and requires 4 bytes per data point. The
number of data points is the scan length times the
sample rate. Be aware that long scans at high sample
File Name
rates take up large amounts of disk space and take
TEST longer to save and recall. Try to define the scans so that
the files are a manageable size.
Catalog
Marks are saved with the trace data.
On Off

In addition, the instrument state (sensitivity, input config-

uration, time constant, reference, scan parameters, aux
Return: outputs) and the trace definition of the stored trace are
saved.

Save ASCII Data Pressing this key will save the trace in the active chart
display to disk in ASCII format. Only the trace data is
saved. The data is saved as "1.236774e-002<cr>
<lf>4.564522e-002<cr><lf>7.890034e-002<cr><lf>..."
where "1.236774e-002" is the first (bin 0) data point,
"4.564522e-002" is the next data point, etc. The data is
exactly as if read from the cursor display.

The ENTIRE trace is saved, including data which is cur-

rently not within the chart time window. Ascii storage
requires about 15 bytes per point. The number of data
points is the scan length times the sample rate. The
required file size may exceed the disk capacity! Try to
define the scan so that the files are a manageable size.

The ASCII format is a convenient way to transfer data to

other programs on a PC. The file is a simple DOS text
file. ASCII files may not be recalled on the SR850!

File Name This key activates the File Name entry field. File names
are entered using the alternate keypad. The [ALT] key
allows letters to be entered. DOS file name conventions
must be followed, i.e. file names are 8 characters or less
with an extension of up to 3 characters. "ABC-
DEFGH.XYZ" is a valid file name. It is not necessary to
press [ENTER] following the file name. DOS sub-
directories are not supported.

5-42
 Disk Menu

Full Scale = 10 mV 100 mS Syncro Data

Dyn Reserve = 3 dB 12 dB/oct Line 2xLin AC A
Save:
Name Ext Type Size Date Time
ABCD DAT TRC 1894 02/07/91 22:53:10 ASCII
TEST 85S SET 450 02/22/91 14:47:28 Save:
SPECT1 85T TRC 16384 03/13/91 09:21:41
MYDATA 85T TRC 16384 04/11/91 11:21:01

File Name
ABCD.DAT

Catalog
On Off

Free = 720280 bytes

Stop Intrnl Fr= 100.00 Hz Return:
LOCK Harmonic= 1 LOC

5-43
 Disk Menu

Recall Data The Recall Data submenu is used to recall data from a binary disk file
into the trace which is displayed by the active display. For example, if the
full screen display is a chart showing Trace 2, then recalling a trace from
disk will read the file into Trace 2. The stored trace definition is recalled
with the data and changes the definition of Trace 2.

All stored traces must have the same length. If the recalled data trace
has less points than existing traces in memory, then the recalled trace is
padded with zeroes until it is the same length. If the recalled data has
more points than the existing traces in memory, the existing traces are
padded with zeroes until they are the same length as the recalled trace.
Data is never destroyed in the recall process.

If the recalled trace has more points than the existing trace buffer alloca-
tion (16k points for 4 stored traces, 32k for 2 stored traces, or 64k for 1
stored trace), then as many points are recalled as will fit in the existing
trace buffer (starting with the most recent data). The other existing traces
are either padded with zeroes or left alone, depending upon how many
points are presently stored.

Data files may not be recalled into traces which are not presently being
stored.

The existing marks are replaced with the marks recalled with the data.

In general, the existing lock-in state may not agree with the state stored
in the recalled data file. In this case, the lock-in state is also recalled
along with the data. Existing data in other traces is not destroyed but
may lose their meaning given the new lock-in state. For example, if the
existing data sample rate is 1 Hz and data is stored in the traces, recall-
ing a data file whose data was stored at 2 Hz will change the sample rate
to 2 Hz. The existing data is not destroyed but will be displayed as if the
data was sampled at 2 Hz. If the state was not recalled with the data,
then the recalled data would have no meaning. This way, the recalled
data is meaningful. Existing data is presumably more easily recaptured
and can also be saved if important.

5-44
 Disk Menu

Data
Recall Data Pressing this key will recall the trace data and instrument
Recall:
state from the file specified in the File Name field.

If the file specified is not on the disk or is not a data file,

then an error message will appear. Ascii files may not be
recalled.

File Name This key activates the File Name entry field. File names
are entered using the keypad and alternate keypad. The
File Name [ALT] key allows letters to be entered. DOS file name
conventions must be followed, i.e. file names are 8 char-
TEST acters or less with an extension of up to 3 characters.
"ABCDEFGH.XYZ" is a valid file name. It is not neces-
Catalog sary to press [ENTER] following the file name. DOS sub-
On Off directories are not supported. All files are read from the
root directory.

Return: Catalog On/Off This key toggles the file catalog display screen on and
off. The use of this key is identical to the Catalog On/Off
function in the Save Data submenu described
previously.

Return The Return key will return to the main Disk menu. Return
also removes the catalog display screen and restores
the displays.

5-45
 Disk Menu

Save Settings The Save Settings submenu is used to save the lock-in settings to a disk
file. The settings include all parameters which are set with the menus.

Save Settings Pressing this key will save the current lock-in settings to
Setting
the file specified in the File Name field.
Save:
File Name This key activates the File Name entry field. File names
are entered using the keypad and alternate keypad. The
[ALT] key allows letters to be entered. DOS file name
conventions must be followed, i.e. file names are 8 char-
acters or less with an extension of up to 3 characters.
"ABCDEFGH.XYZ" is a valid file name. It is not neces-
sary to press [ENTER] following the file name. DOS sub-
directories are not supported. All files are saved to the
File Name root directory.
TEST
Catalog On/Off This key toggles the file catalog display screen on and
Catalog off. The use of this key is identical to the Catalog On/Off
function in the Save Data submenu describe previously.
On Off

Return The Return key will return to the main Disk menu. Return
also removes the catalog display screen and restores
Return: the displays.

5-46
 Disk Menu

Recall Settings The Recall Settings submenu is used to recall the lock-in settings from a
disk file. The settings include all parameters which are set with the
menus.

Setting Recall Settings Pressing this key will read the settings information from
the file specified in the File Name field. The lock-in will
Recall: be configured according to the recalled settings. Any
trace data presently in memory is lost.

File Name This key activates the File Name entry field. File names
are entered using the keypad and alternate keypad. The
[ALT] key allows letters to be entered. DOS file name
conventions must be followed, i.e. file names are 8 char-
acters or less with an extension of up to 3 characters.
"ABCDEFGH.XYZ" is a valid file name. It is not neces-
File Name
sary to press [ENTER] following the file name. DOS sub-
TEST directories are not supported. All files are read from the
root directory.
Catalog
On Off Catalog On/Off This key toggles the file catalog display screen on and
off. The use of this key is identical to the Catalog On/Off
function in the Save Data sub menu.
Return:
Return The Return key will return to the main Disk menu. Return
also removes the catalog display screen and restores
the displays.

5-47
 Disk Menu

Disk Utilities The Disk Utilities submenu contains the Format Disk and Erase File func-
tions. These functions should be used with care since disk data will
be erased. The catalog screen may be displayed with this submenu if a
formatted disk is in the drive.

Erase File This function will erase the file specified in the File Name
File
field. Make sure the selected file is the correct file before
Erase: pressing this key.

Disk Format Disk Pressing this key will format the disk. Formatting a disk
Format: involves erasing all information on the disk and rewriting
the directory. Formatting a disk destroys all data
presently on the disk. Use caution when choosing this
function.

Disk capacity is 720k formatted. The maximum number

File Name of directory entries is 114. This is the DOS limitation on
TEST the number of files allowed in the root directory.

Catalog File Name This key activates the File Name entry field. File names
are entered using the keypad and alternate keypad. The
On Off
[ALT] key allows letters to be entered. DOS file name
conventions must be followed, i.e. file names are 8 char-
acters or less with an extension of up to 3 characters.
Return: "ABCDEFGH.XYZ" is a valid file name. It is not neces-
sary to press [ENTER] following the file name. DOS sub-
directories are not supported. All files are read from the
root directory.

Catalog On/Off This key toggles the file catalog display screen on and
off. The use of this key is identical to the Catalog On/Off
function in the Save Data sub menu.

Return The Return key will return to the main Disk menu. Return
also removes the catalog display screen and restores
the displays.

5-48
 SYSTEM SETUP MENU
System Setup The System Setup menu is used to configure the system parameters.
The Settings submenu configures the printer, plotter and computer inter-
faces, and the screen, sound and clock/calendar parameters. The Plot
submenu is used to plot the screen display to an HPGL compatible plot-
ter. The Info submenu displays various information screens. The Test
submenu selects various hardware tests.

SYSTEM
Settings: SETUP

Settings
Plot:

Plot
Info:
Info
Hardware
Test: Hardware Test

Setup Keys Each System Setup key activates a submenu. Each submenu is
described in detail in the following pages.

5-49
 System Setup Menu

Settings The Settings menu is used to configure the printer, plotter and computer
interfaces, and to set the screen, sound and clock/calendar parameters.

Settings Settings SYSTEM

Com: Screen: SETUP

Settings
Sound: Time:
Communications Screen

Plotter:
Sound Time

Printer: Plotter

Printer
More:

More

Return: Return:
Return Return

Settings Keys The Settings menu consists of two menus, with each key activating a
submenu. Use the More and Return softkeys to toggle between the two
menus.

5-50
 System Setup Menu

Setup Communications Communication parameters in this submenu should not be altered while
the computer interface is active.

Output To SYSTEM
SETUP
RS-232 GPIB

Setup Settings
RS232:
Communications
Setup
GPIB:
Output To RS232/GPIB
View
Queues: Setup RS232 Setup GPIB

Baud Rate GPIB Address

Word Length Overide Remote ?

Return:
Parity

Return Return

View Queues

Return

Output to RS232/GPIB The SR850 only outputs data to one interface at a time. Commands may
be received over both interfaces but responses are directed only to the
interface selected by this key. Make sure that the Output interface is set
correctly before attempting to program the SR850 from a computer. The
first command sent by any program should be to set the output to the
correct interface.

5-51
 System Setup Menu

Setup RS232 The Setup RS232 key activates the RS232 parameters submenu. Baud
rate, word length, and parity may be configured in this submenu.

Baud Rate The Baud Rate key allows the knob to adjust the RS232
Baud Rate
baud rate. The baud rate can be set to any standard
9600 bd value from 300 to 19200 baud.

Word Length Word Length This key toggles the character length. The RS232 char-
7 bits 8 bits acter length can be 7 or 8 bits. 8 bits is standard.

Parity Parity This key toggles the parity. The RS232 parity can be
Even Even, Odd, or None.
Odd None
Return The Return key will return to the Setup Communications
menu.

Return:

Setup GPIB The Setup GPIB key activates the GPIB parameters submenu. GPIB
instrument address and Remote Overide are set in this submenu.

GPIB Address GPIB Address This key activates the GPIB Address entry field for
numeric and knob entry. The instrument address can be
8 set from 0 to 30.

Overide Remote? Overide Remote ? In general, every GPIB interface command will put the
No Yes SR850 into the REMOTE state with the front panel inac-
tivated. To defeat this feature, set the Overide Remote ?
to Yes. In this mode, the front panel is not locked out
when the unit is in the REMOTE state.

If the SR850 is in the REMOTE state, the [HELP] key

returns the unit to local front panel control.

Return The Return key will return to the Setup Communications

menu.

Return:

5-52
 System Setup Menu

View Queues The last 256 characters received or transmitted by the SR850 may be
displayed to help find programming errors. The View Queues key will dis-
play the interface buffers at the time the key is pressed. This screen is
updated regularly to display new interface activity. The View Queues
screen may slow down the communications between the SR850 and a
host computer. In general, the View Queues screen should be displayed
only when testing or debugging a host program.

The most recent data is displayed at the right of the upper line of each
queue display. For example, in the screen below, the ❊IDN?[lf] string
was the most recently received command. The [lf] character is a line-feed
and is the string delimiter. The most recently transmitted string is
"Stanford_Research_Systems,SR850,s/n00001,ver001"[lf] in response to
the ❊IDN? command. Unrecognized characters are ignored and not dis-
played. The terminator character on the output queue is always shown
as a [lf]. When the output is directed to the RS232 interface, a carriage
return [cr] is actually sent in place of the [lf].

Press any key (except [PRINT]) to restore the screen to the graph mode.

Full Scale = 10 mV 100 mS Syncro Output To

Dyn Reserve = 3 dB 12 dB/oct Line 2xLin AC A
RS-232 GPIB

Receive Queue: Setup

RS232:
*IDN?

Setup
RS232:
Transmit Queue:
Stanford_Research_Systems,SR850,s/n00001,ver001 Setup
GPIB:

Press Any Key to Continue

Stop Intrnl Fr= 100.00 Hz Return:
LOCK Harmonic= 1 LOC

Return The Return key will return to the main Settings menu.

5-53
 System Setup Menu

Setup Sound The Setup Sound key activates the sound submenu. Key click and
alarms are enabled and disabled in this menu.

Key Click SYSTEM

On Off SETUP

Alarms Settings
On Off
Sound

Key Click On/Off

Alarms On/Off

Return

Return:

Key Click This key turns the key click on and off.

Alarms This key enables and disables the audible alarms. Alarms will sound
whenever a front panel programming error or interface error occurs.
Alarms are also used to draw the user's attention to a message.

Return The Return key will return to the main Settings menu.

5-54
 System Setup Menu

Setup Plotter The Setup Plotter submenu configures the SR850 plotter driver. Inter-
face, plot speed, and pen definitions are set in this submenu. To actually
start plotting, use the [PLOT] key to select the Plot menu.

Plot Mode SYSTEM

RS232 GPIB SETUP

Baud Rate Settings

9600 bd

Plotter
Plot Speed
Fast Slow
Plot Mode
Define RS232 GPIB
Pens:

Baud Rate Plotter Address

Plot Speed

Return: Define Pens

Trace Pen

Grid Pen

Alpha Pen

Cursor Pen

Return

Return

Plot Mode The SR850 can drive either an RS232 or GPIB interface plotter. The plot-
ter must be HP-GL compatible. This function selects which interface to
use. The plotter connects to the RS232 or GPIB connector on the rear
panel.

Baud Rate Baud Rate If the Plot Mode is RS232, then the Baud Rate for the
9600 bd plotter may be selected. The baud rate is adjusted using
the knob and must match the baud rate of the plotter.

5-55
 System Setup Menu

Plotter Addr. Plotter Addr. If the Plot Mode is GPIB, then the Plotter Address must
1 be set. The Plotter Address may be entered from the
keypad or by using the knob. The Plotter Address must
agree with the address of the plotter in use.

In this mode, the plotter must be the only device

attached to the SR850 GPIB interface.

Plot Speed This key toggles the Plot Speed. Normally, when plotting on paper, the
Fast Plot Speed is used. When plotting on transparencies or other non-
standard media, the Slow plot speed may be better.

Define Pens Many plotters have a multipen carousel. In this case, each part of the
screen may be plotted using a different color pen. The Define Pens key
activates a submenu in which each feature of the screen may be
assigned a pen number. The allowable pen numbers are from 1 to 6.
When using a single pen plotter, all features are plotted using the one
pen regardless of the pen definitions.

Trace Pen Trace Pen This field assigns a pen number to the data traces on the
screen.
1

Grid Pen This field assigns a pen number to the graph grids.
Grid Pen
1 Alpha Pen This field assigns a pen number to all of the alphanumer-
ic labels on the screen.
Alpha Pen
1 Cursor Pen This field assigns a pen number to the dashed cursor
region lines and marker.
Cursor Pen
Return This key returns to the Setup Plotter menu.
1

Return:

Return The Return key will return to the main Settings menu.

5-56
 System Setup Menu

Setup Printer The Setup Printer menu is used to select the type of printer attached to
the parallel printer port. The [PRINT] key prints the screen to the printer.
If File is chosen as the printer type, then [PRINT] will save the screen
image as a PCX file on the disk.

Printer Type SYSTEM

Epson HP SETUP
File
Settings

Printer

Printer Type

Return

Return:

Printer Type This function toggles the Printer Type between Epson, HP and File.
Epson is used for any Epson compatible graphics dot matrix printer and
HP is used for an HP LaserJet laser printer or compatible. File is used to
save the screen image as a PCX file on the disk. The files are automati-
cally named SCRNXXXX.PCX. PCX files can be imported directly into
many paint and draw programs on a PC. This allows SR850 charts and
graphs to be easily incorporated into documents on a PC. Press the
[PRINT] key to print the screen on the printer or to a file.

Return The Return key will return to the main Settings menu.

5-57
 System Setup Menu

Setup Screen The Setup Screen submenu is used to adjust the position of the display
on the screen. The display area may be moved left, right, up and down.

Move SYSTEM
Right: SETUP

Settings
Left:

Screen

Up:
Move Right

Down: Move Left

Move Up

Move Down

Return:
Return

The screen position is stored in non-volatile memory and is retained

when the power is turned off. To restore the screen to the default posi-
tion, power the unit on with the [←] (backspace) key pressed.

Move Right This function moves the display to the right on the screen.

Move Left This function moves the display to the left on the screen.

Move Up This function moves the display up on the screen.

Move Down This function moves the display down on the screen.

Return The Return key will return to the main Settings menu.

5-58
 System Setup Menu

Setup Time The Setup Time key activates the clock/calendar submenu. The time and
date are used to label all screen prints and plots as well as disk files.
This menu is used to check or change the time and date.

Time SYSTEM
03 : 45 : 12 SETUP

Date Settings
03 / 15 / 91
Time

Time

Date

Return

Return:

Time The time is displayed as hours:minutes:seconds. A 24 hour format is

used. This key toggles the entry field from hours to minutes to seconds.
A new entry may be made using the knob. The clock is set whenever the
highlighted value is changed.

Date The date is displayed as month:day:year. This key toggles the entry field
from months to days to years. A new entry may be made using the knob.
The calendar is set whenever the highlighted value is changed.

Return The Return key will return to the main Settings menu.

5-59
System Setup Menu

5-60
 System Setup Menu

Plot The Plot submenu is used to plot the screen display to an HPGL compat-
ible plotter. Use the Plotter Settings menu to configure the plotter
interface.

Plot SYSTEM
SETUP
All:

Plot
Trace:

Plot All

Cursor:
Plot Trace

Plot Cursor

Abort
Plot:

Abort Plot
Return:
Return

Plot All The Plot All key generates a plot of the entire display, including the scale
and marker information. In single display format only the full screen
graph is plotted. In dual trace mode both displays are plotted. Each fea-
ture uses the pen assigned in the Plotter Settings submenu in the
System Setup menu. The marker is plotted only if it is presently
displayed.

Plot Trace The Plot Trace key plots only the data trace(s). This allows multiple data
traces to be plotted on a single sheet. Traces may be plotted in different
colors by changing pen definitions or pens between plots. In single dis-
play format, the full screen graph is plotted. In dual trace mode, both dis-
plays are plotted.

Plot Cursor The Plot Cursor key plots the cursor if the cursor is presently displayed
on the screen. Use the Cursor Setup menu to turn the cursor display on
and off. The cursor information is plotted next to the cursor. This is useful
when a trace has multiple peaks which need to be marked on the plot.
First Plot All with the cursor at one location, then move the cursor and
Plot Cursor.

Plot Abort Pressing this key aborts the plot.

Return The Return key will return to the main System Setup menu.

5-61
System Setup Menu

5-62
 System Setup Menu

Info The Info submenu displays various information screens which may be
helpful to the user.

SYSTEM
About the SETUP
SR850:

Info
About
SRS:
About the SR850
Operating
Hints: About SRS

Command
Operating Hints
List:

Status Command List

Bytes:

Status Bytes
Return:
Return

About the SR850 This key displays the SR850 specifications.

About SRS This key displays information about Stanford Research Systems, Inc.

Operating Hints This key displays information about the use of the SR850.

Command List This key displays a list of the remote commands available.

Status Bytes This key displays an explanation of the remote programming status
bytes.

Return The Return key will return to the main System Setup menu.

5-63
System Setup Menu

5-64
 System Setup Menu

Test Hardware The Test submenu allows the user to test various features of the SR850
such as the keypad, knob, screen, memory, etc. Use the More softkey to
select the second test menu screen.

Test Test SYSTEM

Keypad: RS-232: SETUP

Test Hardware
Keyboard: Memory:

Keypad Test RS-232 Test

Knob: Screen:
Keyboard Test Memory Test

Disk Drive: Printer: Knob Test Screen Test

More
More Disk Drive Test Printer Test

More
Return: Return:

Return Return

Keypad Test This key activates the keypad test screen. The keypad test screen dis-
plays a map of the keypad with each key represented by a small square.
Pressing each key will highlight the corresponding square. When all
squares are highlighted, the test is complete.

Keyboard Test This key activates the keyboard test screen. Characters typed on an
attached PC keyboard (in PC or 8088 mode) will be displayed on the test
screen. If the displayed characters are accurate, then the keyboard inter-
face is functioning and the keyboard is configured correctly. If not, check
that the keyboard is in the correct mode. Many keyboards have a switch
on the bottom to select PC (8088) or AT (80286) mode.

Knob Test This key activates the knob test screen. A circle with a marker is dis-
played. Select one of the 4 speeds displayed in the menu. Turning the
knob will cause the marker to move around the circle verifying knob
action and direction. Using speed 1 or 2 is best when checking direction
of movement.

5-65
 System Setup Menu

Disk Drive Test Pressing this key activates the disk drive test screen. Continuing with
this test will destroy any data on the disk currently in the drive.
Therefore remove any disk containing data from the drive and insert a
scratch disk. This test will check the controller, format the disk, and read
and write data to the disk. The entire test takes approximately 2 minutes.

Use the Return function to skip this test and return to the previous menu.

RS-232 Test Pressing this key activates the RS232 test screen. A special loop back
adapter is required to complete this test. The loop back adapter is simply
a mating connector with pins 2 and 3 connected so characters transmit-
ted by the SR850 will be received by the SR850.

Memory Test The Memory Test key activates a memory test submenu. Select the
desired memory test.

Main Mem Main Memory Pressing this key tests the program ROM and data RAM
on the CPU board.

Video Mem Video Memory Pressing this key tests the video display RAM. A video
pattern will scroll through the display while the test is
done.

Return The Return key will return to the Test submenu.

Screen Test This key displays a test pattern on the screen.

Printer Test The Printer Test key activates a submenu.

Printer Printer Type The Printer Type key selects the type of printer attached
to the parallel printer port. Any Epson compatible graph-
HP EPSON
ics printer or HP LaserJet compatible printer is
supported.
Screen Dump
Screen Dump Pressing this key will print the screen on the printer. This
action is the same as using the [PRINT] key.
Print String
Print String Pressing this key prints a text string to the printer. If the
Print String test works but the Screen Dump test fails,
then the printer probably does not support the Epson or
HP LaserJet graphics mode.

Return The Return key will return to the Test submenu.

Return Pressing this key returns to the first Test submenu. Pressing Return
again displays the System Setup menu.

5-66
 REMOTE PROGRAMMING

INTRODUCTION

The SR850 DSP Lock-in Amplifier may be remote- SR850 is in a remote state (front panel locked
ly programmed via either the RS232 or GPIB out). The LOC indicator is on when the front panel
(IEEE-488) interfaces. Any computer supporting is active (Local Mode). The SRQ indicator is on
one of these interfaces may be used to program when the SR850 generates a service request.
the SR850. Both interfaces are receiving at all SRQ stays on until a serial poll is completed.
times, however, the SR850 will send responses
only to the interface specified in the System To help find program errors, the SR850 can dis-
Setup menu (Output To RS232/GPIB function). play the interface buffers on the screen. This
Use the OUTX command at the beginning of screen is activated by the View Queue function in
every program to direct the responses to the the Setup Communications menu. The last 256
correct interface. All front panel features (except characters received and transmitted by the SR850
power) may be controlled. are displayed.

COMMUNICATING WITH GPIB COMMAND SYNTAX

The SR850 supports the IEEE-488.1 (1978) inter- Communications with the SR850 uses ASCII char-
face standard. It also supports the required acters. Commands may be in either UPPER or
common commands of the IEEE-488.2 (1987) lower case and may contain any number of
standard. Before attempting to communicate with embedded space characters. A command to the
the SR850 over the GPIB interface, the SR850's SR850 consists of a four character command
device address must be set. The address is set in mnemonic, arguments if necessary, and a com-
the Setup GPIB menu and may be set between 0 mand terminator. The terminator must be a line-
and 30. feed <lf> or carriage return <cr> on RS232, or a
linefeed <lf> or EOI on GPIB. No command pro-
COMMUNICATING WITH RS232 cessing occurs until a command terminator is
received. Commands function identically on GPIB
The SR850 is configured as a DCE ( transmit on and RS232 whenever possible. Command mne-
pin 3, receive on pin 2) device and supports CTS/ monics beginning with an asterisk "❊" are IEEE-
DTR hardware handshaking. The CTS signal (pin 488.2 (1987) defined common commands. These
5) is an output indicating that the SR850 is ready, commands also function identically on RS232.
while the DTR signal (pin 20) is an input that is Commands may require one or more parameters.
used to control the SR850's data transmission. If Multiple parameters are separated by commas (,).
desired, the handshake pins may be ignored and a
simple 3 wire interface (pins 2,3 and 7) may be Multiple commands may be sent on one command
used. The RS232 interface baud rate, number of line by separating them with semicolons (;). The
data bits, and parity must be set. These are set in difference between sending several commands on
the Setup RS232 menu. the same line and sending several independent
commands is that when a command line is parsed
STATUS INDICATORS AND QUEUES and executed, the entire line is executed before
any other device action proceeds.
To assist in programming, the SR850 has 5 inter-
face status indicators which are displayed at the There is no need to wait between commands. The
bottom of the screen. The RS232/GPIB Activity SR850 has a 256 character input buffer and pro-
indicator flashes whenever a character is received cesses commands in the order received. If the
or transmitted over either interface. The ERR indi- buffer fills up, the SR850 will hold off handshaking
cator flashes when an error, such as an illegal on the GPIB and attempt to hold off handshaking
command, or parameter out of range, has been on RS232. Similarly, the SR850 has a 256 charac-
detected. The REM indicator is on whenever the ter output buffer to store outputs until the host

6-1
 Remote Programming

computer is ready to receive. If either buffer over- sent, the Status Bytes should be queried.
flows, both buffers are cleared and an error
reported. When using the GPIB interface, serial polling may
be used to check the Interface Ready bit in the
The present value of a particular parameter may Serial Poll Byte while an operation is in progress.
be determined by querying the SR850 for its After the Interface Ready bit becomes set, signal-
value. A query is formed by appending a question ling the completion of the command, then the ERR
mark "?" to the command mnemonic and omitting or ESB bit may be checked to verify successful
the desired parameter from the command. Values completion of the command.
returned by the SR850 are sent as a string of
ASCII characters terminated by a carriage return If the RS232 interface is used, or serial polling is
<cr> on RS232 and by a line-feed <lf> on GPIB. If not available, then the ❊STB?, ❊ESR?, ERRS?,
multiple queries are sent on one command line and LIAS? status query commands may be used
(separated by semicolons, of course) the answers to query the Status Bytes. Since the SR850 pro-
will be returned individually, each with a cesses one command at a time, the status query
terminator. will not be processed until the previous operation
is finished. Thus a response to the status query in
Examples of Command Formats itself signals that the previous command is fin-
ished. The query response may then be checked
FMOD 0<lf> Set reference source to for various errors.
internal
FREQ 10E3 <lf> Set the internal reference fre- For example, the command line SDAT;ERRS?
quency to 10000 Hz (10 kHz) <lf> will save the data to disk and return the Error
❊IDN? <lf> Queries the device Status Byte when finished. The Disk Error bit (bit
identification 3) may be checked to make sure that the Save
STRT <lf> Starts data acquisition (same Data (SDAT) command terminated without error.
as [START] key) Since the Save Data command may take a long
OUTP? 1 <lf> Queries the value of X time to execute, it is important that the host com-
puter interface does not time out while waiting for
INTERFACE READY AND STATUS the response to the ERRS? query. In the case
where the host interface times out before the
The Interface Ready bit (bit 1) in the Serial Poll ERRS? response, the host program must wait
Status Byte signals that the SR850 is ready to before sending the ERRS? query.
receive and execute a command. When a com-
mand is received, this bit is cleared indicating that GET (GROUP EXECUTE TRIGGER)
an operation is in progress. While the operation is
in progress, no other commands will be pro- The GPIB interface command GET is the same as
cessed. Commands received during this time are the TRIG command. GET is the same as a trigger
stored in the buffer to be processed later. Only input. GET only has an effect if the sampling rate
GPIB serial polling will generate a response while is triggered or if triggers start a scan.
a command is in progress. When the command
execution terminates, the Interface Ready bit is set
again and new commands will be processed.
Since most commands execute very quickly, the
host computer does not need to continually check
the Interface Ready bit. Commands may be sent
one after another and they will be processed
immediately.

However, some commands, such as file com-

mands and math operations, may require a long
time to execute. In addition, the host program may
need to check that these operations executed
without error. In these cases, after the command is

6-2
 Remote Programming

DETAILED COMMAND LIST

The four letter mnemonic in each command sequence specifies the command. The rest of the sequence con-
sists of parameters. Multiple parameters are separated by commas. Parameters shown in { } are optional or
may be queried while those not in { } are required. Commands that may be queried have a question mark in
parentheses (?) after the mnemonic. Commands that may ONLY be queried have a ? after the mnemonic.
Commands that MAY NOT be queried have no ?. Do not send ( ) or { } as part of the command.

The variables are defined as follows.

i, j, k, l, m integers
x, y, z real numbers
f frequency
s string

All numeric variables may be expressed in integer, floating point or exponential formats ( i.e., the number five
can be either 5, 5.0, or .5E1). Strings are sent as a sequence of ASCII characters.

Remember!
All responses are directed to the interface selected in the Setup Communications Output To RS232/GPIB
function, regardless of which interface received the query. Use the OUTX command to select the
correct interface at the beginning of every program.

6-3
 Remote Programming

REFERENCE and PHASE COMMANDS

PHAS (?) {x} The PHAS command sets or queries the reference phase shift. The
parameter x is the phase (real number of degrees). The PHAS x com-
mand will set the phase shift to x. The value of x will be rounded to
0.001°. The phase may be programmed from -360.000 ≤ x ≤ 719.999
and will be wrapped around at ±180°. For example, the PHAS 541.0
command will set the phase to -179.000° (541-360=181=-179). The
PHAS? queries the phase shift.

FMOD (?) {i} The FMOD command sets or queries the reference source. The parame-
ter i selects internal (i=0), internal sweep (i=1) or external (i=2).

FREQ (?) {f} The FREQ command sets or queries the reference frequency. The
FREQ? query command will return the reference frequency (in internal or
external mode). The FREQ? query reads the frequency displayed at the
bottom of the screen.

The FREQ f command sets the frequency of the internal oscillator. This
command is allowed only if the reference source is internal. The parame-
ter f is a frequency (real number of Hz). The value of f will be rounded to
5 digits or 0.0001 Hz, whichever is greater. The value of f is limited to
0.001 ≤ f ≤ 102000. If the harmonic number is greater than 1, then the
frequency is limited to nxf ≤ 102 kHz where n is the harmonic number.

SWPT (?) {i} The SWPT command sets or queries the type of frequency sweep when
the reference source in internal sweep. The parameter i=0 selects linear
and i=1 selects logarithmic. The sweep type may not be changed while a
scan (sweep) is in progress.

SLLM (?) {f} The SLLM command sets or queries the start frequency of the internal
frequency sweep. This parameter may be set in any reference mode.
The sweep limit may not be changed while a scan (sweep) is in progress.
The parameter f is a frequency (real number of Hz). The value of f will be
rounded to 5 digits or 0.0001 Hz, whichever is greater. The value of f is
limited to 0.001 ≤ f ≤ 102000. If the harmonic number is greater than 1,
then the frequency is limited to nxf ≤ 102 kHz where n is the harmonic
number.

SULM (?) {f} The SULM command sets or queries the stop frequency of the internal
frequency sweep. This parameter may be set in any reference mode.
The sweep limit may not be changed while a scan (sweep) is in progress.
The parameter f is a frequency (real number of Hz). The value of f will be
rounded to 5 digits or 0.0001 Hz, whichever is greater. The value of f is
limited to 0.001 ≤ f ≤ 102000. If the harmonic number is greater than 1,
then the frequency is limited to nxf ≤ 102 kHz where n is the harmonic
number.

RSLP (?) {i} The RSLP command sets or queries the reference slope when using the
external reference mode. The parameter i selects sine zero crossing
(i=0), TTL rising edge (i=1), , or TTL falling edge (i=2). At frequencies
below 1 Hz, the a TTL reference must be used.

6-4
 Remote Programming

HARM (?) {i} The HARM command sets or queries the detection harmonic. This
parameter is an integer from 1 to 32767. The HARM i command will set
the lock-in to detect at the ith harmonic of the reference frequency. The
value of i is limited by ixf ≤ 102 kHz. If the value of i requires a detection
frequency greater than 102 kHz, then the harmonic number will be set to
the largest value of i such that ixf ≤ 102 kHz.

SLVL (?) {x} The SLVL command sets or queries the amplitude of the sine output.
The parameter x is a voltage (real number of Volts). The value of x will
be rounded to 0.002V. The value of x is limited to 0.004 ≤ x ≤ 5.000.

6-5
 Remote Programming

INPUT and FILTER COMMANDS

ISRC (?) {i} The ISRC command sets or queries the input configuration. The parame-
ter i selects A (i=0), A-B (i=1) or I (i=2).

IGAN (?) {i} The IGAN command sets or queries the conversion gain of the current
input. The parameter i selects 1 MΩ (i=0), 100 MΩ (i=1). This parameter
has no effect unless the input is configured to measure current.

Changing the current gain does not change the instrument sensitivity.
Sensitivities above 10 nA require a current gain of 1 MΩ. Sensitivities
between 20 nA and 1 µA automatically select the 1 MΩ current gain. At
sensitivities below 20 nA, changing the sensitivity does not change the
current gain.

IGND (?) {i} The IGND command sets or queries the input shield grounding. The
parameter i selects Float (i=0) or Ground (i=1).

ICPL (?) {i} The ICPL command sets or queries the input coupling. The parameter i
selects AC (i=0) or DC (i=1).

ILIN (?) {i} The ILIN command sets or queries the input line notch filter status. The
parameter i selects Out or no filters (i=0), Line notch in (i=1), 2xLine
notch in (i=2) or Both notch filters in (i=3).

6-6
 Remote Programming

GAIN and TIME CONSTANT COMMANDS

SENS (?) {i} The SENS command sets or queries the sensitivity. The parameter i
selects a sensitivity below.

i sensitivity i sensitivity
0 2 nV/fA 13 50 µV/pA
1 5 nV/fA 14 100 µV/pA
2 10 nV/fA 15 200 µV/pA
3 20 nV/fA 16 500 µV/pA
4 50 nV/fA 17 1 mV/nA
5 100 nV/fA 18 2 mV/nA
6 200 nV/fA 19 5 mV/nA
7 500 nV/fA 20 10 mV/nA
8 1 µV/pA 21 20 mV/nA
9 2 µV/pA 22 50 mV/nA
10 5 µV/pA 23 100 mV/nA
11 10 µV/pA 24 200 mV/nA
12 20 µV/pA 25 500 mV/nA
26 1 V/µA

RMOD (?) {i} The RMOD command sets or queries the reserve mode. The parameter i
selects Max (i=0), Manual (i=1) or Min (i=2).

RSRV (?) {i} The RSRV command sets or queries the dynamic reserve. The RSRV i
command sets the manual reserve to the ith available reserve (0≤i≤5).
RSRV 0 selects the minimum reserve for the present sensitivity and time
constant. RSRV 1 selects the next highest reserve and so on. The
reserve increases by 10 dB for each successive value of i. If the RSRVi
command requests a reserve greater than the max available at the
present sensitivity, the max reserve will be used. RSRV5 always sets the
reserve to the max. The reserve can be set only if Manual reserve mode
is selected.The RSRV? query returns the reserve index i (0≤i≤5).

See the Reserve section in the Gain and Time Constant menu section for
a listing of the available reserves.

OFLT (?) {i} The OFLT command sets or queries the time constant. The parameter i
selects a time constant below.

i time constant i time constant

0 10 µs 10 1s
1 30 µs 11 3s
2 100 µs 12 10 s
3 300 µs 13 30 s
4 1 ms 14 100 s
5 3 ms 15 300 s
6 10 ms 16 1 ks
7 30 ms 17 3 ks
8 100 ms 18 10 ks
9 300 ms 19 30 ks

6-7
 Remote Programming

Time constants greater than 30s may NOT be set if the

harmonic x ref. frequency (detection frequency) exceeds 200 Hz. Time
constants shorter than the minimum time constant (based upon the filter
slope and dynamic reserve) will set the time constant to the minimum
allowed time constant. See the GAIN/TC menu section.

OFSL (?) {i} The OFSL command sets or queries the low pass filter slope. The
parameter i selects 6 dB/oct (i=0), 12 dB/oct (i=1), 18 dB/oct (i=2) or
24 dB/oct (i=3).

SYNC (?) {i} The SYNC command sets or queries the synchronous filter status. The
parameter i selects Off (i=0) or synchronous filtering below 200 Hz (i=1).
Synchronous filtering is turned on only if the detection frequency (refer-
ence x harmonic number) is less than 200 Hz.

6-8
 Remote Programming

OUTPUT and OFFSET COMMANDS

FOUT (?) i {, j} The FOUT command sets or queries the front panel (CH1 and CH2)
output sources. The parameter i selects CH1 (i=1) or CH2 (i=2) and is
required. The FOUT i, j command sets output i to quantity j where j is
listed below. The definition of j is different for the two outputs.

CH1 (i=1) CH2 (i=2)

j output quantity j output quantity
0 X 0 Y
1 R 1 R
2 θ 2 θ
3 Trace 1 3 Trace 1
4 Trace 2 4 Trace 2
5 Trace 3 5 Trace 3
6 Trace 4 6 Trace 4

OEXP (?) i {, x, j} The OEXP command sets or queries the output offsets and expands.
The parameter i selects X (i=1), Y (i=2) or R (i=3) and is required. The
parameter x is the offset in percent (-105.00 ≤ x ≤ 105.00) and j is the
expand (1 ≤ j ≤ 256). The OEXP i, x, j command will set the offset and
expand for quantity i. This command requires BOTH x and j. The OEXP?
i command queries the offset and expand of quantity i. The returned
string contains both the offset and expand separated by a comma. For
example, if the OEXP? 2 command returns "50.00,10" then the Y offset
is 50.00% and Y expand is 10.

AOFF i The AOFF i command automatically offsets X (i=1), Y (i=2) or R (i=3) to

zero. The parameter i is required. This command is equivalent to press-
ing the Auto softkey in the Offset & Expand menu box.

6-9
 Remote Programming

TRACE and SCAN COMMANDS

TRCD (?) i {, j, k, l, m} The TRCD command sets or queries the trace definitions. The parameter
i selects the trace number (1, 2, 3 or 4) and is required. The
TRCD i, j, k, l, m command defines trace i to quantity j times quantity k
divided by quantity l and the trace will be stored (m=1) or not stored
(m=0). This command requires all of the parameters. The parameters j, k
and l select the quantities listed below. Only l can be greater than 12.

j, k, l quantity j, k, l quantity l quantity l quantity

0 1 7 Rn 13 X2 19 Rn2
1 X 8 AI1 14 Y2 20 AI12
2 Y 9 AI2 15 R2 21 AI22
3 R 10 AI3 16 θ2 22 AI32
4 θ 11 AI4 17 Xn2 23 AI42
5 Xn 12 F 18 Yn2 24 F2
6 Yn

For example, the TRCD 1,1,2,3,1 command defines trace 1 as X•Y/R

and stores trace 1.

The TRCD? i command queries the trace definition of trace i. The

returned string contains j, k, l and m separated by commas. For example,
if the TRCD? 1 command returns "1,2,3,1" then trace 1 is defined as
X•Y/R and is stored.

SRAT (?) {i} The SRAT command sets or queries the scan sample rate. The parame-
ter i selects the sample rate listed below.

i quantity i quantity
0 62.5 mHz 7 8 Hz
1 125 mHz 8 16 Hz
2 250 mHz 9 32 Hz
3 500 mHz 10 64 Hz
4 1 Hz 11 128 Hz
5 2 Hz 12 256 Hz
6 4 Hz 13 512 Hz
14 Trigger

SLEN (?) {x} The SLEN command sets or queries the scan length. The parameter x is
the scan length (real number of seconds). The scan length will be set to
the closest allowed time given the sample rate and the number of stored
traces. The buffer holds 16000 points for 4 stored traces, 32000 points
for 2 traces and 64000 points of 1 trace. The maximum scan length is the
buffer size divided by the sample rate. The minimum is 1.0 sec.

SEND (?) {i} The SEND command sets or queries the scan mode. The parameter i
selects 1 Shot (i=0) or Loop (i=1).

TRIG The TRIG command is the software trigger command. This command
has the same effect as a trigger at the rear panel trigger input.

6-10
 Remote Programming

DISPLAY and SCALE COMMANDS

ASCL The ASCL command auto scales the active display. This command is
just like pressing the [AUTO SCALE] key. Only Bar and Chart displays
are affected.

ADSP (?) {i} The ADSP command selects the active display. The parameter i selects
Full (i=0), Top (i=1) or Bottom (i=2). The selected display must be pres-
ently displayed on the screen otherwise an error will result.

SMOD (?) {i} The SMOD command sets or queries the screen format. The parameter i
selects Single or full screen display (i=0), or Up/Down dual display (i=1).

MNTR (?) {i} The MNTR command sets or queries the monitor display mode. The
parameter i selects Settings monitor (i=0), or Input/Output monitor (i=1).

DTYP (?) i {, j} The DTYP command sets or queries the display type. The parameter i
selects the Full (i=0), Top (i=1) or Bottom (i=2) display and is required.
The parameter j selects Polar (i=0), Blank (i=1), Bar (i=2) or Chart (i=3).
An error is generated if the DTYP command tries to set the display type
of a display which is not on the screen. The DTYP?i query can check any
display's type.

DTRC (?) i {, j} The DTRC command sets or queries the displayed trace number. The
parameter i selects the Full (i=0), Top (i=1) or Bottom (i=2) display and is
required. The parameter j is the trace number (1, 2, 3 or 4). An error is
generated if the DTRC command tries to set the trace number of a dis-
play which is not on the screen. The DTRC?i query can check any dis-
play's trace.

DSCL (?) i {, x} The DSCL command sets or queries the display range. The parameter i
selects the Full (i=0), Top (i=1) or Bottom (i=2) display and is required.
The parameter x is the range (real number with the units of the displayed
trace). The value of x is limited to 10-18 < x < 1018. An error is generated
if the DSCL command tries to set the range of a display which is not on
the screen. The range only affects bar and chart display types.

DOFF (?) i {, x} The DOFF command sets or queries the display center value or offset.
The parameter i selects the Full (i=0), Top (i=1) or Bottom (i=2) display
and is required. The parameter x is the center value (real number with
the units of the display trace). The value of x is limited to 10-12 < x <
1012. An error is generated if the DOFF command tries to set the center
of a display which is not on the screen. The center only affects bar and
chart display types.

6-11
 Remote Programming

DHZS (?) i {, j} The DHZS command sets or queries the display horizontal scale. The
parameter i selects the Full (i=0), Top (i=1) or Bottom (i=2) display and is
required. The parameter j selects a scale listed below. An error is gener-
ated if the DHZS command tries to set the horizontal scale of a display
which is not on the screen. The horizontal scale only affects chart display
types.

i time/div i time/div
0 2 mS 17 200 S
1 5 mS 18 5 min
2 10 mS 19 500 S
3 20 mS 20 10 min
4 50 mS 21 1 kS
5 0.1 S 22 20 min
6 0.2 S 23 2 kS
7 0.5 S 24 1 hour
8 1.0 S 25 5 kS
9 2.0 S 26 2 hour
10 5.0 S 27 10 kS
11 10 S 28 3 hour
12 20 S 29 20 kS
13 50 S 30 50 kS
14 1 min 31 100 kS
15 100 S 32 200 kS
16 2 min

The minimum scale is related to the sample rate. The minimum scales is
(1/sample rate) per division. This displays a minimum of 10 points on the
chart. The maximum scale is also related to the sample rate. The scale
cannot exceed that which would display the entire buffer on the chart at
once.

RBIN? i The RBIN?i command queries the bin number at the right edge of the
Full (i=0), Top (i=1) or Bottom (i=2) chart display. The selected display
must be a chart display. RBIN? along with CBIN can be used to position
the time window of the active chart display over a specific trace region.

6-12
 Remote Programming

CURSOR COMMANDS

CSEK (?) {i} The CSEK command sets or queries the cursor seek mode of the active
display. The parameter i selects Max (i=0), Min (i=1) or Mean (i=2). Each
display has its own cursor seek mode. Use the ATRC and SMOD com-
mands to select the desired display. Only chart displays have a cursor.

CWID (?) {i} The CWID command sets or queries the cursor width of the active dis-
play. The parameter i selects Off (i=0), Narrow (i=1), Wide (i=2) or Spot
(i=3). Each display has its own cursor width. Use the ATRC and SMOD
commands to select the desired display. Only chart displays have a
cursor.

CDIV (?) {i} The CDIV command sets or queries the vertical divisions of the active
display. The parameter i selects 8 (i=0), 10 (i=1) or None (i=2). Each dis-
play has its own vertical division mode. Use the ATRC and SMOD com-
mands to select the desired display. This only affects chart displays.

CLNK (?) {i} The CLNK command sets or queries the cursor control mode. The
parameter i selects Linked (i=0) or Separate (i=1). Only chart displays
have a cursor.

CDSP (?) {i} The CDSP command sets or queries the cursor readout mode of the
active display. The parameter i selects Delay (i=0), Bin (i=1), Fsweep
(i=2) or Time (i=3). Only chart displays have a cursor.

CMAX The CMAX command is just like pressing the [CURSOR MAX/MIN] key.
The cursor will move to the max or min of the data (as set by the CSEK
command) on the active chart display . Only effective if the active display
is a chart display.

CURS? i The CURS? command queries the cursor position of the full (i=0), top
(i=1) or bottom (i=2) chart display. The selected display must be a chart
display. The result is returned as an X,Y pair of numbers separated by a
comma. The first number is the horizontal position (in bin, delay, time or
sweep frequency) and the second is the vertical position. The returned
values are those displayed in the cursor readout above the selected
chart display.

CBIN (?) {i} The CBIN command sets or queries the cursor bin position of the active
chart display. The active display must be a chart display. CBIN? returns
the bin number of the cursor. This is the bin at the center of the cursor
region, not the cursor readout position (which selects the min, max or
mean of the data within the cursor region). Remember, even a spot
cursor can span multiple data bins depending upon the scaling. The
CBIN i command moves the cursor to bin i. If bin i is outside the time
window of the chart, then the chart is panned left or right until bin i is at
either the left edge (bin i to the left of the window) or right edge (bin i to
the right of the window).

Remember, CBIN references the center of the cursor region. The

CURS? query reads the actual cursor location (as displayed in the cursor
readout) which is the max, min or mean of the data bins within the cursor
region.
6-13
 Remote Programming

MARK COMMANDS

MARK The MARK command is just like pressing the [MARK] key. A mark will be
placed in the data buffer at the next sample. This command has an effect
only when a scan is in progress.

CNXT The CNXT command moves the cursor of the active chart display to the
next mark to the right. If the mark is off the right edge of the graph, then
the display is panned to the right until the next mark is found.

CPRV The CPRV command moves the cursor of the active chart display to the
next mark to the left. If the mark is off the left edge of the graph, then the
display is panned to the left until the next mark is found.

MDEL The MDEL command is just like pressing the Marker Delete softkey. This
command will delete the nearest mark to the left of the cursor.

MACT? The MACT? command queries the number of active marks (0-8). If the
number of active marks is greater than 0, then the number of marks is
followed by the active mark numbers, separated by commas. For exam-
ple, if MACT? returns 3,0,2,6 then there are 3 active marks - mark #0, #2
and #6.

MBIN? i The MBIN?i command queries the bin number of mark #i. Remember, all
displays use the same marks. If mark #i is not active, then -1 is returned.
With the mark bin number, use TRCA? to read the trace data at mark #i.

MTXT (?) i {,s} The MTXT command sets or queries the label field for mark #i.
Remember, all displays use the same marks. The parameter i must
select an active mark (0-7). Use MACT? to determine which marks are
active. MTXT?i reads the label field for mark #i. The default label is the
date and time. The MTXT i,s sets the mark label to string s. Spaces are
not recognized, use '_' (underbar) instead.

6-14
 Remote Programming

AUX INPUT and OUTPUT COMMANDS

OAUX? i The OAUX? command queries the Aux Input values. The parameter i
selects an Aux Input (1, 2, 3 or 4) and is required. The Aux Input voltages
are returned as ASCII strings with units of Volts. The resolution is
1/3 mV. This command is a query only command.

AUXM (?) i {, j} The AUXM command sets or queries the Aux Output mode. The parame-
ter i selects an Aux Output (1, 2, 3 or 4) and is required. The parameter j
selects Fixed (j=0), Log sweep (j=1) or Linear sweep (j=2).

AUXV (?) i {, x} The AUXV command sets or queries the Aux Output voltage when the
output is in fixed voltage mode. The parameter i selects an Aux Output
(1, 2, 3 or 4) and is required. If i selects an output which is set to sweep,
then the AUXV command will generate an error. The parameter x is the
output voltage (real number of Volts) and is limited to
-10.500 ≤ x ≤ 10.500. The output voltage will be set to the nearest mV.

SAUX (?) i {, x, y, z} The SAUX command sets or queries the Aux Output sweep limits and
offsets. The parameter i selects an Aux Output (1, 2, 3 or 4) and is
required. If i selects an output which is set to fixed voltage mode, then
the SAUX command will generate an error. The parameter x is the
sweep start voltage. The parameter y is the sweep stop voltage. The
parameter z is the sweep offset voltage. The parameters x, y and z are
real numbers of Volts. The values of x and y are limited to
0.001 ≤ x,y ≤ 21.000. The value of z is limited to -10.500 ≤ z ≤ 10.500.
The voltages will be set to the nearest mV.

The SAUX? i query will return x,y,z if the output is in a sweep mode. The
return string is in ASCII and multiple parameters are separated by
commas. For example, the SAUX?1 command returns
"3.456,7.890,0.000" if output 1 is sweeping from 3.456V to 7.890V with
0.000V offset.

Any set of sweep parameters which would result in an output voltage out-
side of the -10.5V≤V≤10.5V range results in an error.

TSTR (?) {i} The TSTR command sets or queries the trigger start scan mode. The
parameter i selects No (i=0) or Yes (i=1).

6-15
 Remote Programming

MATH COMMANDS

The math functions operate on the trace which is graphed in the active display. If the display type is polar,
then the trace most recently displayed (in a bar or chart) will be used. If the active display trace is not stored,
then the math functions will generate an error and have no effect.

The Smooth and Calculator functions CHANGE the stored data. Only the data which is within the time window
of the chart graph is operated upon. If the display type is not a chart, then the most recent horizontal chart
scale and position will be used to determine the region of the trace which is operated upon.

The Fit and Statistics functions do NOT change the stored data. However, these functions only analyze a por-
tion of the data within the time window of the active chart display. If the display type is not a chart, then the
most recent horizontal chart scale and position will be used to determine the time window. The region of inter-
est within the window is determined by the left and right limits. These limits are specified in percent where 0%
is at the left edge, 10% is at the first division from the left, and 100% is at the right edge of the chart graph.

When using the math commands SMTH, FITT, STAT and CALC, the status bytes should be queried after the
command is sent to check if the command generated an error. Common sources of errors are divide by zero
and math overflow. For example, the command line CALC;❊ESR?<lf> will perform a calculation and then
return the Standard Event Status Byte when finished. This allows the host program to determine when the
CALC command is finished and whether an error occurred. The Execution Error bit (bit 4) may be checked to
make sure that the CALC command terminated without an error.

SMTH i The SMTH i command smooths the data trace of the active display. The
parameter i selects a smoothing width.

i smoothing width
0 5 points
1 11 points
2 17 points
3 21 points
4 25 points

The SMTH i command may take some time to complete. Use a status
byte query to detect when the smoothing operation is done. If a scan is in
progress, the SMTH command will Pause the scan.

COPR (?) {i} The COPR i command sets or queries the type of math operation select-
ed. The parameter i selects the operation.

i operation
0 +
1 -
2 ❊
3 /
4 sin
5 cos
6 tan
7 √x
8 x2
9 log
10 10x

6-16
 Remote Programming

CALC The CALC command starts the calculation selected by the COPR com-
mand. This may take some time. Use a status query command to detect
when the calculation is done. Make sure that CTRC or CARG have been
used to set the argument (if required by the operation) before using the
CALC command. If a scan is in progress, the CALC command will Pause
the scan.

CAGT (?) {i} The CAGT command sets or queries the argument type. The parameter i
selects Trace (i=0) or Constant (i=1).

CTRC (?) {i} The CTRC command sets or queries the trace argument number. The
parameter i selects Trace 1, 2, 3 or 4 (i=1, 2, 3, 4). The selected trace
must be stored.

CARG (?) {x} The CARG command sets or queries the constant argument value. The
parameter x is a real number.

FTYP (?) {i} The FTYP i command sets or queries the type of fit. The parameter i
selects the Line (i=0), Exponential (i=1) or Gaussian (i=2).

FITT i, j The FITT i,j command starts the fitting calculations. The fit takes place
only within the chart region defined as i% and j% from the left edge. The
parameters i and j are integers from 0 to 100 and j must be greater than
i.

The fit may take some time. Use a status query command to detect when
the fir operation is done. If a scan is in progress, the FITT command will
Pause the scan.

PARS ? i The PARS? i command queries the fit parameters after a curve fit has
been performed. If no fit has been done or the selected parameter is
unused in the fit, the PARS? command returns invalid data. The curve fit
parameters are a, b, c and t0 (see the Math menu section of this
manual). The parameter i selects a fit parameter to read. The value of i
from 0 to 3 selects a, b, c or t0.

STAT i, j The STAT i,j command starts the statistics calculations. Only the data
within the chart region defined as i% and j% from the left edge are ana-
lyzed. The parameters i and j are integers from 0 to 100 and j must be
greater than i.

The analysis may take some time. Use a status query command to
detect when the calculation is done.

SPAR ? i The SPAR? i command queries the results of a statistical calculation. If

no analysis has been done, the SPAR? command returns invalid data.
The STAT command calculates the mean, standard deviation, total data,
and delta time (see the Math menu section of this manual). The parame-
ter i selects the parameter to read. The value of i from 0 to 3 selects
mean, standard deviation, total data, and delta time.

6-17
 Remote Programming

STORE AND RECALL FILE COMMANDS

When using file commands, the status byte should be queried after the command is sent to check if the com-
mand generated an error. Common sources of errors are file not on disk, no space on disk, and no disk in
drive. For example, the command line SDAT;ERRS? <lf> will save the data to disk and return the Error Status
Byte when finished. The Disk Error bit may be checked to make sure that the Save Trace command terminat-
ed without error.

FNAM (?) {s} The FNAM command sets or queries the active file name. All file opera-
tions use the name specified by the FNAM command. Be sure to use
the FNAM s command before any file operation commands. For
example, "FNAM MYDATA.DAT" will set the active file name to
MYDATA.DAT. DOS file name conventions must be followed, i.e. file
names are 8 characters or less with an optional extension of up to 3
characters. Subdirectories are not supported. All file access is to the root
directory.

SDAT The SDAT command saves the active display's data trace, trace defini-
tion and the instrument state to the file specified by the FNAM command.
See the Disk menu section for more details. This command is the same
as the Data Save softkey.

SASC The SASC command saves the active display's data trace in ascii format
to the file specified by the FNAM command. See the Disk menu section
for more details. This command is the same as the Ascii Save softkey.

SSET The SSET command saves the instrument setup to the file specified by
the FNAM command. See the Disk menu section for more details. This
command is the same as the Setting Save softkey.

RDAT The RDAT command recalls the trace data, trace definition and instru-
ment state from the file specified by the FNAM command. The data is
stored in the active display's trace. See the Disk menu section for more
details. This command is the same as the Data Recall softkey.

RSET The RSET command recalls the instrument setup from the file specified
by the FNAM command. See the Disk menu section for more details.
This command is the same as the Setting Recall softkey.

6-18
 Remote Programming

SETUP COMMANDS

OUTX (?) {i} The OUTX command sets the output interface to RS232 (i=0) or GPIB
(i=1). The OUTX i command should be sent before any query com-
mands to direct the responses to the interface in use.

OVRM (?) {i} The OVRM command sets or queries the GPIB Overide Remote Yes/No
condition. The parameter i selects No (i=0) or Yes (i=1).

KCLK (?) {i} The KCLK command sets or queries the key click On (i=1) or Off (i=0)
state.

ALRM (?) {i} The ALRM command sets or queries the alarm On (i=1) or Off (i=0)
state.

THRS (?) {i} The THRS command sets or queries the hours setting of the clock. The
value of i is in the range 0 ≤ i ≤23.

TMIN (?) {i} The TMIN command sets or queries the minutes setting of the clock. The
value of i is in the range 0 ≤ i ≤59.

TSEC (?) {i} The TSEC command sets or queries the seconds setting of the clock.
The value of i is in the range 0 ≤ i ≤59.

DMTH (?) {i} The DMTH command sets or queries the months setting of the calendar.
The value of i is in the range 1 ≤ i ≤12.

DDAY (?) {i} The DDAY command sets or queries the days setting of the calendar.
The value of i is in the range 1 ≤ i ≤31.

DYRS (?) {i} The DYRS command sets or queries the years setting of the calendar.
The value of i is in the range 0 ≤ i ≤99.

PLTM (?) {i} The PLTM command sets or queries the plotter mode. If i=0 plotting is
directed to the RS232 interface, if i=1 plotting is to the GPIB interface.

PLTB (?) {i} The PLTB command sets or queries the RS232 plotter baud rate. The
parameter i ranges from 0 to 4 and selects baud rates of 300 (0),1200
(1), 2400 (2), 4800 (3), and 9600 (4). This baud rate should match the
baud rate of the plotter in use.

PLTA (?) {i} The PLTA command sets or queries the GPIB plotter address. The
parameter i ranges from 0 to 30 and should agree with the address of the
plotter in use.

PLTS (?) {i} The PLTS command sets or queries the plot speed. If i=0 fast plot speed
is used, if i=1 slow plot speed is used.

PNTR (?) {i} The PNTR command sets or queries the trace pen number. The pen
number is in the range of 1 to 6.

6-19
 Remote Programming

PNGD (?) {i} The PNGD command sets or queries the grid pen number. The pen
number is in the range of 1 to 6.

PNAL (?) {i} The PNAL command sets or queries the alphanumeric pen number. The
pen number is in the range of 1 to 6.

PNCR (?) {i} The PNCR command sets or queries the cursor pen number. The pen
number is in the range of 1 to 6.

PRNT (?) {i} The PRNT command sets or queries the printer type. The printer type
may be EPSON (i=0), HP (i=1) or File (i=2).

6-20
 Remote Programming

PRINT and PLOT COMMANDS

PRSC The PRSC command will print the screen display to a printer attached to
the rear panel parallel printer port. This function is the same as the
[PRINT] key. The printer type needs to be selected before using the
PRSC command.

PALL The PALL command generates a plot of the data displays. Each feature
uses the pen assigned in the Setup Plotter menu.

PTRC The PTRC command plots only the data trace(s).

PCUR The PCUR command plots only the cursor(s) if they are on.

6-21
 Remote Programming

FRONT PANEL CONTROLS and AUTO FUNCTIONS

STRT The STRT command starts or resumes a scan (and sweep). This func-
tion is the same as pressing the [START/CONT] key. STRT is ignored if
a scan is already in progress.

PAUS The PAUS command pauses a scan. All sweeps in progress also pause.
If a scan is already paused, stopped or done, then this command is
ignored (the scan is not reset).

REST The REST command resets a scan. The REST command can be sent at
any time - any scan in progress, paused or not, will be reset. This com-
mand will erase the data buffer. All swept parameters are reset to their
start values.

ATRC (?) {i} The ATRC command selects the active display. The parameter i selects
Top (i=0) or Bottom (i=1). If the display is full screen, then it is always the
active display.

ASCL The ASCL command auto scales the active display. This command is
just like pressing the [AUTO SCALE] key. Only Bar and Chart displays
are affected.

AGAN The AGAN command performs the Auto Gain function. This command is
the same as pressing the [AUTO GAIN] key. Auto Gain may take some
time if the time constant is long. Check the command execution in
progress bit in the Serial Poll Status Byte (bit 1) to determine when the
function is finished.

ARSV The ARSV command performs the Auto Reserve function. This com-
mand is the same as pressing the [AUTO RESERVE] key. Auto Reserve
may take some time. Check the command execution in progress bit in
the Serial Poll Status Byte (bit 1) to determine when the function is
finished.

APHS The APHS command performs the Auto Phase function. This command
is the same as pressing the [AUTO PHASE] key. The outputs will take
many time constants to reach their new values. Do not send the APHS
command again without waiting the appropriate amount of time.

AOFF i The AOFF i command automatically offsets X (i=1), Y (i=2) or R (i=3) to

zero. The parameter i is required. This command is equivalent to press-
ing the Auto softkey in the Offset & Expand menu box.

CMAX The CMAX command is just like pressing the [CURSOR MAX/MIN] key.
The cursor will move to the max or min of the data (as set by the CSEK
command) on the active chart display . Only effective if the active display
is a chart display.

6-22
 Remote Programming

DATA TRANSFER COMMANDS

OUTP ? i The OUTP? i command reads the value of X, Y, R or . The parameter

i selects X (i=1), Y (i=2), R (i=3) or θ (i=4). Values are returned as ASCII
floating point numbers with units of Volts or degrees. For example, the
response might be "-1.01026". This command is a query only command.

OUTR ? i The OUTR? i command reads the value of trace 1, 2, 3 or 4. The

parameter i selects the trace (i=1, 2, 3 or 4). Values are returned as
ASCII floating point numbers with units of the trace (as displayed on the
bar graph). For example, the response might be "-1.01026". This com-
mand is a query only command.

OAUX? i The OAUX? command reads the Aux Input values. The parameter i
selects an Aux Input (1, 2, 3 or 4) and is required. The Aux Input voltages
are returned as ASCII strings with units of Volts. The resolution is
1/3 mV. This command is a query only command.

SNAP ? i,j {,k,l,m,n} The SNAP? command records the values of either 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 param-
eters at a single instant. For example, SNAP? is a way to query values of
X and Y (or R and θ) which are taken at the same time. This is important
when the time constant is very short. Using the OUTP? or OUTR? com-
mands will result in time delays, which may be greater than the time con-
stant, between reading X and Y (or R and θ).

The SNAP? command requires at least two parameters and at most six
parameters. The parameters i, j, k, l, m, n select the parameters below.

i,j,k,l,m,n parameter
1 X
2 Y
3 R
4 θ
5 Aux In 1
6 Aux In 2
7 Aux In 3
8 Aux In 4
9 Reference Frequency
10 Trace 1
11 Trace 2
12 Trace 3
13 Trace 4

The requested values are returned in a single string with the values sep-
arated by commas and in the order in which they were requested. For
example, the SNAP?1,2,9,5 will return the values of X, Y, Freq and
Aux In 1. These values will be returned in a single string such as
"0.951359,0.0253297,1000.00,1.234".
The first value is X, the second is Y, the third is f, and the fourth is
Aux In 1.

The values of X and Y are recorded at a single instant. The values of R

6-23
 Remote Programming

and θ are also recorded at a single instant. Thus reading X,Y OR R,θ
yields a coherent snapshot of the output signal. If X,Y,R and θ are all
read, then the values of X,Y are recorded approximately 10µs apart from
R,θ. Thus, the values of X and Y may not yield the exact values of R and
θ from a single SNAP? query.

The values of the Aux Inputs may have an uncertainty of up to 32µs. The
frequency is computed only every other period or 40 ms, whichever is
longer.

The SNAP? command is a query only command. The SNAP? command

is used to record various parameters simultaneously, not to transfer data
quickly.

SPTS ? i The SPTS? command queries the number of points stored in Trace i.
The parameter i selects a trace (1, 2, 3 or 4) and is required. If Trace i is
not stored, then 0 is returned. If the scan is reset, then 0 is returned.
Remember, SPTS? returns N where N is the number of points - the
points are numbered from 0 (oldest) to N-1 (most recent). The SPTS?i
command can be sent at any time, even during a scan. This command is
a query only command.

TRCA ? i, j, k The TRCA? command queries the points stored in Trace i. The values
are returned as ASCII floating point numbers with the units of the trace.
Multiple points are separated by commas and the final point is followed
by a terminator. For example, the response with two points might be
"-1.234567e-009,+7.654321e-009,".

The parameter i selects a trace (1, 2, 3 or 4) and is required. If Trace i is

not stored, then an error occurs. Points are read from the buffer starting
at bin j (j≥0). A total of k bins are read (k≥1). To read a single point, set
k=1. Both j and k are required. If j+k exceeds the number of stored points
(as returned by the SPTS? query), then an error occurs. Remember,
SPTS? returns N where N is the total number of bins - the TRCA? com-
mand numbers the bins from 0 (oldest) to N-1 (most recent).

TRCB ? i, j, k The TRCB? command queries the points stored in Trace i. The values
are returned as IEEE format binary floating point numbers (with the units
of the trace). There are 4 bytes per point. Multiple points are not separat-
ed by any delimiter. The bytes can be read directly into a floating point
array (in most languages).

Do not query the IFC (no command in progress) status bit after sending
the TRCB command. This bit will not be set until the transfer is complete.

When using the GPIB interface, EOI is sent with the final byte. The points
must be read using a binary transfer (see your GPIB interface card soft-
ware manual). Make sure that the software is configured to NOT termi-
nate reading upon receipt of a CR or LF.

When using the RS232 interface, the word length must be 8 bits. The
points must be read as binary bytes (no checking for linefeeds, carriage
returns or other control characters). Most serial interface drivers are
designed for ASCII text only and will not work here. In addition, the data

6-24
 Remote Programming

transfer does not pause between bytes. The receiving interface must
always be ready to receive the next byte. In general, using binary trans-
fers on the RS232 interface is not recommended.

The parameter i selects a trace (1, 2, 3 or 4) and is required. If Trace i is

not stored, then an error occurs. Points are read from the buffer starting
at bin j (j≥0). A total of k bins are read (k≥1) for a total transfer of k*4
bytes. To read a single point, set k=1. Both j and k are required. If j+k
exceeds the number of stored points (as returned by the SPTS? query),
then an error occurs. Remember, SPTS? returns N where N is the total
number of bins - the TRCB? command numbers the bins from 0 (oldest)
to N-1 (most recent).

TRCL ? i, j, k The TRCL? command queries the points stored in Trace i. The values
are returned in a non-normalized floating point format (with the units of
the trace). There are 4 bytes per point. Multiple points are not separated
by any delimiter. The bytes CANNOT be read directly into a floating point
array.

Each point consists of four bytes. Byte 0 is the LSB and Byte 3 is the
MSB. The format is illustrated below.

16 bits 16 bits
0 exp mantissa
byte3 byte2 byte1 byte0

The mantissa is a signed 16 bit integer (-32768 to 32767). The exponent

is a signed integer whose value ranges from 0 to 248 (thus byte 3 is
always zero). The value of a data point is simply,

value = m x 2 (exp-124)

where m is the mantissa and exp is the exponent.

The trace data within the SR850 is stored in this format. Data transfers
using this format are faster than IEEE floating point format. If data trans-
fer speed is important, the TRCL? command should be used.

Do not query the IFC (no command in progress) status bit after sending
the TRCL command. This bit will not be set until the transfer is complete.

When using the GPIB interface, EOI is sent with the final byte. The points
must be read using a binary transfer (see your GPIB interface card soft-
ware manual). Make sure that the software is configured to NOT termi-
nate reading upon receipt of a CR or LF.

When using the RS232 interface, the word length must be 8 bits. The
points must be read as binary bytes (no checking for linefeeds, carriage
returns or other control characters). Most serial interface drivers are
designed for ASCII text only and will not work here. In addition, the data
transfer does not pause between bytes. The receiving interface must
always be ready to receive the next byte. In general, using binary trans-
fers on the RS232 interface is not recommended.
6-25
 Remote Programming

The parameter i selects a trace (1, 2, 3 or 4) and is required. If Trace i is

not stored, then an error occurs. Points are read from the buffer starting
at bin j (j≥0). A total of k bins are read (k≥1) for a total transfer of k*4
bytes. To read a single point, set k=1. Both j and k are required. If j+k
exceeds the number of stored points (as returned by the SPTS? query),
then an error occurs. Remember, SPTS? returns N where N is the total
number of bins - the TRCB? command numbers the bins from 0 (oldest)
to N-1 (most recent).

FAST (?) {i} The FAST command sets the fast data transfer mode on and off. The
parameter i selects:

i=0: Off
i=1: On (DOS programs or other dedicated data collection computers)
i=2: On (Windows Operating System Programs)

When the fast transfer mode is on, whenever data is sampled (during a
scan), the values of X and Y are automatically transmitted over the GPIB
interface (this mode is not available over RS232). The sample rate sets
the frequency of the data transfers. It is important that the receiving inter-
face be able to keep up with the transfers.

To use the FAST2 mode, a ROM version of 1.08 or higher is required in

the SR850. The FAST2 version uses the lock-in transmit queue to buffer
the GPIB data being sent to the host. Since the transmit queue can
buffer a maximum of 63 X and Y data pairs, the host can only be diverted
for short periods of time (e.g. 120mS at 512Hz sample rate) without
causing the lock-in to "time out" and abort the FAST mode data transfer.

The values of X and Y are transferred as signed integers, 2 bytes long

(16 bits). X is sent first followed by Y for a total of 4 bytes per sample.
The values range from -32768 to 32767. The value ±30000 represents
±full scale (i.e. the sensitivity).

Offsets and expands are included in the values of X and Y. The trans-
ferred values are (raw data - offset) x expand. The resulting value must
still be a 16 bit integer. The value ±30000 now represents ±full scale
divided by the expand factor.

At fast sample rates, it is important that the receiving interface be able to

keep up. If the SR850 finds that the interface is not ready to receive a
point, then the fast transfer mode is turned off.

The fast transfer mode may be turned off with the FAST0 command.

The transfer mode should be turned on (using FAST1 or FAST 2) before

a scan is started. Then use the STRD command (see below) to start a
scan. After sending the STRD command, immediately make the SR850 a

6-26
 Remote Programming

talker and the controlling interface a listener. Remember, the first transfer
will occur with the very first point in the scan. If the scan is started from
the front panel or from the trigger input, then make sure that the SR850
is a talker and the controlling interface a listener BEFORE the scan actu-
ally starts.

STRD After using FAST1 or FAST 2 to turn on fast data transfer, use the STRD
command to start the scan. STRD starts a scan after a delay of 0.5 sec.
This delay allows the controlling interface to place itself in the read mode
before the first data points are transmitted. Do not use the STRT com-
mand to start the scan. See the programming examples at the end of
this section.

6-27
 Remote Programming

INTERFACE COMMANDS

❊RST The ❊RST command resets the SR850 to its default configurations. The
communications setup is not changed. All other modes and settings are
set to their default conditions and values. This command takes some
time to complete.

❊IDN? The ❊IDN? query returns the SR850's device identification string. This
string is in the format "Stanford_Research_Systems,SR850,s/
n00111,ver1.000". In this example, the serial number is 00111 and the
firmware version is 1.000.

LOCL (?) {i} The LOCL command sets the local/remote function. If i=0 the SR850 is
LOCAL, if i=1 the SR850 will go REMOTE, and if i=2 the SR850 will go
into LOCAL LOCKOUT state. The states duplicate the GPIB local/remote
states. In the LOCAL state both command execution and keyboard input
are allowed. In the REMOTE state command execution is allowed but the
keyboard and knob are locked out except for the [HELP] key which
returns the SR850 to the LOCAL state. In the LOCAL LOCKOUT state all
front panel operation is locked out, including the [HELP] key.

The LOC/REM indicator is in the status bar at the bottom of the screen.

OVRM (?) {i} The OVRM command sets or queries the GPIB Overide Remote Yes/No
condition. The parameter i selects No (i=0) or Yes (i=1). When Overide
Remote is set to Yes, then the front panel is not locked out when the unit
is in the REMOTE state. The REM indicator will still be on and the
[HELP] key will still return the unit to the Local state.

TRIG The TRIG command is the software trigger command. This command
has the same effect as a trigger at the rear panel trigger input.

6-28
 Remote Programming

STATUS REPORTING COMMANDS

The Status Byte definitions follow this section.

❊CLS The ❊CLS command clears all status registers. The status enable regis-
ters are NOT cleared.

❊ESE (?) {i} {,j} The ❊ESE i command sets the standard event enable register to the
decimal value i (0-255). The ❊ESE i,j command sets bit i (0-7) to j (0 or
1). The ❊ESE? command queries the value (0-255) of the status byte
enable register. The ❊ESE? i command queries the value (0 or 1) of bit i.

❊ESR? {i} The ❊ESR? command queries the value of the standard event status
byte. The value is returned as a decimal number from 0 to 255. The
❊ESR? i command queries the value (0 or 1) of bit i (0-7). Reading the
entire byte will clear it while reading bit i will clear just bit i.

❊SRE (?) {i} {,j} The ❊SRE i command sets the serial poll enable register to the deci-
mal value i (0-255). The ❊SRE i,j command sets bit i (0-7) to j (0 or
1).The ❊SRE? command queries the value (0-255) of the serial poll
enable register. The ❊SRE? i command queries the value (0 or 1) of bit i.

❊STB? {i} The ❊STB? command queries the value of the serial poll status byte.
The value is returned as a decimal number from 0 to 255. The ❊STB? i
command queries the value (0 or 1) of bit i (0-7). Reading this byte has
no effect on its value.

❊PSC (?) {i} The ❊PSC command sets the value of the power-on status clear bit. If
i=1 the power-on status clear bit is set and all status registers and enable
registers are cleared on power up. If i=0 the bit is cleared and the status
enable registers maintain their values at power down. This allows a ser-
vice request to be generated at power up.

ERRE (?) {i} {,j} The ERRE i command sets the error status enable register to the deci-
mal value i (0-255). The ERRE i,j command sets bit i (0-7) to j (0 or 1).
The ERRE? command queries the value (0-255) of the error status
enable register. The ERRE? i command queries the value (0 or 1) of bit i.

ERRS? {i} The ERRS? command queries the value of the error status byte. The
value is returned as a decimal number from 0 to 255. The ERRS? i com-
mand queries the value (0 or 1) of bit i (0-7). Reading the entire byte will
clear it while reading bit i will clear just bit i.

LIAE (?) {i} {,j} The LIAE command sets the lock-in (LIA) status enable register to the
decimal value i (0-255). The LIAE i,j command sets bit i (0-7) to j (0 or 1).
The LIAE? command queries the value of the LIA status enable register.
The LIAE? i command queries the value (0 or 1) of bit i.

LIAS? {i} The LIAS? command queries the value of the lock-in (LIA) status byte.
The value is returned as a decimal number from 0 to 255. The LIAS? i
command queries the value (0 or 1) of bit i (0-7). Reading the entire byte
will clear it while reading bit i will clear just bit i.

6-29
 Remote Programming

STATUS BYTE DEFINITIONS

The SR850 reports on its status by means of four status bytes: the Serial Poll Status byte, the Standard Event
Status byte, the LIA Status byte, and the Error Status byte.

The status bits are set to 1 when the event or state described in the tables below has occurred or is present.

SERIAL POLL bit name usage

STATUS BYTE
0 SCN No scan in progress (Stop or Done). A Paused
scan is considered to be in progress.

1 IFC No command execution in progress.

2 ERR An enabled bit in the error status byte has been

set.

3 LIA An enabled bit in the LIA status byte has been

set.

4 MAV The interface output buffer is non-empty.

5 ESB An enabled bit in the standard status byte has

been set.

6 SRQ SRQ (service request) has occurred.

7 Unused

The ERR, LIA, and ESB bits are set whenever any bit in both their respective status bytes AND enable regis-
ters is set. Use the ✳SRE, ✳ESE, ERRE and LIAE commands to set enable register bits. The ERR, LIA and
ESB bits are not cleared until ALL enabled status bits in the Error, LIA and Standard Event status bytes are
cleared (by reading the status bytes or using ✳CLS).

Using ✳STB? to read the Serial Poll Status Byte

A bit in the Serial Poll status byte is NOT cleared by reading the status byte using ✳STB?. The bit stays set
as long as the status condition exists. This is true even for SRQ. SRQ will be set whenever the same bit in the
serial poll status byte AND enable register is set. This is independent of whether a serial poll has occurred to
clear the service request.

Using SERIAL POLL

Except for SRQ, a bit in the Serial Poll status byte is NOT cleared by polling the status byte. When reading
the status byte using a serial poll, the SRQ bit signals that the SR850 is requesting service. The SRQ bit will
be set (1) the first time the SR850 is polled following a service request. The serial poll automatically clears the
service request. Subsequent serial polls will return SRQ cleared (0) until another service request occurs.
Polling the status byte and reading it with ✳STB? can return different values for SRQ. When polled, SRQ indi-
cates a service request has occurred. When read, SRQ indicates that an enabled status bit is set.

6-30
 Remote Programming

SERVICE REQUESTS (SRQ)

A GPIB service request (SRQ) will be generated whenever a bit in both the Serial Poll Status byte AND Serial
Poll Enable register is set. Use ✳SRE to set bits in the Serial Poll Enable register. A service request is only
generated when an enabled Serial Poll Status bit becomes set (changes from 0 to 1). An enabled status bit
which becomes set and remains set will generate a single SRQ. If another service request from the same
status bit is desired, the requesting status bit must first be cleared. In the case of the ERR, LIA and ESB bits,
this means clearing the enabled bits in the ERR, LIA and ESB status bytes (by reading them). Multiple ena-
bled bits in these status bytes will generate a single SRQ. Another SRQ (from ERR, LIA or ESB) can only be
generated after clearing the ERR, LIA or ESB bits in the Serial Poll status byte. To clear these bits, ALL ena-
bled bits in the ERR, LIA or ESB status bytes must be cleared.

The controller should respond to the SRQ by performing a serial poll to read the Serial Poll status byte to
determine the requesting status bit. Bit 6 (SRQ) will be reset by the serial poll.

For example, to generate a service request when a RESRV overload occurs, bit 0 in the LIA Status Enable
register needs to be set (LIAE 0,1 command) and bit 3 in the Serial Poll Enable register must be set (✳SRE
3,1 command). When a reserve overload occurs, bit 0 in the LIA Status byte is set. Since bit 0 in the LIA
Status byte AND Enable register is set, this ALSO sets bit 3 (LIA) in the Serial Poll Status byte. SInce bit 3 in
the Serial Poll Status byte AND Enable register is set, an SRQ is generated. Bit 6 (SRQ) in the Serial Poll
Status byte is set. Further RESRV overloads will not generate another SRQ until the RESRV overload status
bit is cleared. The RESRV status bit is cleared by reading the LIA Status byte (with LIAS?). Presumably, the
controller is alerted to the overload via the SRQ, performs a serial poll to clear the SRQ, does something to
try to remedy the situation (change gain, experimental parameters, etc.) and then clears the RESRV status bit
by reading the LIA status register. A subsequent RESRV overload will then generate another SRQ.

STANDARD EVENT bit name usage

STATUS BYTE
0 INP Set on input queue overflow (too many com-
mands received at once, queues cleared).

1 Unused

2 QRY Set on output queue overflow (too many

responses waiting to be transmitted, queues
cleared).

3 Unused

4 EXE Set when a command can not execute correctly

or a parameter is out of range.

5 CMD Set when an illegal command is received.

6 URQ Set by any key press or knob rotation.

7 PON Set by power-on.

The bits in this register remain set until cleared by reading them or by the ❊CLS command.

6-31
 Remote Programming

LIA STATUS BYTE bit name usage

0 INPUT/RESRV Set when an INPUT or RESRV overload is

detected.

1 FILTR Set when a FILTR overload is detected.

2 OUTPT Set when an OUTPT overload is detected.

3 UNLK Set when a reference unlock is detected.

4 RANGE Set when the detection frequency switches

ranges (harmonic x ref. frequency decreases
below 199.21 Hz or increases above
203.12 Hz). Time constants above 30 s and
Synchronous filtering are turned off in the upper
frequency range.

5 TC Set when the time constant is changed indirect-

ly, either by changing frequency range, dynamic
reserve or filter slope.

6 TRIG Set when unit is triggered. Only if samples or

scans are triggered.

7 PLOT Set when a plot is completed.

The LIA Status bits stay set until cleared by reading or by the ❊CLS command.

ERROR STATUS BYTE bit name usage

0 Prn/Plt Error Set when an error occurs during printing or

plotting.

1 Backup Error Set at power up when the battery backup has

failed.

2 RAM Error Set when the RAM Memory test finds an error.

3 Disk Error Set when an error occurs during a disk or file

operation.

4 ROM Error Set when the ROM Memory test finds an error.

5 GPIB Error Set when GPIB fast data transfer mode aborted.

6 DSP Error Set when the DSP test finds an error.

7 Math Error Set when an internal math error occurs.

The Error Status bits stay set until cleared by reading or by the ❊CLS command.

6-32
 Remote Programming

EXAMPLE PROGRAM 1

Using Microsoft C (v5.1) with the National Instruments GPIB card

on the IBM PC.
To successfully interface the SR850 to a PC via the GPIB interface, the instrument, interface card, and inter-
face drivers must all be configured properly. To configure the SR850, the GPIB address must be set in the
SYSTEM SETUP menu. The default GPIB address is 8; use this address unless a conflict occurs with other
instruments in your system. The SR850 will be set to GPIB address 8 whenever a reset is performed (power
on with the [<-] key down).

Make sure that you follow all the instructions for installing the GPIB card. The National Instruments card
cannot be simply unpacked and put into your computer. To configure the card you must set jumpers and
switches on the card to set the I/O address and interrupt levels. You must run the program "IBCONF" to con-
figure the resident GPIB driver for you GPIB card. Please refer to the National Instruments manual for infor-
mation. In this example, the following options must be set with IBCONF:

Device name: LIA

Device address: 8
Terminate Read on EOS: No (for binary transfers)

Once all the hardware and GPIB drivers are configured, use "IBIC". This terminal emulation program allows
you to send commands to the SR850 directly from your computer's keyboard. If you cannot talk to the SR850
via "IBIC", then your programs will not run. Use the simple commands provided by National Instruments. Use
"IBWRT" and "IBRD" to write and read from the SR850. After you are familiar with these simple commands,
you can explore more complex programming commands.

/*******************************************************************************************************/
/* Example program using Microsoft C V5.1 and the National Instruments GPIB card.

Connect the Sine Out to the A Input with a BNC cable.

Run this program by typing the program name followed by a space and the device name.
The device name is the name used in IBCONF to configure the National Instruments driver.
For example, if the program is called LIATEST and the above configuration is used,
then type LIATEST LIA.

The program will configure the SR850 to sweep the internal oscillator from 10 to 100 Hz in 100 sec-
onds. The line notch (50/60 Hz) filter will be engaged. As the frequency is swept, the response of the
notch filter is graphed.

Binary X and Y data will be transferred to the PC during the sweep using the FAST transfer command.
After the sweep is complete, the existing magnitude (R) data in the data buffer will be transferred in
IEEE floating point format as well as the LIA non-normalized floating point format (faster transfer) */

#include <stdio.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <string.h>
#include <math.h>
#include "decl.h"

#define SR850 argv[1]

6-33
 Remote Programming

/* function prototypes */

void main(int, char *[]);

void txLia(char *);
void initGpib(char *);
void setupLiaForSweep(void);
void printOutBinaryResults();
void printOutIEEEResults();
void printOutLIAResults();

/* National Instruments Interface Function Prototypes (488.1 Calls - see the National software manual).*/

int ibfind(char*);
void ibwrt(int,char *,int);
void ibrd(int,char *,unsigned long);
void ibrsp(int,char *);
void ibeos(int,int);
void ibtmo(int,int);

/* global variables */

int lia; /* SR850 handle */

int rxBuf[6600*2]; /* FAST mode data buffer */
float rfBuf[6600]; /* Floating point data buffer */

void main(int argc, char *argv[])

{
int i,x,y,nPts;
int *ptr;
char tstr[20];

if (argc<2) {
printf("\nUsage: liatest <devName>\n");
exit(1);
}
else
initGpib(SR850);

txLia("OUTX1"); /* Set the SR850 to output responses to the GPIB port */

setupLiaForSweep(); /* Setup the SR850 sweep */

printf("\nAcquiring Data\n");
ibtmo(lia,0); /* turn off timeout for lia or set the timeout longer than the scan. The timeout
measures the time to transfer the full number of bytes, not the time since the
most recent byte is received.*/

txLia("FAST2;STRD"); /* Turn FAST mode data transfer ON, then start scan using the STRD start
after delay command. The STRD command MUST be used if the scan is to be
started by this program! Do NOT use STRT. */

ibrd(lia,(char *)rxBuf,6401L*4L); /* get FAST mode data.

The 100 sec sweep at 64 Hz has 64*100 + 1 points, each point
consists of X (2 bytes) and Y (2 bytes) for a total of 4 bytes. */

6-34
 Remote Programming

printOutBinaryResults(); /* format and print the results */

printf("\n%d bytes received.\nPress <Enter> to continue.",ibcnt);

getch(); printf("\n");

printf("Reading Results in IEEE Binary Format\n");

txLia("SPTS?3"); /* how many points in trace 3 (R) ?*/
ibrd(lia,tstr,20L); /* get the answer */
sscanf(tstr,"%d",&nPts); /* convert from a string to an int */

sprintf(tstr,"TRCB?3,0,%d",nPts); /* use TRCB to read the points in IEEE floating point format */
ibwrt(lia,tstr,strlen(tstr)); /* note that we cannot use txLia here because the IFC RDY bit will
not be set until the transfer is complete! */
ibrd(lia,(char *)rfBuf,(long)nPts*4L); /* read directly into a FLOAT array, 4 bytes per point */

printf ("\nReceived %d bytes in IEEE binary format\n",ibcnt);

printOutIEEEResults(); /* format and print results */
printf ("Press <Enter> to continue");
getch(); printf("\n");

printf("Reading Reults in LIA Binary Format\n");

sprintf(tstr,"TRCL?3,0,%d",nPts); /* use TRCL to read the points in LIA floating point format */
ibwrt(lia,tstr,strlen(tstr)); /* note that we cannot use txLia here because the IFC RDY bit will
not be set until the transfer is complete! */
ibrd(lia,(char *)rfBuf,(long)nPts*4L); /* read into FLOAT array but the values are NOT floats! */

printf ("\nReceived %d bytes in LIA binary format\n",ibcnt);

printOutLIAResults(); /* format and print results */
printf ("End of Program");
}

void printOutBinaryResults(void)
{
/* calculates the first 10 values of R based on the X and Y values takes in FAST mode by the SR850 */

int i;
float x,y,r;
int *ptr;

printf("\n\n");
ptr = rxBuf; /* ptr points to the first X,Y pair of values. X and Y are each integers. */
for (i=0;i<10;i++) {
x = (float) (*ptr++) /(float) 30.000; /* 30000 is full scale which is 1 V in this case */
y = (float) (*ptr++) /(float) 30.000; /* for other scales, multiply by the full scale voltage */
r = (float) sqrt(x*x + y*y); /* compute R from X and Y */
printf("%d %e\n",i,r);
}
}

void printOutIEEEResults(void)
{
/* prints the first 10 values of R transferred in IEEE floating point format by the SR850 */

int i;

6-35
 Remote Programming

printf("\n\n");
for (i=0;i<10;i++)
printf("%d %e\n",i,rfBuf[i]); /* this is simple since the values are already floats */

void printOutLIAResults(void)
{
/* calculates the first 10 values of R transferred in LIA float format by the SR850 */

int i,mant,exp;
int *ptr;
float val;

printf("\n\n");
ptr =(int *) rfBuf; /* ptr points to integers in rfBuf, not floats! */

for (i=0;i<10;i++) {
mant = *ptr++; /* first comes the mantissa (16 bits) */
exp = *ptr++ - 124; /* then the binary exponent (16 bits) offset by 124 */
val = (float) mant * (float) pow(2.0,(double) exp);
printf("%d %e\n",i,val);
}
}

void initGpib(char *devName)

{
if ((lia=ibfind(devName))<0) {
printf("\nCannot Find SR850 \n\a");
exit(1);
}
}

void txLia(char *str)

{
char serPol;

ibwrt(lia,str,strlen(str));
do {
ibrsp(lia,&serPol); /* now poll for IFC RDY */
} while ((serPol&2)==0); /* until the command finishes executing */
}

void setupLiaForSweep(void)
{
txLia("*RST"); /* initialize the lock-in */

txLia("FMOD1;SLLM10.;SULM100."); /* set sweep mode and sweep limits */

txLia("ILIN1"); /* put in the line notch filter */
txLia("SRAT10;SEND0;SLEN100"); /* set 64 Hz sample rate, stop at end of scan, 100 second
scan length */
txLia("SMOD0"); /* set single screen */
txLia("DTYP0,3;DTRC0,3"); /* set chart display, 'R' display */

6-36
 Remote Programming

txLia("DSCL0,.5;DOFF0,.5"); /* set scale from 0 to 1 V */

txLia("DHZS0,11"); /* set 10s/div horizontal */

printf("Scan is Initialized, Press <Enter> to Begin Scan...");

getch();
}

6-37
Remote Programming

6-38
 Remote Programming

EXAMPLE PROGRAM 2

Using Microsoft QUICKBASIC (v4.5) with the National Instruments GPIB

card on the IBM PC.
To successfully interface the SR850 to a PC via the GPIB interface, the instrument, interface card, and inter-
face drivers must all be configured properly. To configure the SR850, the GPIB address must be set in the
SYSTEM SETUP menu. The default GPIB address is 8; use this address unless a conflict occurs with other
instruments in your system. The SR850 will be set to GPIB address 8 whenever a reset is performed (power
on with the [<-] key down).

Make sure that you follow all the instructions for installing the GPIB card. The National Instruments card
cannot be simply unpacked and put into your computer. To configure the card you must set jumpers and
switches on the card to set the I/O address and interrupt levels. You must run the program "IBCONF" to con-
figure the resident GPIB driver for you GPIB card. Please refer to the National Instruments manual for infor-
mation. In this example, the following options must be set with IBCONF:

Device name: LIA

Device address: 8
Terminate Read on EOS: No (For binary transfers)

Once all the hardware and GPIB drivers are configured, use "IBIC". This terminal emulation program allows
you to send commands to the SR850 directly from your computer's keyboard. If you cannot talk to the SR850
via "IBIC", then your programs will not run. Use the simple commands provided by National Instruments. Use
"IBWRT" and "IBRD" to write and read from the SR850. After you are familiar with these simple commands,
you can explore more complex programming commands.

Link with the National Basic Library (see the National software manual for more information on making
QuickBasic libraries.)

' ***********************************************************************************************************************
' QuickBASIC 4.0/4.5 SR850 Example Program
'
' The program assumes that a device has been initialized with the device name "LIA"
' The device name is the name used in IBCONF to configure the National Instruments driver.

' Connect the Sine Out to the A Input with a BNC cable.

' The program will configure the SR850 to sweep the internal oscillator from 10 to 100 Hz in 100 seconds.
' The line notch (50/60 Hz) filter will be engaged. As the frequency is swept, the response of the notch filter
' is graphed.

' Binary X and Y data will be transferred to the PC during the sweep using the FAST transfer command.
' After the sweep is complete, the existing magnitude (R) data in the data buffer will be transferred in ASCII
' format as well as the LIA non-normalized floating point format (faster transfer).
' IEEE floating point format can not be used in BASIC since BASIC does not use this format.

' use the National Instruments include file

REM $INCLUDE: 'qbdecl4.bas'

DECLARE SUB TXLIA (LIA%, SND$)

DECLARE SUB FINDERR ()

6-39
 Remote Programming

' Look for device named "LIA". Use IBCONF to configure the device "LIA" as above.
' Assign the device handle to variable LIA%.

BDNAME$ = "LIA"
CALL IBFIND(BDNAME$, LIA%)

' Check for error on IBFIND call.

IF LIA% < 0 THEN CALL FINDERR

' Reset the device.

WRT$ = "*RST"
CALL TXLIA(LIA%, WRT$)
CALL IBCLR(LIA%)

PRINT "The SR850 is reset. Now initialize the scan"

PRINT "Press <Enter> to continue."
INPUT a

' Set the SR850 to output responses to the GPIB port

WRT$="OUTX1"
CALL TXLIA(LIA%, WRT$)
' Set Internal sweep from 10 to 100 Hz
WRT$ = "FMOD1;SLLM10.;SULM100."
CALL TXLIA(LIA%, WRT$)
' Turn line notch filter on
WRT$ = "ILIN1"
CALL TXLIA(LIA%, WRT$)
' Set sample rate to 64 Hz, stop at end, 100 second scan length
WRT$ = "SRAT10;SEND0;SLEN100"
CALL TXLIA(LIA%, WRT$)
' Set single screen, chart, display R
WRT$ = "SMOD0;DTYP0,3;DTRC0,3"
CALL TXLIA(LIA%, WRT$)
' Set scale to 0 to 1 V, 10 sec per division
WRT$ = "DSCL0,.5;DOFF0,.5;DHZS0,11"
CALL TXLIA(LIA%, WRT$)

PRINT "The scan is ready. Now acquire data."

PRINT "Press <Enter> to continue."
INPUT a

DIM RXBUF%(13000)

' Turn off GPIB timeout or set the timeout longer than the scan. The timeout measures the time to transfer
the full number of bytes, not the time since the most recent byte is received.
CALL IBTMO(LIA%, 16)

' Turn FAST mode data transfer ON, then start scan using the STRD start after delay command.
' The STRD command must be used if the the scan is to be started by this program!
' Do NOT use STRT.

6-40
 Remote Programming

WRT$ = "FAST2;STRD"
CALL TXLIA(LIA%, WRT$)

' Get FAST mode data.

' The 100 sec sweep at 64 Hz has 64*100 + 1 points, each point consists of X (2 bytes) and Y (2 bytes)
' for a total of 4 bytes per sample. 6401*4=25604 bytes.
CALL IBRDI(LIA%, RXBUF%(), 25604)

PRINT "Scan Finished."; IBCNT%; "Bytes Received"

' Now print out the first 10 values of R based on the X and Y values

FOR I% = 0 TO 9
' the buffer contains X,Y pairs so move by 2*I% to find the next point.
X = RXBUF%(2 * I%) / 30000!
Y = RXBUF%(2 * I% + 1) / 30000!
' 30000 is full scale (1V in this case). For other scales, multiply by the full scale voltage.
R = SQR((X * X) + (Y * Y))
PRINT "I ="; I%; "
R ="; R
NEXT I%

PRINT "Now dump the scan as ASCII values"

PRINT "Press <Enter> to continue"
INPUT a

DIM RFBUF(10)
FOR I% = 1 TO 10
RD$ = SPACE$(20)
' Read 1 value of R from buffer position I%-1
WRT$ = "TRCA?3," + STR$(I% - 1) + ",1"
CALL TXLIA(LIA%, WRT$)
CALL IBRD(LIA%, RD$)
' Convert to number and store
RFBUF(I%) = VAL(RD$)
PRINT "I ="; I%; "
R ="; RFBUF(I%)
NEXT I%

PRINT "Now dump the scan as LIA floating point values"

PRINT "Press <Enter> to continue"
INPUT a

' Read from buffer position 0 a total of 10 points

WRT$ = "TRCL?3,0,10"
' Do not use TXLIA here since the IFC RDY bit will not be cleared until the binary transfer is complete.
CALL IBWRT(LIA%, WRT$)
' Each point is a 4 byte value made up of 2 integers
CALL IBRDI(LIA%, RXBUF%(), 40)

FOR I% = 0 TO 9
' the first integer of each pair is the mantissa
MANTISSA% = RXBUF%(2 * I%)
' the second integer is the exponent offset by 124

6-41
 Remote Programming

EXPONENT% = RXBUF%(2 * I% + 1) - 124

' compute the floating point value
R = MANTISSA% * 2! ^ EXPONENT%
PRINT "I ="; I%; "
R ="; R
NEXT I%

END

SUB FINDERR STATIC

PRINT "IBFIND ERROR"
END SUB

SUB TXLIA (LIA%, SND$)

CALL IBWRT(LIA%, SND$)
' wait until the command is finished executing
DO
CALL IBRSP(LIA%, SPR%)
LOOP WHILE (SPR% AND 2) <> 2
END SUB

6-42
 PERFORMANCE TESTS

Introduction Knob
The performance tests described in this section The knob is used to adjust parameters which have
are designed to verify with a high degree of confi- been highlighted using the softkeys. Most numeric
dence that the unit is performing within the entry fields may be adjusted using the knob. In
specifications. addition, parameters such as sensitivity and time
constant use the knob as well. In these cases, the
The results of each test may be recorded on the knob function is selected by the softkeys. The
test sheet at the end of this section. [CURSOR] key, which can be pressed at any time,
will set the knob function to scrolling the cursor.
[HARDKEYS]
Preset
The keypad consists of five groups of hardkeys.
The ENTRY keys are used to enter numeric Throughout this section, it will be necessary to
parameters which have been highlighted by a soft- preset the lock-in into a known default state. To do
key. The MENU keys select a menu of softkeys. this, turn the power off. Turn the power back on
Pressing a menu key will change the menu boxes while holding down the [←] (backspace) key. The
which are displayed next to the softkeys. Each unit will perform power up tests and then assume
menu groups together similar parameters and the default settings. Each test generally starts with
functions. The CONTROL keys start and stop a preset. This procedure will be referred to as
actual data acquisition, select the cursor and {PRESET}.
toggle the active display. These keys are not in a
menu since they are used frequently and while dis- Serial Number
playing any menu. The SYSTEM keys print the
screen to a printer and display help messages. If you need to contact Stanford Research
Once again, these keys can be accessed from any Systems, please have the serial number of your
menu. The AUTO keys are perform various auto unit available. The serial number is printed on a
functions and can be accessed from any menu. label affixed to the rear panel. The serial number
is also displayed on the screen when the unit is
Hardkeys are referenced in braces like [HELP]. powered on.

<Softkeys> The serial number can also be displayed by

pressing
The SR850 has a menu driven user interface. The [SYSTEM SETUP]
6 softkeys to the right of the video display have dif- <Hardware Test >
ferent functions depending upon the information <More>
displayed in the menu boxes along the right edge <Screen Test>
of the screen. In general, the softkeys have two
uses. The first is to toggle a feature on and off or Firmware Revision
to choose between settings. The second is to high-
light a parameter which is then changed using the The firmware revision code is displayed on the
knob or numeric keypad. In both cases, the soft- screen when the unit is powered on. The revision
keys affect the parameters which are displayed code is also displayed with the serial number in
adjacent to them. the Screen Test described above.

Softkeys are referenced in brackets like

<Ref. Frequency>.

7-1
 Performance Tests

General Installation
POWER
Make sure that the power entry module on the rear
panel is set for the AC line voltage in your area
and that the correct fuse is installed. The selected
AC voltage may be seen through the window on
the power entry module. Verify that the line cord is
plugged all the way into the power entry module
and that the power button on the front panel is
pressed in.

SCREEN BRIGHTNESS
If the screen is too dark or too bright, adjust the
brightness using the knob at the upper left of the
screen. Do not set the brightness higher than
necessary.

DISPLAY POSITION
Use the Setup Screen function in the SYSTEM
SETUP menu to position the display in the center
of the screen.

FAN
The fan in the SR850 is required to cool the unit.
Do not block the vents in the chassis or the unit
may not operate properly.

7-2
 Performance Tests

Necessary Equipment Warm Up

The following equipment is necessary to complete The lock-in should be turned on and allowed to
the performance tests. The suggested equipment warm up for at least an hour before any tests are
or its equivalent should be used. performed. The self test does not require any
warm up period.
1. Frequency Synthesizer
Freq Range 1 Hz to 1 MHz It is necessary to turn the unit off and on to preset
Freq Accuracy better than 5 ppm it. As long as the unit is powered on immediately,
Amplitude Accuracy 0.2 dB from 1 Hz to this will not affect the test results.
100 kHz
Harmonic Distortion ≤ -65 dBc The Test Record
Spurious ≤ -55 dBc
TTL SYNC available Make a copy of the SR850 Performance Test
Record at the end of this section. Fill in the results
Recommended SRS DS345 of the tests on this record. This record will allow
you to determine whether the tests pass or fail and
2. AC Calibrator also to preserve a record of the tests.
Freq Range 10 Hz to 100 kHz
Amplitude 1 mV to 10 V If A Test Fails
Accuracy 0.1%
External phase locking capability If a test fails, you should check the settings and
connections of any external equipment and, if pos-
Recommended Fluke 5200A sible, verify its operation using a DVM, scope or
some other piece of test equipment.
3. DC Voltmeter
Range 19.999 V, 4 1/2 digits After checking the setup, repeat the test from the
Accuracy 0.005% beginning to make sure that the test was per-
formed correctly.
Recommended Fluke 8840A
If the test continues to fail, contact Stanford
4. Feedthrough Terminations Research Systems for further instructions. Make
Impedance 50 Ω sure that you have the unit's serial number and
firmware revision code handy. Have the test
record on hand as well.

7-3
Performance Tests

7-4
 Performance Tests

1. Self Tests
The self tests check the lock-in hardware. These are functional tests and do not relate to the specifications.
These tests should be run before any of the performance tests.

Note that the Hardware Test menu offers more tests than are required here. Only those tests which require no
additional equipment are discussed in this section. The computer interface and disk drive tests are not
required but should be periodically checked. See the System Setup menu for more information about those
tests.

Setup
No external setup is required for this test.

Procedure
1) {PRESET} (Turn on the lock-in with the [←] key pressed)
At power up, the RAM, ROM, CLK and DSP tests should all be OK.

2) Press the keys in the following sequence:

[SYSTEM SETUP]
<Hardware Test>
<Keypad Test>
Press all of the front panel keys until all of the boxes on the screen are filled in.
Then press any key to exit this screen.
<Knob Test>
<Speed 2>
Rotate the knob to verify rotation and direction.
<Return>
<More>
<Memory Test>
<Main Mem>
<Begin Test>
All of the main memory chips should Pass.
<Return>
<Video Mem>
<Begin Test>
All of the video memory chips should Pass.
<Return>
<Return>

3) This completes the functional hardware tests. Enter the results of this test in the test record at the end
of this section.

7-5
Performance Tests

7-6
 Performance Tests

2. DC Offset
This test measures the DC offset of the input.

Setup
Connect a 50Ω terminator to the A input. This shorts the input so the lock-in's own DC offset will be
measured.

Procedure
1) {PRESET} (Turn the lock-in off and on with the [←] key pressed)

2) Press the keys in the following sequence:

[REF/PHASE]
<Ref. Frequency>
[1] [ENTER]

[GAIN/TC]
<Sensitivity>
Use the knob to select 1 mV.

[DISPLAY/SCALE]
<Type and Trace>
Highlight the trace number.
Use the knob to select trace 3 (R) for the top display.

3) Wait at least 10 seconds, then record the reading of R.

4) Press

[INPUT]
<Coupling>
Select DC coupling.

5) Wait 10 secONDS, then record the reading of R.

6) This completes the DC offset test. Enter the results of this test in the test record at the end of this
section.

7-7
Performance Tests

7-8
 Performance Tests

3. Common Mode Rejection

This test measures the common mode rejection of the lock-in.

Setup
We will use the internal oscillator sine output to provide the signal.

Connect the Sine Out to both the A and B inputs of the lock-in. Use equal length cables from A and B to a
BNC TEE. Connect the cable from the Sine Out to the TEE. Do not use any termination.

Procedure
1) {PRESET} (Turn the lock-in off and on with the [←] key pressed)

2) Press the keys in the following sequence:

[REF/PHASE]
<Ref. Frequency>
[1] [0] [0] [ENTER]

[DISPLAY/SCALE]
<Type and Trace>
Highlight the trace number.
Use the knob to select trace 3 (R) for the top display.

[INPUT/FILTER]
<Coupling>
Select DC.

3) The value of R should be 1.000 V (within 2%).

4) Press
[INPUT/FILTER]
<Source>
Select A-B.

[GAIN/PHASE]
<Sensitivity>
Use the knob to select 200 µV.

5) Record the value of R.

6) This completes the CMRR measurement test. The common mode rejection is 20log(1.0/R) where R is
in Volts. Enter the results of this test in the test record at the end of this section.

7-9
Performance Tests

7-10
 Performance Tests

4. Amplitude Accuracy and Flatness

This test measures the amplitude accuracy and frequency response.

Setup
We will use the frequency synthesizer to provide an accurate frequency and the AC calibrator to provide a
sine wave with an exact amplitude.

Connect the output of the frequency synthesizer to the phase lock input of the calibrator. Connect the output
of the AC calibrator to the A input of the lock-in. Be sure to use the appropriate terminations where required.
Connect the TTL SYNC output of the synthesizer to the Reference Input of the lock-in.

Set the Synthesizer to: Set the AC Calibrator to:

Function Sine Frequency 1 kHz
Frequency 1 kHz Amplitude 1.000 Vrms
Amplitude 0.5 Vrms Voltage Off
Offset off or 0V Phase Lock On
Sweep off Sense Internal
Modulation none

Procedure
1) {PRESET} (Turn the lock-in off and on with the [←] key pressed)

2) Press the keys in the following sequence:

[REF/PHASE]
<Ref. Source>
Use the knob to select External.
<Ref. Slope>
Select Rising edge.

[DISPLAY/SCALE]
<Type and Trace>
Highlight the trace number.
Use the knob to select trace 3 (R) for the top display.

[GAIN/TC]
<Filter db/oct>
Select 24 dB/oct.

3) Amplitude accuracy is verified at 1 kHz and various sensitivities. For each sensitivity setting in the
table below, perform steps 3a through 3c.

Sensitivity AC Calibrator Amplitude

1V 1.0000 Vrms
200 mV 200.00 mVrms
100 mV 100.000 mVrms
20 mV 20.000 mVrms
10 mV 10.000 mVrms

7-11
 Performance Tests

a) Set the AC calibrator to the amplitude shown in the table.

b) Press
<Sensitivity>
Use the knob to select the sensitivity from the table.

c) Wait for the R reading to stabilize. Record the value of R for each sensitivity.

4) Frequency response is checked at frequencies above 1 kHz. The test frequencies are listed below.
Test Frequencies
24 kHz
48 kHz
72 kHz
96 kHz

a) Set the AC calibrator to 1 kHz and an amplitude of 200.00 mVrms.

b) Set the frequency synthesizer to 1 kHz.

c) Press
[GAIN/TC]
<Sensitivity>
Use the knob to select 200 mV.

d) Set the AC calibrator and frequency synthesizer to the frequency in the table.

e) Wait for the R reading to stabilize. Record the value of R.

f) Repeat steps 4d and 4e for all of the frequencies listed.

5) This completes the amplitude accuracy and frequency response test. Enter the results of this test in
the test record at the end of this section.

7-12
 Performance Tests

5. Amplitude Linearity
This test measures the amplitude linearity. This tests how accurately the lock-in measures a signal smaller
than full scale.

Setup
We will use the frequency synthesizer to provide an accurate frequency and the AC calibrator to provide a
sine wave with an exact amplitude.

Connect the output of the frequency synthesizer to the phase lock input of the calibrator. Connect the output
of the AC calibrator to the A input of the lock-in. Be sure to use the appropriate terminations where required.
Connect the TTL SYNC output of the synthesizer to the Reference Input of the lock-in.

Set the Synthesizer to: Set the AC Calibrator to:

Function Sine Frequency 1 kHz
Frequency 1 kHz Amplitude 1.0000 Vrms
Amplitude 0.5 Vrms Voltage Off
Offset off or 0V Phase Lock On
Sweep off Sense Internal
Modulation none

Procedure
1) {PRESET} (Turn the lock-in off and on with the [←] key pressed)

2) Press the keys in the following sequence:

[REF/PHASE]
<Ref. Source>
Use the knob to select External.
<Ref. Slope>
Select Rising edge.

[DISPLAY/SCALE]
<Type and Trace>
Highlight the trace number.
Use the knob to select trace 3 (R) for the top display.

[GAIN/TC]
<Filter db/oct>
Select 24 dB/oct.

[OUTPUT/OFFSET]
<X, Y or R>
Select R offset and expand.

7-13
 Performance Tests

3) For each of the amplitudes listed below, perform steps 3a through 3c.

AC Calibrator Amplitudes R Output Expand

1.0000 Vrms 1
100.00 mVrms 10
10.000 mVrms 100
4.000 mVrms 250

a) Set the AC calibrator to the amplitude in the table.

b) Press the keys in the following sequence:

<Expand>
Highlight the R expand.
Enter the R Output Expand from the table.

c) Wait for the R reading to stabilize. Record the value of R.

4) This completes the amplitude linearity test. Enter the results of this test in the test record at the end of
this section.

7-14
 Performance Tests

6. Frequency Accuracy
This test measures the frequency accuracy of the lock-in. This tests the accuracy of the frequency counter
inside the unit. The counter is used only in external reference mode. The internal oscillator frequency is set by
a crystal and has 25 ppm frequency accuracy.

Setup
We will use the frequency synthesizer to provide the reference signal.

Connect the TTL SYNC output of the frequency synthesizer to the Reference input of the lock-in.

Procedure
1) {PRESET} (Turn the lock-in off and on with the [←] key pressed)

2) Set the frequency synthesizer to a frequency of 10 kHz.

3) Press the keys in the following sequence:

[REF/PHASE]
<Ref. Source>
Use the knob to select External.
<Ref. Slope>
Select Rising edge.

4) The lock-in should be locked to the external reference. The frequency is displayed at the bottom of
the screen. Record the frequency reading.

5) This completes the frequency accuracy test. Enter the results of this test in the test record at the end
of this section.

7-15
Performance Tests

7-16
 Performance Tests

7. Phase Accuracy
This test measures the phase accuracy of the lock-in. Due to the design of the lock-in, the phase accuracy
can be determined by measuring the phase of the internal oscillator Sine Out.

Setup
Connect the Sine Out to the A input of the lock-in using a 1 meter BNC cable. Do not use any termination.

Procedure
1) {PRESET} (Turn the lock-in off and on with the [←] key pressed)

2) Press the keys in the following sequence:

[GAIN/TC]
<Filter db/oct>
Select 24 dB/oct.

[INPUT/FILTERS]
<Coupling>
Select DC coupling.

[DISPLAY/SCALE]
<Type and Trace>
Highlight the trace number.
Use the knob to select trace 3 (R) for the top display.
<Top and Bottom>
Select the Bottom display.
Use the knob to select trace 4 (θ) for the bottom display.

3) The value of R should be 1.000 V (±2%) and the value of θ should 0° (±1°).

4) Phase accuracy is checked at various frequencies. The test frequencies are listed below.

Test Frequencies
10 Hz
100 Hz
1 kHz
10 kHz

a) Press
[REF/PHASE]
<Ref. Frequency>
Enter the frequency from the table.

b) Wait for the readings to stabilize. Record the value of θ.

c) Repeat steps 4a and 4b for all frequencies in the table.

5) This completes the phase accuracy test. Enter the results of this test in the test record at the end of
this section.

7-17
Performance Tests

7-18
 Performance Tests

8. Sine Output Amplitude Accuracy and Flatness

This test measures the amplitude accuracy and frequency response of the internal oscillator Sine Out.

Setup
We will use the lock-in to measure the Sine Out. Connect the Sine Out to the A input of the lock-in.

Procedure
1) {PRESET} (Turn the lock-in off and on with the [←] key pressed)

2) Press the keys in the following sequence:

[DISPLAY/SCALE]
<Type and Trace>
Highlight the trace number.
Use the knob to select trace 3 (R) for the top display.

3) Amplitude accuracy is verified at 1 kHz using various sensitivities. For each sine amplitude and sensi-
tivity setting in the table below, perform steps 3a through 3b.

Sensitivity Sine Output Amplitude

1V 1.000 Vrms
200 mV 0.200 Vrms
50 mV 0.050 Vrms
10 mV 0.010 Vrms

a) Press
[REF/PHASE]
<Sine Output>
Enter the sine amplitude from the table.

[GAIN/TC]
<Sensitivity>
Use the knob to select the sensitivity from the table.

b) Wait for the R reading to stabilize. Record the value of R.

c) Repeat 3a and 3b for each amplitude in the table.

4) Frequency response is checked at frequencies above 1 kHz. The sine amplitude is set to 1 Vrms for
all frequencies. The test frequencies are listed below.

Test Frequencies
24 kHz
48 kHz
72 kHz
96 kHz

7-19
 Performance Tests

c) Press
[GAIN/TC]
<Sensitivity>
Use the knob to select 1 V.

[REF/PHASE]
<Sine Output>
[1] [ENTER]

d) Press
<Ref. Frequency>
Enter the frequency from the table.

e) Wait for the R reading to stabilize. Record the value of R.

f) Repeat steps 4d and 4e for all of the frequencies listed.

5) This completes the sine output amplitude accuracy and frequency response test. Enter the results of
this test in the test record at the end of this section.

7-20
 Performance Tests

9. DC Outputs and Inputs

This test measures the DC accuracy of the DC outputs and inputs of the lock-in.

Setup
We will use the digital voltmeter (DVM) to measure the DC outputs of the lock-in. Then we will use one of the
outputs to generate a voltage to measure on the DC inputs.

Connect a 50Ω termination to the A input.

Procedure
1) {PRESET} (Turn the lock-in off and on with the [←] key pressed)

2) Press
[OUTPUT/OFFSET]

3) For the CH1 and CH2 outputs, repeat steps 3a through 3e.

a) Connect the CH1 (or CH2) output to the DVM. Set the DVM to 19.999 V range.

b) Press
<Offset & Expand X, Y, or R>
Select X for CH1 and Y for CH2.

c) For each of the offsets in the table below, repeat steps 3d and 3e.

Offsets (%)
-100.00
-50.00
0.00
50.00
100.00

d) Press
<Offset>
Enter the offset from the table.

e) Record the DVM reading.

4) Press
[AUX OUTPUTS]

5) For each output (1, 2, 3 and 4), repeat steps 5a through 5e.

a) Press
<1,2,3,4>
Select the output.

b) Connect the selected Aux Output to the DVM.

7-21
 Performance Tests

c) For each output voltage in the table below, repeat steps 5d and 5e.

Output Voltages
-10.000
-5.000
0.000
5.000
10.000

d) Press
<Voltage>
Enter the voltage from the table.

e) Record the DVM reading.

6) Press
[DISPLAY/SCALE]
<Monitor>
Select Input/Output.

[AUX OUTPUTS]
<1,2,3,4>
Select Aux Out 1.

7) For each Aux Input (1,2,3 and 4), repeat steps 7a through 7d.

a) Connect Aux Out 1 to Aux Input 1,2,3 or 4.

b) For each output voltage in the table above, repeat steps 7c and 7d.

c) Press
<Voltage>
Enter the voltage from the table.

d) Record the Aux Input value from the monitor display at the top of the screen.

8) This completes the DC outputs and inputs test. Enter the results of this test in the test record at the
end of this section.

7-22
 Performance Tests

10. Input Noise

This test measures the lock-in input noise.

Setup
Connect a 50Ω termination to the A input. This grounds the input so the lock-in's own noise is measured.

Procedure
1) {PRESET} (Turn the lock-in off and on with the [←] key pressed)

2) Press the keys in the following sequence:

[GAIN/TC]
<Sensitivity>
Use the knob to select 100 nV.

[TRACE/SCAN]
<Trace definition> (second soft key)
Highlight X.
Use the knob to select Xn.

3) Wait until the reading of T1 (top display) stabilizes. Record the value of T1.

8) This completes the noise test. Enter the results of this test in the test record at the end of this section.

7-23
Performance Tests

7-24
 Page 1 of 4

SR850 Performance Test Record

Serial Number Tested By
Firmware Revision Date

Equipment Used

1. Self Tests
Test Pass Fail
Power On Tests ____ ____
Keypad ____ ____
Knob ____ ____
Main Memory ____ ____
Video Memory ____ ____

2. DC Offset
Input Coupling Reading Upper Limit
AC _______ 0.500 mV
DC _______ 0.500 mV

3. Common Mode Rejection

Frequency Reading Upper Limit
100 Hz _______ 30 µV

4. Amplitude Accuracy and Flatness

Sensitivity Calibrator Ampl. Lower Limit Reading Upper Limit
1V 1.0000 Vrms 0.9900 V _______ 1.0100 V
200 mV 200.00 mVrms 198.00 mV _______ 202.00 mV
100 mV 100.000 mVrms 99.00 mV _______ 101.00 mV
20 mV 20.000 mVrms 19.800 mV _______ 20.200 mV
10 mV 10.000 mVrms 9.900 mV _______ 10.100 mV

Sensitivity Frequency Lower Limit Reading Upper Limit

200 mV 24 kHz 198.00 mV _______ 202.00 mV
200 mV 48 kHz 198.00 mV _______ 202.00 mV
200 mV 72 kHz 198.00 mV _______ 202.00 mV
200 mV 96 kHz 198.00 mV _______ 202.00 mV

7-25
 Page 2 of 4

SR850 Performance Test Record

5. Amplitude Linearity
Sensitivity Calibrator Ampl. Lower Limit Reading Upper Limit
1V 1.0000 Vrms 0.9900 V _______ 1.0100 V
100.00 mVrms 0.0990 V _______ 0.1010 V
10.000 mVrms 0.0098 V _______ 0.0102 V
4.000 mVrms 0.0038 V _______ 0.0042 V

6. Frequency Accuracy
Input Frequency Lower Limit Reading Upper Limit
10 kHz 9.990 kHz _______ 10.010 kHz

7. Phase Accuracy
Frequency Lower Limit Reading Upper Limit
10 Hz -1.0 deg _______ +1.0 deg
100 Hz -1.0 deg _______ +1.0 deg
1 kHz -1.0 deg _______ +1.0 deg
10 kHz -1.0 deg _______ +1.0 deg

8. Sine Output Amplitude and Flatness

Sensitivity Sine Output Ampl. Lower Limit Reading Upper Limit
1V 1.000 Vrms 0.9800 V _______ 1.0200 V
200 mV 0.200 Vrms 196.00 mV _______ 204.00 mV
50 mV 0.050 Vrms 49.000 mV _______ 51.000 mV
10 mV 0.010 Vrms 9.800 mV _______ 10.200 mV

Sine Ampl. Frequency Lower Limit Reading Upper Limit

1.000 Vrms 24 kHz 0.9800 V _______ 1.0200 V
48 kHz 0.9800 V _______ 1.0200 V
72 kHz 0.9800 V _______ 1.0200 V
96 kHz 0.9800 V _______ 1.0200 V

9. DC Outputs and Inputs

Output Offset Lower Limit Reading Upper Limit
CH1 -100.00 9.960 V _______ 10.040 V
-50.00 4.960 V _______ 5.040 V
0.00 -0.020 V _______ 0.020 V
50.00 -5.040 V _______ -4.960 V
100.00 -10.040 V _______ -9.960 V

7-26
 Page 3 of 4

SR850 Performance Test Record

9. DC Outputs and Inputs (continued)
Output Offset Lower Limit Reading Upper Limit
CH2 -100.00 9.960 V _______ 10.040 V
-50.00 4.960 V _______ 5.040 V
0.00 -0.020 V _______ 0.020 V
50.00 -5.040 V _______ -4.960 V
100.00 -10.040 V _______ -9.960 V

Output Voltage Lower Limit Reading Upper Limit

AUX1 -10.000 -10.040 V _______ -9.960 V
-5.000 -5.040 V _______ -4.960 V
0.000 -0.020 V _______ 0.020 V
5.000 4.960 V _______ 5.040 V
10.000 9.960 V _______ 10.040 V

Output Voltage Lower Limit Reading Upper Limit

AUX2 -10.000 -10.040 V _______ -9.960 V
-5.000 -5.040 V _______ -4.960 V
0.000 -0.020 V _______ 0.020 V
5.000 4.960 V _______ 5.040 V
10.000 9.960 V _______ 10.040 V

Output Voltage Lower Limit Reading Upper Limit

AUX3 -10.000 -10.040 V _______ -9.960 V
-5.000 -5.040 V _______ -4.960 V
0.000 -0.020 V _______ 0.020 V
5.000 4.960 V _______ 5.040 V
10.000 9.960 V _______ 10.040 V

Output Voltage Lower Limit Reading Upper Limit

AUX4 -10.000 -10.040 V _______ -9.960 V
-5.000 -5.040 V _______ -4.960 V
0.000 -0.020 V _______ 0.020 V
5.000 4.960 V _______ 5.040 V
10.000 9.960 V _______ 10.040 V

7-27
 Page 4 of 4

SR850 Performance Test Record

9. DC Outputs and Inputs (continued)
Input Voltage Lower Limit Reading Upper Limit
AUX1 -10.000 -10.040 V _______ -9.960 V
-5.000 -5.040 V _______ -4.960 V
0.000 -0.020 V _______ 0.020 V
5.000 4.960 V _______ 5.040 V
10.000 9.960 V _______ 10.040 V

Input Voltage Lower Limit Reading Upper Limit

AUX2 -10.000 -10.040 V _______ -9.960 V
-5.000 -5.040 V _______ -4.960 V
0.000 -0.020 V _______ 0.020 V
5.000 4.960 V _______ 5.040 V
10.000 9.960 V _______ 10.040 V

Input Voltage Lower Limit Reading Upper Limit

AUX3 -10.000 -10.040 V _______ -9.960 V
-5.000 -5.040 V _______ -4.960 V
0.000 -0.020 V _______ 0.020 V
5.000 4.960 V _______ 5.040 V
10.000 9.960 V _______ 10.040 V

Input Voltage Lower Limit Reading Upper Limit

AUX4 -10.000 -10.040 V _______ -9.960 V
-5.000 -5.040 V _______ -4.960 V
0.000 -0.020 V _______ 0.020 V
5.000 4.960 V _______ 5.040 V
10.000 9.960 V _______ 10.040 V

10. Input Noise

Frequency Sensitivity Reading Upper Limit
1 kHz 100 nV _______ 8 nV/√Hz
Min Reserve

7-28
 SR850 SERVICE

CAUTION

Potentially lethal voltages are present in this instrument. This unit is to be serviced
by qualified service personnel only. There are no user serviceable parts inside.

Check the LED at the front edge of the power supply board. The unit is safe only if
the LED is OFF. If the LED is ON, then voltages are present within the unit - USE
CAUTION.

Use caution when checking circuits with the power on.

Always disconnect the power cord before replacing or servicing any component
inside the chassis.

CPU Board
Power Supply Board DSP Board Analog Input Board

CRT Assembly

Disk Drive

CIRCUIT BOARDS
The SR850 has four main printed circuit board assemblies. The four boards shown above contain most of the
active circuitry of the unit. The CRT and video driver circuits are mounted inside the CRT shield assembly.
This assembly is replaced as a unit. The front panel circuit board only has keypad contacts printed on it and
holds no active components. The DSP and Analog boards are cards mounted in a shielded card cage behind
the keypad. The disk drive is mounted on the right hand side panel.

8-1
SR850 Service

8-2
 SR850 Service

Adjusting the DC Offset and Common Mode Rejection

1. The DC Offset and CMRR adjustments affect each other and must be done together. This proce-
dure requires a 50Ω terminator, a BNC Tee and a few BNC cables. A small slotted screwdriver is
also required to adjust the potentiometers.
2. Turn the unit ON while holding the [<-] key down. This resets the unit. Let it warm up for at least
an hour.
3. Remove the four black screws which secure the top lid. There are two screws on each side. Slide
the top lid back about 1/4". Remove the lid by pulling the lid towards the back and upwards.
Remove the card cage cover by loosening the two screws at the center edge of the cover.
4. The adjustment pots are on the Analog board on right hand side of the card cage. Remove the
magnetic shield cover at the front of the Analog board. Simply pull the shield up using the finger
hole.
5. The adjustment pots are shown in the figure.
DSP Analog
The Offset and Common Mode adjustment pots Board Board
are inside the shield which is mounted on the
analog board.

2xLine Notch Depth

Line Notch Depth

2xLine Notch Freq

Common Mode

Line Notch Freq

Voltage Input Offset

Current Input Offset

Front

6. Press the following keys to set the frequency and display.

[REF/PHASE]
<Ref. Frequency> Select Reference Frequency
[1] [ENTER] Enter 1 Hz
[DISPLAY/SCALE]
<Type/Trace> Select Trace Number for Top display
[3] [ENTER] Enter 3 to display R
7. Connect a 50Ω termination to the A input. This shorts the input so the lock-in's own DC offset will
be measured.
Press
[GAIN/TC]
<Filter dB/oct> twice to select 24 dB/oct
<Sensitivity>
Rotate the knob to select 100 mV full scale

8-3
SR850 Service

If the R reading (top display) is less than 1 mV, then proceed to the next step. If the reading is
greater than 1 mV, adjust the Voltage Input Offset pot until R is less than 1 mV.
8. Press
<Sensitivity>
Rotate the knob to select 1 mV full scale
If the R reading is less than 0.02 mV then proceed to the next step. If the reading is greater than
0.02 mV, adjust the Voltage Input Offset pot until R is less than 0.02 mV.
9. Connect the SINE OUT output to both the A and B inputs. Use equal length cables from A and B
to a BNC TEE. Connect the cable from SINE OUT to the TEE.
Press
[GAIN/TC]
<Sensitivity>
Rotate the knob to select 1 V full scale
[REF/PHASE]
<Ref. Frequency> Select Reference Frequency
[1] [0] [0] [ENTER] Enter 100 Hz
[INPUT/FILTERS]
<Coupling> Select DC coupling

The R reading (top display) should read 1.00 V (±2%).

Press
<Source> to select A-B
If the R reading is less than 0.001 V, then proceed to the next step. If the reading is greater than
0.001 V, adjust the Common Mode pot until R is less than 0.001 V.
Press
[GAIN/TC]
<Sensitivity>
Rotate the knob to select 2 mV full scale
If the R reading is less than 0.2 mV, then proceed to the next step. If the reading is greater than
0.2 mV, adjust the Common Mode pot until R is less than 0.02 mV.
Press
[GAIN/TC]
<Sensitivity>
Rotate the knob to select 200 µV full scale
If the R reading is less than 2 µV, then proceed to the next step. If the reading is greater than
2 µV, adjust the Common Mode pot until R is less than 2 µV.
10. The offset needs to be readjusted after adjusting the common mode. Connect a 50Ω termination
to the A input.
Press
[INPUT/FILTERS]
<Source> twice to select A
<Coupling> to select AC
[REF/PHASE]
<Ref. Frequency> Select Reference Frequency
[1] [ENTER] Enter 1 Hz

8-4
 SR850 Service

[GAIN/TC]
<Sensitivity>
Rotate the knob to select 100 mV full scale
If the R reading (top display) is less than 1 mV, then proceed to the next step. If the reading is
greater than 1 mV, adjust the Voltage Input Offset pot until R is less than 1 mV.
11. Press
<Sensitivity>
Rotate the knob to select 1 mV full scale
If the R reading is less than 0.02 mV then proceed to the next step. If the reading is greater than
0.02 mV, adjust the Voltage Input Offset pot until R is less than 0.02 mV.
12. Remove the terminator from the A input. Leave the inputs open to adjust the current input offset.
Press
[INPUT]
<Input Source> Twice to select I
<Grounding> select Ground
<Coupling> select DC
[GAIN/TC]
<Sensitivity>
Rotate the knob to select 100 nA full scale
If the R reading (top display) is less than 1 nA, then proceed to the next step. If the reading is
greater than 1 nA, adjust the Current Input Offset pot until R is less than 1 nA.
13. Press
<Sensitivity>
Rotate the knob to select 1 nA full scale
If the R reading is less than 0.02 nA then proceed to the next step. If the reading is greater than
0.02 nA, adjust the Current Input Offset pot until R is less than 0.02 nA.
14. This completes the offset and common mode adjustment procedure.
15. Turn the unit OFF. Replace the magnetic shield at the front of the Analog board and replace the
card cage cover. Tighten the two cover screws. Replace the top lid. The lid slides forward and
down to engage the clip at the center front. Replace the four black screws to secure the lid.

8-5
 SR850 Service

Adjusting the Notch Filters

1. The Notch filter frequency and depth adjustments must be done together. This procedure requires
a BNC cables. A small slotted screwdriver is also required to adjust the potentiometers.
2. Turn the unit ON while holding the [<-] key down. This resets the unit. Let it warm up for at least
an hour.
3. Remove the four black screws which secure the top lid. There are two screws on each side. Slide
the top lid back about 1/4". Remove the lid by pulling the lid towards the back and upwards.
4. The adjustment pots are on the Analog board on right hand side of the card cage. The notch filter
adjustments are accessible through the card cage vent holes. Do not remove the card cage
cover.
5. The adjustment pots are shown in the figure.
DSP Analog
The Notch Frequency and Notch Depth adjustment Board Board
pots are outside the shield which is mounted on the
analog board.

2xLine Notch Depth

Line Notch Depth

2xLine Notch Freq

Common Mode

Line Notch Freq

Voltage Input Offset

Current Input Offset

Front

6. Connect the SINE OUT output to the A input with a BNC cable.
Press the following keys to set the frequency, display and time constant.
[REF/PHASE]
<Ref. Frequency> Select Reference Frequency
[6] [0] [ENTER] Enter 60 Hz OR
[5] [0] [ENTER] Enter 50 Hz
[DISPLAY/SCALE]
<Type/Trace> Select Trace Number for Top display
[3] [ENTER] Enter 3 to display R on the top
<Full/Top/Bottom> to select Bottom display
[4] [ENTER] Enter 4 to display θ on the bottom
[GAIN/TC]
<Filter dB/oct> twice to select 24 dB/oct
<Synchronous> to select <200 Hz
After the readings are stable, the top display should read 1.00 V (±2%).

8-6
 SR850 Service

Press
[AUTO PHASE]
The bottom display should read 0.0°.
7. Press
[INPUT/FILTERS]
<Line Notches> to select Line
[GAIN/TC]
<Sensitivity>
Rotate the knob to select 50 mV full scale
Adjust the Line Notch Depth pot until R (top display) is between 20.0 and 25.0 mV.
Then adjust the Line Notch Freq pot to minimize the reading of R AND until θ (bottom display) is
EITHER 0° or 180° (within 1°).
8. Now adjust the Line Notch Depth pot until R is less than 1.0 mV
9. Press
[INPUT/FILTERS]
<Line Notches> three times to select Out
[GAIN/TC]
<Sensitivity>
Rotate the knob to select 1V full scale
[REF/PHASE]
<Ref. Frequency> Select Reference Frequency
[1] [2] [0] [ENTER] Enter 120 Hz OR
[1] [0] [0] [ENTER] Enter 100 Hz
After the readings are stable, the top display should read 1.00 V (±2%).
Press
[AUTO PHASE]
The bottom display should read 0.0°.
10. Press
[INPUT/FILTERS]
<Line Notches> twice to select 2xLine
[GAIN/TC]
<Sensitivity>
Rotate the knob to select 50 mV full scale
Adjust the 2xLine Notch Depth pot until R (top display) is between 20.0 and 25.0 mV.
Then adjust the 2xLine Notch Freq pot to minimize the reading of R AND until θ (bottom display)
is EITHER 0° or 180° (within 1°).
11. Now adjust the 2xLine Notch Depth pot until R is less than 1.0 mV
12. This completes the notch filter adjustment procedure.
13. Turn the unit OFF. Replace the top lid. The lid slides forward and down to engage the clip at the
center front. Replace the four black screws to secure the lid.

8-7
SR850 Service

8-8
 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

Power Supply Board Analog Input Board

CPU Board DSP Logic Board

CAUTION VIDEO DRIVER AND CRT

Always disconnect the power cord and Potentially lethal voltages are present
wait at least one minute before open- in this circuit. Do not attempt to ser-
ing the unit. Dangerous power supply vice the CRT and Video Driver Board.
voltages may be present even after the Refer any service problems to the
unit has been unplugged. factory.

Check the LED at the front edge of the

power supply board. The unit is safe CIRCUIT BOARDS
only if the LED is OFF. If the LED is
ON, then DO NOT attempt any service The SR850 has four main printed circuit boards.
on the unit. The four boards shown contain most of the active
circuitry of the unit. The CRT and video driver
This unit is to be serviced by qualified board are mounted inside the CRT shield assem-
bly. The front panel circuit board only has keypad
service personnel only. There are no
contacts printed on it and holds no active compo-
user serviceable parts inside. nents. The rear panel circuit board only provides
connections to the BNC connectors on the rear
panel.

9-1
Circuit Description

9-2
 Circuit Description

CPU BOARD
The CPU board contains the microprocessor de-asserted (U805A and U815D) and the proces-
system. All display, front panel, disk, and comput- sor moves on to the next instruction.
er interfaces are on this board.
Interrupts generated by peripherals on the CPU
MICROPROCESSOR SYSTEM board are combined in U505 into a single priori-
tized interrupt. The highest priority pending inter-
The microprocessor, U101, is an 80C186 micro- rupt will be encoded on U505's outputs and read
controller which integrates a fast 16 bit processor, via the status port, U608. The UART directly inter-
counter-timers, interrupt controller, DMA controller, rupts the processor since it can never be masked.
and I/O decoding into a single component.
KEYPAD INTERFACE
The 80C186 uses a 24.00 MHz crystal, X101, as
its oscillator. The instruction clock cycle is 2 oscil- The keypad is organized as 8 columns and 8 rows
lator cycles or 12.0 MHz. The data and lower 16 of switch closures. The conductive rubber keys
bits of address are multiplexed on AD0-AD15. provide the switch closures. U607 strobes the col-
U201, U202, U203 latch the address A0-A19 at umns and U606 detects the switch closure. The
the beginning of each memory or I/O cycle. U204 diodes D601 - D608 prevent one column from
and U205 are bidirectional data bus drivers which affecting another. All of the outputs from U607 are
are active during the data read/write portion of set high and U606 is read periodically by the pro-
each memory or I/O cycle. cessor. As long as 00H is read, no key is pressed
and the strobes are left on. When a non-zero byte
The 80C186 can address 1 Mbyte of memory and is read, then the key strobes are activated individ-
64k of I/O space. The memory is mapped into 4 ually in order to decode which key is down.
256kbyte blocks. Each block has 2 sockets, one
for the low byte and one for the high byte of data. KEYBOARD INTERFACE

U301 and U302 are 128kbyte EPROMS holding The PC keyboard interface uses U603 to convert
the program boot firmware. This memory is serial data from the keyboard into a parallel byte
mapped at C0000H to FFFFFH (256k). U303 and for the processor to read. The data format from the
U304 are 128kbyte data ROMS mapped at keyboard is a leading start bit followed by 8 data
80000H to BFFFFH (256k). bits. U603 is reset by a processor read. When a
key is pressed, the bits are shifted into U603.
U401-403 are 128kbyte CMOS static RAMs When the start bit appears at the QH output, 7 bits
mapped at 00000H to 7FFFFH (512k). U401 and of the data byte are in U603. U601 is the 9th bit of
U402 are backed up by the battery. Q401 provides the shift register. When U601 clocks in the start
power down RAM protection. This memory is bit, U601 must have the 8 bits of the data. U601
system memory. then latches the serial data in U601 and interrupts
the processor.
4 of the 7 80C186's peripheral chip select strobes
are used by peripherals on the CPU board. -PCS0 Only keyboards which operate in the PC or 8088
is decoded into 16 I/O strobes which access the mode will function with this interface.
clock, keypad, keyboard, knob, printer port, etc. -
PCS1 decodes the disk controller, the GPIB con- SPIN KNOB
troller, and DMA acknowledge strobes. -PCS2
selects the UART and -PCS3 selects the video The knob is an optical encoder buffered by U612.
graphics controller. Whenever the video controller Each transition of its outputs is clocked into U610
is accessed, the ARDY line is asserted (U504A) or U611 and generates an interrupt at the output
which puts the processor into a wait state. When of U602A. The processor keeps track of the knob's
the video controller acknowledges the data trans- position continuously.
fer by pulling -Video_Rdy low, the ARDY line is

9-3
 Circuit Description

SPEAKER address may be read or written. This allows draw-

ing to take place as fast as possible.
The speaker is driven by a timer on the 80C186.
The timer outputs a square wave which is enabled Commands and data are sent from the 80C186 to
by U602B and drives the speaker through Q705. the HD63484 using a DMA channel. This allows
the HD63484 to process commands without
CLOCK/CALENDAR having to wait for the 80C186 to send them.

U702 is an MC146818 real time clock chip which DISK CONTROLLER

keeps track of time and date. The time base is a
32.768 kHz oscillator made by U706. Both U702 U907 is a DP8473 disk controller which integrates
and U706 are battery backed up. all of the functions of the PC interface into a single
IC. All motor controls, read and write signals, and
PRINTER INTERFACE data are all controlled by the DP8473. A DMA
channel is used to send and receive data from the
The printer interface allows screen displays to be controller in order to satisfy the disk drive timing.
printed to Epson compatible printers. Output data
is buffered by U703, an LS octal latch. Output con- GPIB INTERFACE
trol bits are buffered by the open collector driver
U704, and input control bits are discriminated by The GPIB (IEEE-488) interface is provided by
U705C and U705D. U902, a TMS9914A controller. U903 and U904
buffer data I/O to the GPIB connector. U902 is pro-
VIDEO GRAPHICS INTERFACE grammed to provide an interrupt to the processor
whenever there is bus activity addressed to the
The video graphics interface is centered around unit.
U810, an HD63484 graphics controller. The
HD63484 generates the video sync signals, con- RS232 INTERFACE
trols the video memory, and draws graphic primi-
tives such as lines, circles, polygons,etc., and The SCN2641 UART, U905, provides all of the
other high level functions. The HD63484 relieves UART functions as well as baud rate generation.
the 80C186 from having to calculate each video Standard baud rates up to 19.2k can be generated
image and greatly increases display speed. from the 3.6864 MHz clock. U906 buffers the out-
going data and control signals. Incoming signals
U813 and U814 are 32kbyte RAMs which make up are received by U705A and U705B. If the host
the 64k video memory. The video screen is 640H computer asserts DTR, RS232 data output from
by 480V and requires 38,400 bytes of memory. the unit will cease.
The remaining memory is used to store patterns,
fonts, and other graphic objects. The data and The RS232 port is a DCE and may be connected
address are multiplexed and U811 and U182 are to a PC using a standard serial cable (not a "null
the address latches. modem" cable).

Data is read 16 bits at a time. When data is EXPANSION CONNECTOR

required for the display, the 16 bits of data are
latched into U804 and U809 which are parallel to All control of the data acquisition hardware is
serial converters. The video data is then shifted through the signals on the 30 pin expansion
out at 13.5 MHz and synchronized by U806B. connector.
U803C blanks the video data except during active
display times.

Memory is accessed twice during each display

cycle. The first access reads the 16 bits of video
data for the current display cycle. The second
access is used by the controller for drawing pur-
poses. During the drawing access, data at any

9-4
 Circuit Description

POWER SUPPLY BOARD

CAUTION: Dangerous voltages are present on The following description refers to the +5V_P
this circuit board whenever the instrument is supply but describes the +5V_I supply as well.
attached to an AC power source and the front
panel power switch is "on". The main pass transistor is Q5. The base of this
transistor is controlled so that the emitter will pro-
Always disconnect the power cord and wait at vide a low impedance source of 5 VDC. The cur-
least one minute before opening the unit. rent gain of Q5 remains large until the collector-
Check the LED at the front edge of the power emitter voltage drops to about 0.4 VDC, hence the
supply board. The unit is safe only if the LED is low drop-out voltage of the regulator. The base of
OFF. If the LED is ON, then DO NOT attempt Q5 is driven by the emitter of Q6 which is driven
any service on the unit. by the output of the op amp, U3B. By comparing
the output of the regulator to the 5.00V reference,
UNREGULATED POWER SUPPLIES the op amp maintains the regulator's output at
5.00 VDC. The current output from the regulator is
A power entry module, with RF line filter, is used measured by the 0.1 Ω resistor R10. If the current
to configure the unit for 100, 120, 220, or 240 exceeds about 2 Amps, then the output of U3A
VAC. The line filter reduces noise from the instru- turns on, pulling the sense input of U3B high,
ment and reduces the unit's susceptibility to line thereby turning off the regulator's output.
voltage noise. R1 is an inrush limiter to limit the
turn on current and TS1 is a thermal switch which U6, U7 and U18 are the ±12V regulators. U5 is the
will interrupt the AC line if the heat sink tempera- -5V regulator. Since these supplies do not need to
ture rises to 50°C. be accurate, output sensing is not used.

Bridge rectifiers are used to provide unregulated U9 and U10 provide ±20V sources which are not
DC at ±22V, ±20V and ±8V. Schottky diodes are referenced to the digital ground (as are all of the
used for all supplies to reduce rectifier losses. supplies mentioned above). This allows the analog
input board to establish a ground at the signal
Resistors provide a bleed current on all of the input without digital ground noise.
unregulated supply filter capacitors. Because of
the large capacitances in this circuit, the time for U1 provides power-up and power-down reset.
the voltages to bleed to zero is about a minute
after the power is turned off. The 24 VDC brushless fan speed which cools the
heat sink and removes the hot air from the box.
POWER SUPPLY REGULATORS

The voltage regulators provide outputs at +5V,

-5V, ±15V, and ±12V. The +5V regulators are
designed to operate with a very low drop-out
voltage.

U2 is a precision 5.00V reference which is used to

set +5V output voltages. This provides very accu-
rate digital power supply outputs.

There are 2 +5V supplies, one to power the CPU

board and disk drive (+5V_P), and one to power
the DSP Logic Board (+5V_I).

9-5
Circuit Description

9-6
 Circuit Description

DSP LOGIC BOARD

OVERVIEW also sets the internal reference frequency
accuracy.
The DSP LOGIC BOARD takes a digital input from
the A/D Converter on the Analog Input Board and When the reference mode is external, the VCO
performs all of the computations related to the (voltage controlled oscillator, U110) is used as the
measurement before it is displayed on the screen. system clock. The VCO nominally runs at 30 MHz
This includes generating the digital reference sine as well. U105 is a phase comparator. The external
wave, demodulating the signal, low-pass filtering reference input, discriminated by U103 (or TTL
the results, and offset and expanding the outputs. buffered through U104D) is one of the inputs to
The internal oscillator sine output and Aux D/A the phase comparator. The other input is the inter-
outputs are generated on this board as well. The nal reference. The DSP always synthesizes a sine
reference phase lock loop controls the clock of this wave at the reference frequency. This is the Sine
board whenever the reference mode is external. Output. This sine output is discriminated by U209
These functions are implemented within a system into a TTL square wave (TTL Sync Out) and is the
comprised of five functional blocks: the Digital other input to the phase comparator. The phase
Signal Processor (DSP), the DAC Outputs, the lock loop then controls the VCO which is the clock
Timing Signal Generator, the Reference Clock to the DSP. This in turn changes the sine output
Generator and the I/O Interface. Through the use frequency to maintain frequency lock with the
of highly efficient algorithms, the system is capa- external reference. The DSP is constantly getting
ble of real-time lock-in operation to 100 kHz with external frequency information from the host
24 dB/oct filtering on both X and Y as well as pro- (based upon counter U622) which allows the DSP
viding a synthesized analog sine output. to synthesize nearly the correct reference frequen-
cy assuming a 30 MHz clock. This keeps the VCO
DSP PROCESSOR within range at all frequencies.

The SR850 utilizes a Motorola 24-bit DSP56001 TIMING GENERATOR

digital signal processor (U501). The DSP is config-
ured without external memory. The lock-in algo- All timing signals for the DSP and Analog boards
rithms run entirely within the internal program and are derived from the system clock by PALs (U601-
data memory of the DSP itself. The Host proces- 604). These PALs generate the clocks for the
sor bus is connected to the main CPU Board via DACs and A/D converter, the multiplexing signals
the I/O Interface on the DSP Logic Board. The for the Aux inputs and outputs, etc.
80C186 processor on the CPU Board acts as the
"host" processor to the DSP. DSP firmware and SERIAL CHANNELS
commands are downloaded from the CPU Board
to invoke different operating modes. The DSP also There are two serial data streams from the A/D
has two dedicated serial ports: one for receiving, converter on the Analog Input board which need to
and one for transmitting. be received by the DSP. The digitized input signal
is received directly via the DSP's serial input port.
REFERENCE CLOCK SOURCE The Aux A/D input data is shifted into a pair of
serial-to-parallel registers (U502 and U503) and is
The clock to the DSP is derived from the timing read via the DSP data bus. Each A/D input chan-
generator. U120, U121 and U122 are gates which nel provides a new sample every 4 µs.
select the clock source for the entire digital board.
There are two dual-channel D/A converters on this
When the reference mode is internal, the board for a total of four D/A output channels. Each
30.208 MHz crystal (U111) is used. The A/D output channel provides a new output every 4 µs.
inputs and D/A outputs run with a 256 kHz cycle This means that 4 output values must be written
and the DSP performs 59 instructions each cycle by the DSP each 4 µs cycle. The DSP writes to
(each instruction takes two clocks). The crystal one channel of each D/A converter via its serial

9-7
 Circuit Description

transmit port each cycle. The transmit port oper- ±15V for the op amps. ±5.6V for analog switches
ates at twice the frequency of the receive port. The and op amps is generated from the ±15V supplies.
DSP writes to the other channel of each DAC via a The reference and sine discriminators use separ-
pair of parallel-to-serial registers (U504 and ate ±5V supplies regulated from the ±15V supplies
U505). as well.

DAC OUTPUTS

Three of the DAC output channels provide Sine

Out, X and Y. The fourth channel is multiplexed
into eight slow outputs. Two of these are the front
panel CH1 and CH2 outputs when the outputs are
proportional to a trace. Four of these are the Aux
D/A outputs. The last two are used to provide
internal offset trims to the reference and sine
discriminators.

The DSP generates sine waves using direct digital

synthesis. At each 4 µs cycle, the DSP calculates
the next sine output value based upon the desired
reference frequency. This value is output via a
DAC and converted to an analog output. This
output is a sampled sine wave. To convert this to a
smooth, low distortion analog sine wave, the
output is filtered to remove frequency components
above 100 kHz (U201-203). The filter output is
scaled by DAC U206 and output by driver U207.
U209 discriminates the zero crossings to provide a
TTL square wave at the reference frequency. This
is the TTL SYNC out as well as the feedback to
the phase lock loop in external reference mode.

I/O INTERFACE TO CPU BOARD

The I/O interface provides the communication

pathway between the DSP Logic Board and the
main CPU Board. U610 and U613 are buffers for
the address and data bus connections. Both buffer
chips are enabled only when the CPU Board is
writing to the DSP Logic Board. This helps isolate
the activity on the CPU Board from affecting cir-
cuitry on the DSP Logic Board. U608 and U609
are simple D-type latches used to hold configura-
tion data for the DSP Logic Board. U606 is the
main decoder PAL and generates all of the chip
selects and strobes needed by the DSP Logic
Board.

POWER

The bulk of the digital circuitry, the DSP and the

timing PALs and the interface circuits are all pow-
ered by +5V from the power supply board. The
±22V from the power supply is used to generate

9-8
 Circuit Description

ANALOG INPUT BOARD

OVERVIEW and frequency adjustment. (60 Hz - depth:P222
and freq:P221 120 Hz - depth:P202 and
The Analog Input Board provides the very impor- freq:P201). The 120 Hz notch filter has a configur-
tant link between the user's input signal and the able gain of either 1 or 3.17.
DSP processor. From the front panel BNC, the
user's signal passes through a low distortion front- The notch filters are followed by two gain stages,
end amplifier, gain stages, notch filters, anti- each configurable up to a gain of 10.
aliasing filter, and finally an A/D Converter. Once
converted to digital form, the input signal is ready Overloads are sensed at the input amplifier and
to be processed by the Digital Signal Processor. the final amplifier outputs. Since there is no attenu-
ation in the amplifier chain, this is sufficient.
INPUT AMPLIFIER
ANTI-ALIASING FILTER
The goal of any measurement instrument is to per-
form some given measurement while affecting the To prevent aliasing, the input signal passes
quantities to be measured as little as possible. As through a low-pass filter so that all frequency com-
such, the input amplifier is often the most critical ponents greater than half the sampling frequency
stage in the entire signal path. The design of the are attenuated by at least 96 dB. This is accom-
front end input amplifier in the SR850 was driven plished with an 8-zero 9-pole elliptical low pass
by an effort to provide optimum performance in the filter. The pass band of this filter is DC to 102kHz.
following areas: input voltage noise, input current The stopband begins at 154 kHz. Stopband atten-
noise, input capacitance, harmonic distortion, and uation is nominally 100 dB.
common mode rejection (CMR). To provide such
performance, a FET input differential amplifier with The architecture of the filter is based on a singly
common-mode feedback architecture was chosen. terminated passive LC ladder filter. L's are simulat-
The input signal is first passed through a series of ed with active gyrators formed by op-amp pairs
relays to select input mode and input coupling. (U311, U321, U331, U341). Passive LC ladder fil-
The input FETs U100A and U100B are extremely ters have the special characteristic of being very
low-noise matched FETs. To improve distortion tolerant of variations in component values.
performance, the input FETs are cascoded to Because no section of the ladder is completely iso-
maintain a constant drain-source voltage across lated from the other, a change in value of any
each FET. This prevents modulation of the drain- single component affects the entire ladder. The
source voltage by the input voltage. U109 senses design of the LC ladder however, is such that the
the source voltages and maintains the same volt- characteristics of the rest of the ladder will shift to
age at the drains (via FETs U108A and B) with account for the change in such a way as to mini-
some DC offset determined by resistors N102 and mize its effect on the ladder. Not only does this
N103. U105 provides common-mode feedback loosen the requirement for extremely high accura-
and maintains a constant drain current in each cy resistors and capacitors, but it also makes the
FET. The gain of the front end is fixed. U103 pro- filter extremely stable despite wide temperature
vides the output. The DC offset is adjusted by variations. As such, the anti-aliasing filter used in
P101 and the CMR by P102. the SR850 does not ever require calibration to
meets its specifications.
GAIN STAGES AND NOTCH FILTERS
Following the anti-aliasing filter is the signal moni-
Collectively, the front end amplifier and following tor buffer (U386) and A/D driver stage (U301).
gain stages provide gain up to about 2000.
A/D CONVERTER
The notch filters are simple single stage, inverting
band pass filters summing with their inputs to The SR850 uses a dual channel A/D converter
remove 60 Hz or 120 Hz. Each filter has a depth (U407). Each channel samples simultaneously at

9-9
 Circuit Description

a rate of 256 kHz. One channel is dedicated to the

input signal. The other channel reads one of the
Aux A/D inputs. The Aux inputs are multiplexed so
that each input is read every four cycles. The two
digital output streams are buffered by U406 and
sent to the DSP board.

I/O INTERFACE

The Analog Input Board communicates with the

CPU Board via its I/O Interface. U504 and U506
are simple latches which hold configuration data
for the analog board. They are written via the iso-
lated data bus from the DSP board. This data bus
is active only when the Analog board is
addressed. This prevents noise from the CPU and
DSP boards from entering the Analog Board.
Timing signals for the A/D Converter are buffered
by U406.

POWER

Several voltages are generated on the Analog

Input Board locally. ±15V is generated for most of
the analog IC's. A dedicated ±15V supply is also
generated for the front-end amplifier. ±5.6V is gen-
erated for the digital circuitry as well as some of
the drivers. The A/D Converter has its own ±5V
supply.

9-10
 PARTS LIST

Power Supply Board Parts List

Ref. SRS Part No. Value Description
C1 5-00124-526 5600U Capacitor, Electrolytic, 35V, 20%, Rad
C2 5-00124-526 5600U Capacitor, Electrolytic, 35V, 20%, Rad
C3 5-00228-526 15000U Capacitor, Electrolytic, 35V, 20%, Rad
C4 5-00228-526 15000U Capacitor, Electrolytic, 35V, 20%, Rad
C5 5-00230-550 47000U Capacitor, Electrolytic, 10V, 20%, Rad
C6 5-00229-521 15000U Capacitor, Electrolytic, 25V, 20%, Rad
C7 5-00023-529 .1U Cap, Monolythic Ceramic, 50V, 20%, Z5U
C8 5-00127-524 2.2U Capacitor, Tantalum, 50V, 20%, Rad
C9 5-00038-509 10U Capacitor, Electrolytic, 50V, 20%, Rad
C 10 5-00027-503 .01U Capacitor, Ceramic Disc, 50V, 20%, Z5U
C 11 5-00002-501 100P Capacitor, Ceramic Disc, 50V, 10%, SL
C 12 5-00027-503 .01U Capacitor, Ceramic Disc, 50V, 20%, Z5U
C 13 5-00002-501 100P Capacitor, Ceramic Disc, 50V, 10%, SL
C 16 5-00127-524 2.2U Capacitor, Tantalum, 50V, 20%, Rad
C 17 5-00127-524 2.2U Capacitor, Tantalum, 50V, 20%, Rad
C 18 5-00127-524 2.2U Capacitor, Tantalum, 50V, 20%, Rad
C 19 5-00192-542 22U MIN Cap, Mini Electrolytic, 50V, 20% Radial
C 20 5-00127-524 2.2U Capacitor, Tantalum, 50V, 20%, Rad
C 21 5-00127-524 2.2U Capacitor, Tantalum, 50V, 20%, Rad
C 23 5-00192-542 22U MIN Cap, Mini Electrolytic, 50V, 20% Radial
C 24 5-00127-524 2.2U Capacitor, Tantalum, 50V, 20%, Rad
C 26 5-00192-542 22U MIN Cap, Mini Electrolytic, 50V, 20% Radial
C 27 5-00127-524 2.2U Capacitor, Tantalum, 50V, 20%, Rad
C 28 5-00192-542 22U MIN Cap, Mini Electrolytic, 50V, 20% Radial
C 29 5-00127-524 2.2U Capacitor, Tantalum, 50V, 20%, Rad
C 30 5-00192-542 22U MIN Cap, Mini Electrolytic, 50V, 20% Radial
C 31 5-00127-524 2.2U Capacitor, Tantalum, 50V, 20%, Rad
C 32 5-00192-542 22U MIN Cap, Mini Electrolytic, 50V, 20% Radial
C 33 5-00127-524 2.2U Capacitor, Tantalum, 50V, 20%, Rad
C 34 5-00127-524 2.2U Capacitor, Tantalum, 50V, 20%, Rad
D2 3-00391-301 MBR360 Diode
D3 3-00391-301 MBR360 Diode
D4 3-00391-301 MBR360 Diode
D5 3-00391-301 MBR360 Diode
D6 3-00391-301 MBR360 Diode
D7 3-00391-301 MBR360 Diode
D8 3-00391-301 MBR360 Diode
D9 3-00391-301 MBR360 Diode
D 12 3-00004-301 1N4148 Diode
D 13 3-00004-301 1N4148 Diode
D 15 3-00391-301 MBR360 Diode
D 16 3-00001-301 1N4001 Diode
D 17 3-00001-301 1N4001 Diode
D 18 3-00001-301 1N4001 Diode
D 19 3-00001-301 1N4001 Diode
D 20 3-00001-301 1N4001 Diode

9-11
 Parts List
Ref. SRS Part No. Value Description
D 30 3-00479-301 MUR410 Diode
D 31 3-00479-301 MUR410 Diode
D 32 3-00479-301 MUR410 Diode
D 33 3-00479-301 MUR410 Diode
D 34 3-00391-301 MBR360 Diode
D 35 3-00391-301 MBR360 Diode
D 36 3-00391-301 MBR360 Diode
D 37 3-00391-301 MBR360 Diode
D 38 3-00001-301 1N4001 Diode
DS1 3-00011-303 RED LED, T1 Package
JP1 1-00039-116 5 PIN, WHITE Header, Amp, MTA-156
JP2 1-00116-130 4 PIN DI DISK Connector, Male
JP3 1-00119-116 3 PIN, WHITE Header, Amp, MTA-156
JP4 1-00171-130 34 PIN ELH Connector, Male
JP5 1-00086-130 3 PIN SI Connector, Male
JP6 1-00086-130 3 PIN SI Connector, Male
PC1 7-00354-701 4 Printed Circuit Board
Q3 3-00021-325 2N3904 Transistor, TO-92 Package
Q4 3-00021-325 2N3904 Transistor, TO-92 Package
Q5 3-00257-329 TIP41B Voltage Reg., TO-220 (TAB) Package
Q6 3-00378-329 TIP102 Voltage Reg., TO-220 (TAB) Package
Q7 3-00378-329 TIP102 Voltage Reg., TO-220 (TAB) Package
Q8 3-00257-329 TIP41B Voltage Reg., TO-220 (TAB) Package
R3 4-00034-401 10K Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R4 4-00032-401 100K Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R5 4-00034-401 10K Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R6 4-00046-401 2.0M Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R7 4-00065-401 3.3K Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R8 4-00021-401 1.0K Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R9 4-00021-401 1.0K Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 10 4-00436-409 0.1 Resistor, Wire Wound
R 11 4-00446-407 47.5K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 12 4-00054-401 200K Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 13 4-00034-401 10K Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 14 4-00034-401 10K Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 15 4-00021-401 1.0K Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 16 4-00021-401 1.0K Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 17 4-00436-409 0.1 Resistor, Wire Wound
R 18 4-00770-407 38.3K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 19 4-00054-401 200K Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 20 4-00034-401 10K Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 21 4-00034-401 10K Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 30 4-00360-401 430 Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 31 4-00048-401 2.2K Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 32 4-00360-401 430 Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 33 4-00027-401 1.5K Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 34 4-00027-401 1.5K Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 35 4-00185-407 4.02K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 36 4-00185-407 4.02K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM

9-12
 Parts List
Ref. SRS Part No. Value Description
R 37 4-00522-407 243 Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 38 4-00517-407 3.57K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 39 4-00522-407 243 Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 40 4-00517-407 3.57K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
T1 1-00152-116 11 PIN, WHITE Header, Amp, MTA-156
U1 3-00039-340 74HC14 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U2 3-00319-340 AD586JN Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U3 3-00088-340 LF353 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U4 3-00088-340 LF353 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U5 3-00119-329 7905 Voltage Reg., TO-220 (TAB) Package
U6 3-00346-329 7812 Voltage Reg., TO-220 (TAB) Package
U7 3-00346-329 7812 Voltage Reg., TO-220 (TAB) Package
U8 3-00330-329 7912 Voltage Reg., TO-220 (TAB) Package
U9 3-00149-329 LM317T Voltage Reg., TO-220 (TAB) Package
U 10 3-00141-329 LM337T Voltage Reg., TO-220 (TAB) Package
U 11 3-00114-329 7815 Voltage Reg., TO-220 (TAB) Package
U 12 3-00120-329 7915 Voltage Reg., TO-220 (TAB) Package
Z0 0-00089-033 4" Tie
Z0 0-00186-021 6-32X1-3/8PP Screw, Panhead Phillips
Z0 0-00187-021 4-40X1/4PP Screw, Panhead Phillips
Z0 0-00231-043 1-32, #4 SHOULD Washer, nylon
Z0 0-00246-043 #8 X 1/16 Washer, nylon
Z0 0-00309-021 8-32X1/4PP Screw, Panhead Phillips
Z0 0-00316-003 PLTFM-28 Insulators
Z0 1-00087-131 2 PIN JUMPER Connector, Female
Z0 7-00285-721 PLTFM-21 Machined Part
Z1 0-00158-070 60MM 24V Fans, & Hardware

DSP Logic Board Parts List

Ref. SRS Part No. Value Description
C 101 5-00060-512 1.0U Cap, Stacked Metal Film 50V 5% -40/+85c
C 114 5-00100-517 2.2U Capacitor, Tantalum, 35V, 20%, Rad
C 117 5-00100-517 2.2U Capacitor, Tantalum, 35V, 20%, Rad
C 119 5-00259-501 .002U Capacitor, Ceramic Disc, 50V, 10%, SL
C 120 5-00092-523 1P Capacitor, Silver Mica, Miniature
C 121 5-00023-529 .1U Cap, Monolythic Ceramic, 50V, 20%, Z5U
C 130 5-00023-529 .1U Cap, Monolythic Ceramic, 50V, 20%, Z5U
C 135 5-00002-501 100P Capacitor, Ceramic Disc, 50V, 10%, SL
C 136 5-00002-501 100P Capacitor, Ceramic Disc, 50V, 10%, SL
C 137 5-00017-501 47P Capacitor, Ceramic Disc, 50V, 10%, SL
C 140 5-00053-512 .033U Cap, Stacked Metal Film 50V 5% -40/+85c
C 141 5-00053-512 .033U Cap, Stacked Metal Film 50V 5% -40/+85c
C 142 5-00051-512 .015U Cap, Stacked Metal Film 50V 5% -40/+85c
C 143 5-00121-566 .0047U Cap, Polyester Film 50V 5% -40/+85c Rad
C 144 5-00056-512 .1U Cap, Stacked Metal Film 50V 5% -40/+85c
C 150 5-00023-529 .1U Cap, Monolythic Ceramic, 50V, 20%, Z5U
C 151 5-00023-529 .1U Cap, Monolythic Ceramic, 50V, 20%, Z5U
C 152 5-00023-529 .1U Cap, Monolythic Ceramic, 50V, 20%, Z5U

9-13
 Parts List
Ref. SRS Part No. Value Description
C 153 5-00023-529 .1U Cap, Monolythic Ceramic, 50V, 20%, Z5U
C 154 5-00023-529 .1U Cap, Monolythic Ceramic, 50V, 20%, Z5U
C 155 5-00023-529 .1U Cap, Monolythic Ceramic, 50V, 20%, Z5U
C 156 5-00023-529 .1U Cap, Monolythic Ceramic, 50V, 20%, Z5U
C 157 5-00023-529 .1U Cap, Monolythic Ceramic, 50V, 20%, Z5U
C 171 5-00002-501 100P Capacitor, Ceramic Disc, 50V, 10%, SL
C 173 5-00002-501 100P Capacitor, Ceramic Disc, 50V, 10%, SL
C 180 5-00038-509 10U Capacitor, Electrolytic, 50V, 20%, Rad
C 181 5-00038-509 10U Capacitor, Electrolytic, 50V, 20%, Rad
C 182 5-00100-517 2.2U Capacitor, Tantalum, 35V, 20%, Rad
C 183 5-00100-517 2.2U Capacitor, Tantalum, 35V, 20%, Rad
C 202 5-00148-545 1000P - 50V Capacitor, Monolythic Ceramic, COG, 1%
C 203 5-00148-545 1000P - 50V Capacitor, Monolythic Ceramic, COG, 1%
C 204 5-00148-545 1000P - 50V Capacitor, Monolythic Ceramic, COG, 1%
C 205 5-00148-545 1000P - 50V Capacitor, Monolythic Ceramic, COG, 1%
C 206 5-00148-545 1000P - 50V Capacitor, Monolythic Ceramic, COG, 1%
C 207 5-00148-545 1000P - 50V Capacitor, Monolythic Ceramic, COG, 1%
C 210 5-00148-545 1000P - 50V Capacitor, Monolythic Ceramic, COG, 1%
C 211 5-00003-501 10P Capacitor, Ceramic Disc, 50V, 10%, SL
C 235 5-00002-501 100P Capacitor, Ceramic Disc, 50V, 10%, SL
C 236 5-00002-501 100P Capacitor, Ceramic Disc, 50V, 10%, SL
C 237 5-00016-501 470P Capacitor, Ceramic Disc, 50V, 10%, SL
C 238 5-00002-501 100P Capacitor, Ceramic Disc, 50V, 10%, SL
C 254 5-00023-529 .1U Cap, Monolythic Ceramic, 50V, 20%, Z5U
C 255 5-00023-529 .1U Cap, Monolythic Ceramic, 50V, 20%, Z5U
C 260 5-00023-529 .1U Cap, Monolythic Ceramic, 50V, 20%, Z5U
C 261 5-00023-529 .1U Cap, Monolythic Ceramic, 50V, 20%, Z5U
C 264 5-00023-529 .1U Cap, Monolythic Ceramic, 50V, 20%, Z5U
C 265 5-00023-529 .1U Cap, Monolythic Ceramic, 50V, 20%, Z5U
C 280 5-00038-509 10U Capacitor, Electrolytic, 50V, 20%, Rad
C 281 5-00038-509 10U Capacitor, Electrolytic, 50V, 20%, Rad
C 282 5-00100-517 2.2U Capacitor, Tantalum, 35V, 20%, Rad
C 283 5-00100-517 2.2U Capacitor, Tantalum, 35V, 20%, Rad
C 290 5-00023-529 .1U Cap, Monolythic Ceramic, 50V, 20%, Z5U
C 301 5-00002-501 100P Capacitor, Ceramic Disc, 50V, 10%, SL
C 302 5-00002-501 100P Capacitor, Ceramic Disc, 50V, 10%, SL
C 303 5-00002-501 100P Capacitor, Ceramic Disc, 50V, 10%, SL
C 305 5-00002-501 100P Capacitor, Ceramic Disc, 50V, 10%, SL
C 307 5-00002-501 100P Capacitor, Ceramic Disc, 50V, 10%, SL
C 308 5-00002-501 100P Capacitor, Ceramic Disc, 50V, 10%, SL
C 309 5-00002-501 100P Capacitor, Ceramic Disc, 50V, 10%, SL
C 310 5-00002-501 100P Capacitor, Ceramic Disc, 50V, 10%, SL
C 350 5-00023-529 .1U Cap, Monolythic Ceramic, 50V, 20%, Z5U
C 351 5-00023-529 .1U Cap, Monolythic Ceramic, 50V, 20%, Z5U
C 352 5-00023-529 .1U Cap, Monolythic Ceramic, 50V, 20%, Z5U
C 353 5-00023-529 .1U Cap, Monolythic Ceramic, 50V, 20%, Z5U
C 381 5-00100-517 2.2U Capacitor, Tantalum, 35V, 20%, Rad
C 382 5-00100-517 2.2U Capacitor, Tantalum, 35V, 20%, Rad
C 383 5-00100-517 2.2U Capacitor, Tantalum, 35V, 20%, Rad

9-14
 Parts List
Ref. SRS Part No. Value Description
C 384 5-00100-517 2.2U Capacitor, Tantalum, 35V, 20%, Rad
C 385 5-00100-517 2.2U Capacitor, Tantalum, 35V, 20%, Rad
C 386 5-00100-517 2.2U Capacitor, Tantalum, 35V, 20%, Rad
C 387 5-00100-517 2.2U Capacitor, Tantalum, 35V, 20%, Rad
C 388 5-00100-517 2.2U Capacitor, Tantalum, 35V, 20%, Rad
C 389 5-00038-509 10U Capacitor, Electrolytic, 50V, 20%, Rad
C 390 5-00038-509 10U Capacitor, Electrolytic, 50V, 20%, Rad
C 401 5-00023-529 .1U Cap, Monolythic Ceramic, 50V, 20%, Z5U
C 402 5-00023-529 .1U Cap, Monolythic Ceramic, 50V, 20%, Z5U
C 403 5-00023-529 .1U Cap, Monolythic Ceramic, 50V, 20%, Z5U
C 404 5-00023-529 .1U Cap, Monolythic Ceramic, 50V, 20%, Z5U
C 406 5-00023-529 .1U Cap, Monolythic Ceramic, 50V, 20%, Z5U
C 407 5-00023-529 .1U Cap, Monolythic Ceramic, 50V, 20%, Z5U
C 408 5-00023-529 .1U Cap, Monolythic Ceramic, 50V, 20%, Z5U
C 409 5-00023-529 .1U Cap, Monolythic Ceramic, 50V, 20%, Z5U
C 410 5-00021-501 82P Capacitor, Ceramic Disc, 50V, 10%, SL
C 420 5-00023-529 .1U Cap, Monolythic Ceramic, 50V, 20%, Z5U
C 421 5-00219-529 .01U Cap, Monolythic Ceramic, 50V, 20%, Z5U
C 422 5-00023-529 .1U Cap, Monolythic Ceramic, 50V, 20%, Z5U
C 423 5-00219-529 .01U Cap, Monolythic Ceramic, 50V, 20%, Z5U
C 424 5-00023-529 .1U Cap, Monolythic Ceramic, 50V, 20%, Z5U
C 425 5-00219-529 .01U Cap, Monolythic Ceramic, 50V, 20%, Z5U
C 426 5-00023-529 .1U Cap, Monolythic Ceramic, 50V, 20%, Z5U
C 427 5-00219-529 .01U Cap, Monolythic Ceramic, 50V, 20%, Z5U
C 428 5-00023-529 .1U Cap, Monolythic Ceramic, 50V, 20%, Z5U
C 429 5-00219-529 .01U Cap, Monolythic Ceramic, 50V, 20%, Z5U
C 430 5-00023-529 .1U Cap, Monolythic Ceramic, 50V, 20%, Z5U
C 431 5-00219-529 .01U Cap, Monolythic Ceramic, 50V, 20%, Z5U
C 432 5-00023-529 .1U Cap, Monolythic Ceramic, 50V, 20%, Z5U
C 433 5-00219-529 .01U Cap, Monolythic Ceramic, 50V, 20%, Z5U
C 434 5-00023-529 .1U Cap, Monolythic Ceramic, 50V, 20%, Z5U
C 435 5-00219-529 .01U Cap, Monolythic Ceramic, 50V, 20%, Z5U
C 450 5-00098-517 10U Capacitor, Tantalum, 35V, 20%, Rad
C 453 5-00098-517 10U Capacitor, Tantalum, 35V, 20%, Rad
C 456 5-00098-517 10U Capacitor, Tantalum, 35V, 20%, Rad
C 459 5-00098-517 10U Capacitor, Tantalum, 35V, 20%, Rad
C 470 5-00100-517 2.2U Capacitor, Tantalum, 35V, 20%, Rad
C 471 5-00100-517 2.2U Capacitor, Tantalum, 35V, 20%, Rad
C 601 5-00027-503 .01U Capacitor, Ceramic Disc, 50V, 20%, Z5U
C 602 5-00023-529 .1U Cap, Monolythic Ceramic, 50V, 20%, Z5U
C 603 5-00038-509 10U Capacitor, Electrolytic, 50V, 20%, Rad
C 604 5-00239-562 680P Cap., NPO Monolitic Ceramic, 50v, 5% Ra
C 630 5-00033-520 47U Capacitor, Electrolytic, 16V, 20%, Rad
C 631 5-00033-520 47U Capacitor, Electrolytic, 16V, 20%, Rad
C 650 5-00225-548 .1U AXIAL Capacitor, Ceramic, 50V,+80/-20% Z5U AX
C 651 5-00225-548 .1U AXIAL Capacitor, Ceramic, 50V,+80/-20% Z5U AX
C 652 5-00225-548 .1U AXIAL Capacitor, Ceramic, 50V,+80/-20% Z5U AX
C 653 5-00225-548 .1U AXIAL Capacitor, Ceramic, 50V,+80/-20% Z5U AX
C 654 5-00225-548 .1U AXIAL Capacitor, Ceramic, 50V,+80/-20% Z5U AX

9-15
 Parts List
Ref. SRS Part No. Value Description
C 655 5-00225-548 .1U AXIAL Capacitor, Ceramic, 50V,+80/-20% Z5U AX
C 656 5-00225-548 .1U AXIAL Capacitor, Ceramic, 50V,+80/-20% Z5U AX
C 657 5-00225-548 .1U AXIAL Capacitor, Ceramic, 50V,+80/-20% Z5U AX
C 658 5-00225-548 .1U AXIAL Capacitor, Ceramic, 50V,+80/-20% Z5U AX
C 659 5-00225-548 .1U AXIAL Capacitor, Ceramic, 50V,+80/-20% Z5U AX
C 660 5-00225-548 .1U AXIAL Capacitor, Ceramic, 50V,+80/-20% Z5U AX
C 661 5-00225-548 .1U AXIAL Capacitor, Ceramic, 50V,+80/-20% Z5U AX
C 662 5-00225-548 .1U AXIAL Capacitor, Ceramic, 50V,+80/-20% Z5U AX
C 663 5-00225-548 .1U AXIAL Capacitor, Ceramic, 50V,+80/-20% Z5U AX
C 664 5-00225-548 .1U AXIAL Capacitor, Ceramic, 50V,+80/-20% Z5U AX
C 665 5-00225-548 .1U AXIAL Capacitor, Ceramic, 50V,+80/-20% Z5U AX
C 666 5-00225-548 .1U AXIAL Capacitor, Ceramic, 50V,+80/-20% Z5U AX
C 667 5-00225-548 .1U AXIAL Capacitor, Ceramic, 50V,+80/-20% Z5U AX
C 668 5-00225-548 .1U AXIAL Capacitor, Ceramic, 50V,+80/-20% Z5U AX
C 669 5-00225-548 .1U AXIAL Capacitor, Ceramic, 50V,+80/-20% Z5U AX
C 670 5-00225-548 .1U AXIAL Capacitor, Ceramic, 50V,+80/-20% Z5U AX
C 671 5-00225-548 .1U AXIAL Capacitor, Ceramic, 50V,+80/-20% Z5U AX
CU401 5-00002-501 100P Capacitor, Ceramic Disc, 50V, 10%, SL
CU402 5-00002-501 100P Capacitor, Ceramic Disc, 50V, 10%, SL
CX623 5-00225-548 .1U AXIAL Capacitor, Ceramic, 50V,+80/-20% Z5U AX
D 103 3-00465-301 MV209 Diode
D 104 3-00004-301 1N4148 Diode
D 105 3-00004-301 1N4148 Diode
D 180 3-00004-301 1N4148 Diode
D 181 3-00004-301 1N4148 Diode
D 280 3-00004-301 1N4148 Diode
D 281 3-00004-301 1N4148 Diode
JP301 1-00035-130 20 PIN DIL Connector, Male
K 101 3-00196-335 HS-212S-5 Relay
K 201 3-00444-335 BS-211-DC5 GF Relay
L 101 6-00107-606 .8UH Inductor, Variable
L 601 6-00006-602 33U Inductor, Radial
N 101 4-00693-421 270X5 Res. Network, SIP, 1/4W,2% (Isolated)
N 102 4-00690-421 3.3KX4 Res. Network, SIP, 1/4W,2% (Isolated)
N 201 4-00693-421 270X5 Res. Network, SIP, 1/4W,2% (Isolated)
N 202 4-00690-421 3.3KX4 Res. Network, SIP, 1/4W,2% (Isolated)
N 301 4-00497-421 1.5KX4 Res. Network, SIP, 1/4W,2% (Isolated)
N 302 4-00692-421 5.6KX4 Res. Network, SIP, 1/4W,2% (Isolated)
N 303 4-00265-421 100X4 Res. Network, SIP, 1/4W,2% (Isolated)
N 304 4-00497-421 1.5KX4 Res. Network, SIP, 1/4W,2% (Isolated)
N 305 4-00692-421 5.6KX4 Res. Network, SIP, 1/4W,2% (Isolated)
N 306 4-00265-421 100X4 Res. Network, SIP, 1/4W,2% (Isolated)
N 420 4-00244-421 10KX4 Res. Network, SIP, 1/4W,2% (Isolated)
N 421 4-00244-421 10KX4 Res. Network, SIP, 1/4W,2% (Isolated)
N 501 4-00463-421 82X4 Res. Network, SIP, 1/4W,2% (Isolated)
N 502 4-00334-425 10KX5 Resistor Network SIP 1/4W 2% (Common)
N 503 4-00333-421 10KX5 Res. Network, SIP, 1/4W,2% (Isolated)
N 601 4-00767-420 270X8 Resistor Network, DIP, 1/4W,2%,8 Ind
N 602 4-00334-425 10KX5 Resistor Network SIP 1/4W 2% (Common)

9-16
 Parts List
Ref. SRS Part No. Value Description
N 603 4-00463-421 82X4 Res. Network, SIP, 1/4W,2% (Isolated)
N 604 4-00463-421 82X4 Res. Network, SIP, 1/4W,2% (Isolated)
PC1 7-00356-701 L/I DIGITAL Printed Circuit Board
Q 101 3-00021-325 2N3904 Transistor, TO-92 Package
Q 102 3-00022-325 2N3906 Transistor, TO-92 Package
Q 201 3-00021-325 2N3904 Transistor, TO-92 Package
R 102 4-00022-401 1.0M Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 103 4-00130-407 1.00K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 114 4-00056-401 22 Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 115 4-00142-407 100K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 116 4-00192-407 49.9K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 117 4-00192-407 49.9K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 118 4-00193-407 499 Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 119 4-00522-407 243 Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 120 4-00074-401 33K Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 121 4-00034-401 10K Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 130 4-00598-407 127K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 131 4-00383-407 12.7K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 132 4-00768-407 1.27K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 133 4-00204-407 750 Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 140 4-00025-401 1.2M Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 141 4-00598-407 127K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 142 4-00383-407 12.7K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 143 4-00768-407 1.27K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 156 4-00030-401 10 Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 157 4-00030-401 10 Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 170 4-00062-401 270 Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 171 4-00142-407 100K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 172 4-00105-401 910K Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 173 4-00292-401 1.1K Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 174 4-00021-401 1.0K Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 175 4-00398-407 499K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 176 4-00130-407 1.00K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 177 4-00193-407 499 Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 178 4-00130-407 1.00K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 180 4-00781-402 56 Resistor, Carbon Comp, 1/2W, 5%
R 181 4-00781-402 56 Resistor, Carbon Comp, 1/2W, 5%
R 201 4-00177-407 3.48K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 202 4-00177-407 3.48K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 203 4-00771-407 66.5 Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 204 4-00163-407 2.80K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 205 4-00409-408 1.210K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 0.1%, 25ppm
R 206 4-00409-408 1.210K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 0.1%, 25ppm
R 207 4-00467-407 2.43K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 208 4-00193-407 499 Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 209 4-00158-407 2.00K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 210 4-00409-408 1.210K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 0.1%, 25ppm
R 211 4-00409-408 1.210K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 0.1%, 25ppm
R 212 4-00746-407 2.05K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM

9-17
 Parts List
Ref. SRS Part No. Value Description
R 213 4-00317-407 422 Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 214 4-00652-407 1.58K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 215 4-00409-408 1.210K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 0.1%, 25ppm
R 216 4-00409-408 1.210K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 0.1%, 25ppm
R 217 4-00523-407 649 Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 221 4-00130-407 1.00K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 222 4-00188-407 4.99K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 226 4-00782-448 54.9 Resistor, Metal Film, 1W, 1%,
R 227 4-00193-407 499 Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 228 4-00704-407 54.9 Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 231 4-00519-407 4.75K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 232 4-00467-407 2.43K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 237 4-00787-407 768 Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 238 4-00031-401 100 Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 239 4-00062-401 270 Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 240 4-00022-401 1.0M Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 250 4-00772-402 33 Resistor, Carbon Comp, 1/2W, 5%
R 251 4-00772-402 33 Resistor, Carbon Comp, 1/2W, 5%
R 280 4-00781-402 56 Resistor, Carbon Comp, 1/2W, 5%
R 281 4-00781-402 56 Resistor, Carbon Comp, 1/2W, 5%
R 290 4-00071-401 33 Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 301 4-00027-401 1.5K Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 302 4-00273-401 5.6K Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 303 4-00027-401 1.5K Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 304 4-00273-401 5.6K Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 381 4-00475-407 2.61K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 382 4-00475-407 2.61K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 383 4-00706-407 237 Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 384 4-00706-407 237 Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 385 4-00795-412 24 Resistor, Carbon Film 1/2W 5%
R 386 4-00795-412 24 Resistor, Carbon Film 1/2W 5%
R 387 4-00215-407 909 Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 388 4-00215-407 909 Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 389 4-00706-407 237 Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 390 4-00706-407 237 Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 401 4-00234-407 10 Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 402 4-00174-407 280 Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 450 4-00056-401 22 Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 451 4-00030-401 10 Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 452 4-00056-401 22 Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 453 4-00030-401 10 Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 470 4-00031-401 100 Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 471 4-00031-401 100 Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 503 4-00034-401 10K Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 601 4-00034-401 10K Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 602 4-00062-401 270 Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 603 4-00021-401 1.0K Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 604 4-00034-401 10K Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 611 4-00062-401 270 Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%

9-18
 Parts List
Ref. SRS Part No. Value Description
RX623 4-00053-401 200 Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
T 201 6-00137-601 15MH Inductor
TP101 1-00143-101 TEST JACK Vertical Test Jack
TP102 1-00143-101 TEST JACK Vertical Test Jack
TP103 1-00143-101 TEST JACK Vertical Test Jack
TP104 1-00143-101 TEST JACK Vertical Test Jack
TP105 1-00143-101 TEST JACK Vertical Test Jack
TP106 1-00143-101 TEST JACK Vertical Test Jack
TP107 1-00143-101 TEST JACK Vertical Test Jack
TP108 1-00143-101 TEST JACK Vertical Test Jack
TP201 1-00143-101 TEST JACK Vertical Test Jack
TP202 1-00143-101 TEST JACK Vertical Test Jack
TP203 1-00143-101 TEST JACK Vertical Test Jack
TP204 1-00143-101 TEST JACK Vertical Test Jack
TP301 1-00143-101 TEST JACK Vertical Test Jack
TP302 1-00143-101 TEST JACK Vertical Test Jack
TP303 1-00143-101 TEST JACK Vertical Test Jack
TP304 1-00143-101 TEST JACK Vertical Test Jack
TP401 1-00143-101 TEST JACK Vertical Test Jack
TP402 1-00143-101 TEST JACK Vertical Test Jack
TP403 1-00143-101 TEST JACK Vertical Test Jack
TP404 1-00143-101 TEST JACK Vertical Test Jack
TP501 1-00143-101 TEST JACK Vertical Test Jack
TP502 1-00143-101 TEST JACK Vertical Test Jack
U 101 3-00461-340 OPA2604 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 102 3-00461-340 OPA2604 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 103 3-00211-340 LT1016 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 104 3-00262-340 74HC86 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 105 3-00160-340 74HC4046 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 106 3-00402-340 74HC4052 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 107 3-00461-340 OPA2604 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 110 3-00437-340 AD9696KN Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 111 6-00110-621 30.208 MHZ Crystal Oscillator
U 120 3-00238-340 74F74 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 121 3-00238-340 74F74 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 122 3-00182-340 74HC02 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 180 3-00116-325 78L05 Transistor, TO-92 Package
U 181 3-00122-325 79L05 Transistor, TO-92 Package
U 201 3-00130-340 5532A Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 202 3-00130-340 5532A Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 203 3-00130-340 5532A Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 205 3-00130-340 5532A Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 206 3-00058-340 AD7524 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 207 3-00383-340 LM6321 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 208 3-00461-340 OPA2604 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 209 3-00211-340 LT1016 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 210 3-00262-340 74HC86 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 280 3-00116-325 78L05 Transistor, TO-92 Package
U 281 3-00122-325 79L05 Transistor, TO-92 Package

9-19
 Parts List
Ref. SRS Part No. Value Description
U 301 3-00087-340 LF347 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 302 3-00087-340 LF347 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 303 3-00088-340 LF353 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 380 3-00149-329 LM317T Voltage Reg., TO-220 (TAB) Package
U 381 3-00141-329 LM337T Voltage Reg., TO-220 (TAB) Package
U 382 3-00149-329 LM317T Voltage Reg., TO-220 (TAB) Package
U 383 3-00141-329 LM337T Voltage Reg., TO-220 (TAB) Package
U 401 3-00328-340 PCM1700P Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 402 3-00328-340 PCM1700P Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 403 3-00270-340 74HC4051 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 404 3-00385-340 74HC4053 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 501 3-00611-360 DSP56002FC-40 Integrated Circuit (Surface Mount Pkg)
U 502 3-00265-340 74HC595 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 503 3-00265-340 74HC595 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 504 3-00488-340 74HC597 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 505 3-00488-340 74HC597 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 601 3-00495-343 SR850 U601 GAL/PAL, I.C.
U 602 3-00496-343 SR850 U602 GAL/PAL, I.C.
U 603 3-00497-343 SR850 U603 GAL/PAL, I.C.
U 604 3-00498-343 SR850 U604 GAL/PAL, I.C.
U 606 3-00499-343 SR850 U606 GAL/PAL, I.C.
U 608 3-00411-340 74HC273 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 609 3-00411-340 74HC273 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 610 3-00387-340 74HC245 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 611 3-00440-340 74HC573 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 612 3-00440-340 74HC573 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 613 3-00440-340 74HC573 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 614 3-00038-340 74HC139 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 621 3-00441-340 74HC113 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 622 3-00491-340 UPD71054C Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 623 3-00036-340 74HC00 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 630 3-00049-340 74HC74 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
Z0 0-00012-007 TO-220 Heat Sinks
Z0 0-00043-011 4-40 KEP Nut, Kep
Z0 0-00373-000 CARD EJECTOR Hardware, Misc.
Z0 0-00388-000 RCA PHONO Hardware, Misc.
Z0 0-00438-021 4-40X5/16PP Screw, Panhead Phillips

Analog Input Board Parts List

Ref. SRS Part No. Value Description
C 102 5-00183-535 .1U - 2% Capacitor, Polypropylene
C 103 5-00183-535 .1U - 2% Capacitor, Polypropylene
C 104 5-00159-501 6.8P Capacitor, Ceramic Disc, 50V, 10%, SL
C 106 5-00100-517 2.2U Capacitor, Tantalum, 35V, 20%, Rad
C 111 5-00023-529 .1U Cap, Monolythic Ceramic, 50V, 20%, Z5U
C 150 5-00098-517 10U Capacitor, Tantalum, 35V, 20%, Rad
C 151 5-00098-517 10U Capacitor, Tantalum, 35V, 20%, Rad
C 152 5-00023-529 .1U Cap, Monolythic Ceramic, 50V, 20%, Z5U

9-20
 Parts List
Ref. SRS Part No. Value Description
C 153 5-00023-529 .1U Cap, Monolythic Ceramic, 50V, 20%, Z5U
C 180 5-00038-509 10U Capacitor, Electrolytic, 50V, 20%, Rad
C 181 5-00038-509 10U Capacitor, Electrolytic, 50V, 20%, Rad
C 182 5-00100-517 2.2U Capacitor, Tantalum, 35V, 20%, Rad
C 183 5-00100-517 2.2U Capacitor, Tantalum, 35V, 20%, Rad
C 201 5-00060-512 1.0U Cap, Stacked Metal Film 50V 5% -40/+85c
C 202 5-00060-512 1.0U Cap, Stacked Metal Film 50V 5% -40/+85c
C 221 5-00060-512 1.0U Cap, Stacked Metal Film 50V 5% -40/+85c
C 222 5-00060-512 1.0U Cap, Stacked Metal Film 50V 5% -40/+85c
C 225 5-00007-501 220P Capacitor, Ceramic Disc, 50V, 10%, SL
C 261 5-00023-529 .1U Cap, Monolythic Ceramic, 50V, 20%, Z5U
C 281 5-00023-529 .1U Cap, Monolythic Ceramic, 50V, 20%, Z5U
C 282 5-00023-529 .1U Cap, Monolythic Ceramic, 50V, 20%, Z5U
C 303 5-00002-501 100P Capacitor, Ceramic Disc, 50V, 10%, SL
C 311 5-00148-545 1000P - 50V Capacitor, Monolythic Ceramic, COG, 1%
C 312 5-00148-545 1000P - 50V Capacitor, Monolythic Ceramic, COG, 1%
C 321 5-00148-545 1000P - 50V Capacitor, Monolythic Ceramic, COG, 1%
C 322 5-00148-545 1000P - 50V Capacitor, Monolythic Ceramic, COG, 1%
C 331 5-00148-545 1000P - 50V Capacitor, Monolythic Ceramic, COG, 1%
C 332 5-00148-545 1000P - 50V Capacitor, Monolythic Ceramic, COG, 1%
C 341 5-00148-545 1000P - 50V Capacitor, Monolythic Ceramic, COG, 1%
C 342 5-00148-545 1000P - 50V Capacitor, Monolythic Ceramic, COG, 1%
C 351 5-00148-545 1000P - 50V Capacitor, Monolythic Ceramic, COG, 1%
C 361 5-00219-529 .01U Cap, Monolythic Ceramic, 50V, 20%, Z5U
C 362 0-00772-000 1.5" WIRE Hardware, Misc.
C 363 5-00022-501 .001U Capacitor, Ceramic Disc, 50V, 10%, SL
C 371 5-00148-545 1000P - 50V Capacitor, Monolythic Ceramic, COG, 1%
C 372 5-00148-545 1000P - 50V Capacitor, Monolythic Ceramic, COG, 1%
C 381 5-00148-545 1000P - 50V Capacitor, Monolythic Ceramic, COG, 1%
C 382 5-00148-545 1000P - 50V Capacitor, Monolythic Ceramic, COG, 1%
C 386 5-00013-501 33P Capacitor, Ceramic Disc, 50V, 10%, SL
C 390 5-00148-545 1000P - 50V Capacitor, Monolythic Ceramic, COG, 1%
C 391 5-00023-529 .1U Cap, Monolythic Ceramic, 50V, 20%, Z5U
C 392 5-00023-529 .1U Cap, Monolythic Ceramic, 50V, 20%, Z5U
C 393 5-00023-529 .1U Cap, Monolythic Ceramic, 50V, 20%, Z5U
C 394 5-00023-529 .1U Cap, Monolythic Ceramic, 50V, 20%, Z5U
C 395 5-00023-529 .1U Cap, Monolythic Ceramic, 50V, 20%, Z5U
C 396 5-00023-529 .1U Cap, Monolythic Ceramic, 50V, 20%, Z5U
C 397 5-00023-529 .1U Cap, Monolythic Ceramic, 50V, 20%, Z5U
C 398 5-00023-529 .1U Cap, Monolythic Ceramic, 50V, 20%, Z5U
C 410 5-00023-529 .1U Cap, Monolythic Ceramic, 50V, 20%, Z5U
C 411 5-00098-517 10U Capacitor, Tantalum, 35V, 20%, Rad
C 414 5-00098-517 10U Capacitor, Tantalum, 35V, 20%, Rad
C 430 5-00100-517 2.2U Capacitor, Tantalum, 35V, 20%, Rad
C 431 5-00100-517 2.2U Capacitor, Tantalum, 35V, 20%, Rad
C 456 5-00023-529 .1U Cap, Monolythic Ceramic, 50V, 20%, Z5U
C 460 5-00023-529 .1U Cap, Monolythic Ceramic, 50V, 20%, Z5U
C 461 5-00023-529 .1U Cap, Monolythic Ceramic, 50V, 20%, Z5U
C 462 5-00023-529 .1U Cap, Monolythic Ceramic, 50V, 20%, Z5U

9-21
 Parts List
Ref. SRS Part No. Value Description
C 463 5-00023-529 .1U Cap, Monolythic Ceramic, 50V, 20%, Z5U
C 480 5-00098-517 10U Capacitor, Tantalum, 35V, 20%, Rad
C 481 5-00098-517 10U Capacitor, Tantalum, 35V, 20%, Rad
C 482 5-00098-517 10U Capacitor, Tantalum, 35V, 20%, Rad
C 483 5-00098-517 10U Capacitor, Tantalum, 35V, 20%, Rad
C 511 5-00100-517 2.2U Capacitor, Tantalum, 35V, 20%, Rad
C 512 5-00100-517 2.2U Capacitor, Tantalum, 35V, 20%, Rad
C 513 5-00100-517 2.2U Capacitor, Tantalum, 35V, 20%, Rad
C 514 5-00100-517 2.2U Capacitor, Tantalum, 35V, 20%, Rad
C 515 5-00098-517 10U Capacitor, Tantalum, 35V, 20%, Rad
C 516 5-00023-529 .1U Cap, Monolythic Ceramic, 50V, 20%, Z5U
C 517 5-00023-529 .1U Cap, Monolythic Ceramic, 50V, 20%, Z5U
C 520 5-00100-517 2.2U Capacitor, Tantalum, 35V, 20%, Rad
C 521 5-00100-517 2.2U Capacitor, Tantalum, 35V, 20%, Rad
C 523 5-00100-517 2.2U Capacitor, Tantalum, 35V, 20%, Rad
C 524 5-00100-517 2.2U Capacitor, Tantalum, 35V, 20%, Rad
C 530 5-00100-517 2.2U Capacitor, Tantalum, 35V, 20%, Rad
C 531 5-00100-517 2.2U Capacitor, Tantalum, 35V, 20%, Rad
C 540 5-00100-517 2.2U Capacitor, Tantalum, 35V, 20%, Rad
C 560 5-00100-517 2.2U Capacitor, Tantalum, 35V, 20%, Rad
C 561 5-00100-517 2.2U Capacitor, Tantalum, 35V, 20%, Rad
C 562 5-00100-517 2.2U Capacitor, Tantalum, 35V, 20%, Rad
D 101 3-00489-301 1N5232 Diode
D 180 3-00004-301 1N4148 Diode
D 181 3-00004-301 1N4148 Diode
D 480 3-00004-301 1N4148 Diode
D 481 3-00004-301 1N4148 Diode
J 101 0-00388-000 RCA PHONO Hardware, Misc.
J 102 0-00388-000 RCA PHONO Hardware, Misc.
JP201 1-00006-130 2 PIN DI Connector, Male
JP221 1-00006-130 2 PIN DI Connector, Male
JP401 1-00184-130 32 PIN DIL Connector, Male
K 101 3-00196-335 HS-212S-5 Relay
K 102 3-00444-335 BS-211-DC5 GF Relay
K 103 3-00444-335 BS-211-DC5 GF Relay
K 104 3-00196-335 HS-212S-5 Relay
K 105 3-00444-335 BS-211-DC5 GF Relay
L 501 6-00006-602 33U Inductor, Radial
N 101 4-00560-421 47KX3 Res. Network, SIP, 1/4W,2% (Isolated)
N 102 4-00244-421 10KX4 Res. Network, SIP, 1/4W,2% (Isolated)
N 103 4-00497-421 1.5KX4 Res. Network, SIP, 1/4W,2% (Isolated)
N 261 4-00560-421 47KX3 Res. Network, SIP, 1/4W,2% (Isolated)
N 401 4-00756-421 1.0MX4 Res. Network, SIP, 1/4W,2% (Isolated)
N 402 4-00757-421 220KX4 Res. Network, SIP, 1/4W,2% (Isolated)
N 403 4-00756-421 1.0MX4 Res. Network, SIP, 1/4W,2% (Isolated)
N 404 4-00757-421 220KX4 Res. Network, SIP, 1/4W,2% (Isolated)
N 405 4-00694-421 270X4 Res. Network, SIP, 1/4W,2% (Isolated)
N 406 4-00694-421 270X4 Res. Network, SIP, 1/4W,2% (Isolated)
N 501 4-00758-425 15KX5 Resistor Network SIP 1/4W 2% (Common)

9-22
 Parts List
Ref. SRS Part No. Value Description
P 101 4-00015-445 100K Pot, Multi-Turn, Side Adjust
P 102 4-00354-445 20 Pot, Multi-Turn, Side Adjust
P 103 4-00015-445 100K Pot, Multi-Turn, Side Adjust
P 201 4-00759-445 50 Pot, Multi-Turn, Side Adjust
P 202 4-00760-445 500 Pot, Multi-Turn, Side Adjust
P 221 4-00730-445 100 Pot, Multi-Turn, Side Adjust
P 222 4-00760-445 500 Pot, Multi-Turn, Side Adjust
PC1 7-00355-701 L/I ANALOG Printed Circuit Board
R 101 4-00021-401 1.0K Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 102 4-00131-407 1.00M Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 103 4-00306-407 100M Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 104 4-00034-401 10K Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 106 4-00191-407 49.9 Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 107 4-00191-407 49.9 Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 108 4-00139-407 10.0M Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 109 4-00139-407 10.0M Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 110 4-00143-407 102K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 111 4-00689-408 2.150K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 0.1%, 25ppm
R 114 4-00217-408 1.000K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 0.1%, 25ppm
R 115 4-00735-408 357 Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 0.1%, 25ppm
R 119 4-00217-408 1.000K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 0.1%, 25ppm
R 120 4-00735-408 357 Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 0.1%, 25ppm
R 123 4-00143-407 102K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 124 4-00689-408 2.150K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 0.1%, 25ppm
R 125 4-00030-401 10 Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 126 4-00142-407 100K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 127 4-00142-407 100K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 129 4-00130-407 1.00K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 130 4-00192-407 49.9K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 131 4-00034-401 10K Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 132 4-00396-407 374K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 133 4-00059-401 22K Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 140 4-00030-401 10 Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 141 4-00059-401 22K Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 150 4-00089-401 56 Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 151 4-00089-401 56 Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 180 4-00030-401 10 Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 181 4-00030-401 10 Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 201 4-00198-407 6.65K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 202 4-00761-407 287 Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 203 4-00762-407 158 Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 204 4-00763-407 14.0K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 205 4-00321-407 1.74K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 207 4-00380-407 6.34K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 208 4-00556-407 2.94K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 221 4-00595-407 13.3K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 222 4-00663-407 576 Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 223 4-00322-407 316 Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 224 4-00732-407 28.0K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM

9-23
 Parts List
Ref. SRS Part No. Value Description
R 225 4-00321-407 1.74K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 226 4-00158-407 2.00K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 227 4-00158-407 2.00K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 228 4-00158-407 2.00K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 241 4-00380-407 6.34K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 242 4-00556-407 2.94K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 244 4-00380-407 6.34K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 245 4-00556-407 2.94K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 246 4-00380-407 6.34K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 247 4-00556-407 2.94K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 249 4-00380-407 6.34K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 252 4-00556-407 2.94K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 261 4-00138-407 10.0K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 262 4-00138-407 10.0K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 299 4-00059-401 22K Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 301 4-00066-401 3.3M Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 302 4-00130-407 1.00K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 303 4-00130-407 1.00K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 304 4-00158-407 2.00K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 305 4-00164-407 20.0K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 306 4-00158-407 2.00K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 307 4-00217-408 1.000K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 0.1%, 25ppm
R 308 4-00217-408 1.000K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 0.1%, 25ppm
R 309 4-00130-407 1.00K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 311 4-00348-407 2.21K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 312 4-00765-407 56.2 Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 313 4-00475-407 2.61K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 314 4-00748-408 2.000K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 0.1%, 25ppm
R 315 4-00748-408 2.000K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 0.1%, 25ppm
R 321 4-00467-407 2.43K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 322 4-00698-407 357 Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 323 4-00582-407 2.15K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 324 4-00748-408 2.000K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 0.1%, 25ppm
R 325 4-00748-408 2.000K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 0.1%, 25ppm
R 331 4-00159-407 2.10K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 332 4-00429-407 511 Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 333 4-00136-407 1.82K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 334 4-00748-408 2.000K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 0.1%, 25ppm
R 335 4-00748-408 2.000K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 0.1%, 25ppm
R 341 4-00137-407 1.91K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 342 4-00583-407 309 Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 343 4-00699-407 1.54K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 344 4-00748-408 2.000K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 0.1%, 25ppm
R 345 4-00748-408 2.000K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 0.1%, 25ppm
R 351 4-00200-407 619 Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 361 4-00234-407 10 Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 363 4-00188-407 4.99K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 364 4-00164-407 20.0K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 365 4-00139-407 10.0M Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM

9-24
 Parts List
Ref. SRS Part No. Value Description
R 371 4-00763-407 14.0K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 372 4-00700-407 1.62K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 373 4-00763-407 14.0K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 374 4-00158-407 2.00K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 375 4-00158-407 2.00K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 379 4-00303-407 7.87K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 381 4-00156-407 16.2K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 382 4-00202-407 698 Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 383 4-00595-407 13.3K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 384 4-00158-407 2.00K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 385 4-00158-407 2.00K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 386 4-00185-407 4.02K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 387 4-00141-407 100 Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 388 4-00021-401 1.0K Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 389 4-00130-407 1.00K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 391 4-00030-401 10 Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 392 4-00030-401 10 Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 393 4-00030-401 10 Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 394 4-00030-401 10 Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 395 4-00130-407 1.00K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 396 4-00138-407 10.0K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 397 4-00138-407 10.0K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 398 4-00059-401 22K Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 430 4-00021-401 1.0K Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 431 4-00021-401 1.0K Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 452 4-00141-407 100 Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 460 4-00030-401 10 Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 461 4-00030-401 10 Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 462 4-00030-401 10 Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 463 4-00030-401 10 Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 480 4-00108-402 150 Resistor, Carbon Comp, 1/2W, 5%
R 481 4-00108-402 150 Resistor, Carbon Comp, 1/2W, 5%
R 511 4-00475-407 2.61K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 512 4-00706-407 237 Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 513 4-00475-407 2.61K Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 514 4-00706-407 237 Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 515 4-00359-402 51 Resistor, Carbon Comp, 1/2W, 5%
R 516 4-00359-402 51 Resistor, Carbon Comp, 1/2W, 5%
R 517 4-00215-407 909 Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 518 4-00706-407 237 Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 519 4-00215-407 909 Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 520 4-00706-407 237 Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 540 4-00141-407 100 Resistor, Metal Film, 1/8W, 1%, 50PPM
R 560 4-00056-401 22 Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
SO101 1-00173-150 8 PIN MACH Socket, THRU-HOLE
SO102 1-00173-150 8 PIN MACH Socket, THRU-HOLE
SO108 1-00173-150 8 PIN MACH Socket, THRU-HOLE
SO361 1-00173-150 8 PIN MACH Socket, THRU-HOLE
TP101 1-00143-101 TEST JACK Vertical Test Jack

9-25
 Parts List
Ref. SRS Part No. Value Description
TP102 1-00143-101 TEST JACK Vertical Test Jack
TP103 1-00143-101 TEST JACK Vertical Test Jack
TP104 1-00143-101 TEST JACK Vertical Test Jack
TP201 1-00143-101 TEST JACK Vertical Test Jack
TP301 1-00143-101 TEST JACK Vertical Test Jack
TP302 1-00143-101 TEST JACK Vertical Test Jack
TP303 1-00143-101 TEST JACK Vertical Test Jack
TP405 1-00143-101 TEST JACK Vertical Test Jack
TP406 1-00143-101 TEST JACK Vertical Test Jack
TP407 1-00143-101 TEST JACK Vertical Test Jack
TP408 1-00143-101 TEST JACK Vertical Test Jack
TP501 1-00143-101 TEST JACK Vertical Test Jack
TP502 1-00143-101 TEST JACK Vertical Test Jack
TP503 1-00143-101 TEST JACK Vertical Test Jack
TP504 1-00143-101 TEST JACK Vertical Test Jack
TP505 1-00143-101 TEST JACK Vertical Test Jack
TP506 1-00143-101 TEST JACK Vertical Test Jack
TP507 1-00143-101 TEST JACK Vertical Test Jack
U 101 3-00494-340 AD645JN Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 102 3-00246-340 NPD5564 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 103 3-00423-340 5534 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 104 3-00143-340 LM393 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 105 3-00461-340 OPA2604 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 106 3-00143-340 LM393 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 108 3-00817-340 NPD5566 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 109 3-00461-340 OPA2604 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 180 3-00118-325 78L15 Transistor, TO-92 Package
U 181 3-00124-325 79L15 Transistor, TO-92 Package
U 201 3-00461-340 OPA2604 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 202 3-00385-340 74HC4053 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 203 3-00423-340 5534 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 204 3-00423-340 5534 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 241 3-00385-340 74HC4053 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 242 3-00423-340 5534 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 243 3-00385-340 74HC4053 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 244 3-00423-340 5534 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 261 3-00143-340 LM393 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 301 3-00130-340 5532A Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 302 3-00385-340 74HC4053 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 303 3-00130-340 5532A Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 304 3-00130-340 5532A Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 305 3-00143-340 LM393 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 311 3-00130-340 5532A Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 321 3-00130-340 5532A Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 331 3-00130-340 5532A Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 341 3-00130-340 5532A Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 361 3-00089-340 LF357 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 362 3-00089-340 LF357 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 371 3-00130-340 5532A Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)

9-26
 Parts List
Ref. SRS Part No. Value Description
U 381 3-00130-340 5532A Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 386 3-00423-340 5534 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 391 3-00088-340 LF353 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 401 3-00087-340 LF347 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 402 3-00402-340 74HC4052 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 403 3-00423-340 5534 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 406 3-00155-340 74HC04 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 407 3-00392-340 PCM1750P Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 480 3-00116-325 78L05 Transistor, TO-92 Package
U 481 3-00122-325 79L05 Transistor, TO-92 Package
U 504 3-00411-340 74HC273 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 506 3-00411-340 74HC273 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 508 3-00149-329 LM317T Voltage Reg., TO-220 (TAB) Package
U 509 3-00141-329 LM337T Voltage Reg., TO-220 (TAB) Package
U 510 3-00149-329 LM317T Voltage Reg., TO-220 (TAB) Package
U 511 3-00141-329 LM337T Voltage Reg., TO-220 (TAB) Package
U 530 3-00195-340 CA3082 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
Z0 0-00043-011 4-40 KEP Nut, Kep
Z0 0-00187-021 4-40X1/4PP Screw, Panhead Phillips
Z0 0-00243-003 TO-220 Insulators
Z0 0-00373-000 CARD EJECTOR Hardware, Misc.
Z0 1-00087-131 2 PIN JUMPER Connector, Female

CPU Board Parts List

Ref. SRS Part No. Value Description
BT701 6-00001-612 BR-2/3A 2PIN PC Battery
C 101 5-00177-501 30P Capacitor, Ceramic Disc, 50V, 10%, SL
C 102 5-00215-501 20P Capacitor, Ceramic Disc, 50V, 10%, SL
C 103 0-00772-000 1.5" WIRE Hardware, Misc.
C 501 5-00215-501 20P Capacitor, Ceramic Disc, 50V, 10%, SL
C 601 5-00033-520 47U Capacitor, Electrolytic, 16V, 20%, Rad
C 602 5-00012-501 330P Capacitor, Ceramic Disc, 50V, 10%, SL
C 603 5-00012-501 330P Capacitor, Ceramic Disc, 50V, 10%, SL
C 701 5-00064-513 .0047U Capacitor, Mylar/Poly, 50V, 5%, Rad
C 704 5-00012-501 330P Capacitor, Ceramic Disc, 50V, 10%, SL
C 705 5-00012-501 330P Capacitor, Ceramic Disc, 50V, 10%, SL
C 706 5-00061-513 .001U Capacitor, Mylar/Poly, 50V, 5%, Rad
C 801 5-00178-501 62P Capacitor, Ceramic Disc, 50V, 10%, SL
C 802 5-00178-501 62P Capacitor, Ceramic Disc, 50V, 10%, SL
C 803 5-00100-517 2.2U Capacitor, Tantalum, 35V, 20%, Rad
C 804 5-00225-548 .1U AXIAL Capacitor, Ceramic, 50V,+80/-20% Z5U AX
C 805 5-00100-517 2.2U Capacitor, Tantalum, 35V, 20%, Rad
C 806 5-00100-517 2.2U Capacitor, Tantalum, 35V, 20%, Rad
C 807 5-00100-517 2.2U Capacitor, Tantalum, 35V, 20%, Rad
C 808 5-00100-517 2.2U Capacitor, Tantalum, 35V, 20%, Rad
C 810 5-00023-529 .1U Cap, Monolythic Ceramic, 50V, 20%, Z5U
C 811 5-00232-520 470U Capacitor, Electrolytic, 16V, 20%, Rad
C 901 5-00003-501 10P Capacitor, Ceramic Disc, 50V, 10%, SL

9-27
 Parts List
Ref. SRS Part No. Value Description
C 902 5-00003-501 10P Capacitor, Ceramic Disc, 50V, 10%, SL
C 903 5-00061-513 .001U Capacitor, Mylar/Poly, 50V, 5%, Rad
C 904 5-00223-513 .027U Capacitor, Mylar/Poly, 50V, 5%, Rad
C 905 5-00068-513 .047U Capacitor, Mylar/Poly, 50V, 5%, Rad
C 906 5-00061-513 .001U Capacitor, Mylar/Poly, 50V, 5%, Rad
C 907 5-00012-501 330P Capacitor, Ceramic Disc, 50V, 10%, SL
C 908 5-00012-501 330P Capacitor, Ceramic Disc, 50V, 10%, SL
C 909 5-00178-501 62P Capacitor, Ceramic Disc, 50V, 10%, SL
C 910 5-00178-501 62P Capacitor, Ceramic Disc, 50V, 10%, SL
C 1001 5-00225-548 .1U AXIAL Capacitor, Ceramic, 50V,+80/-20% Z5U AX
C 1002 5-00225-548 .1U AXIAL Capacitor, Ceramic, 50V,+80/-20% Z5U AX
C 1003 5-00225-548 .1U AXIAL Capacitor, Ceramic, 50V,+80/-20% Z5U AX
C 1004 5-00225-548 .1U AXIAL Capacitor, Ceramic, 50V,+80/-20% Z5U AX
C 1005 5-00100-517 2.2U Capacitor, Tantalum, 35V, 20%, Rad
C 1006 5-00225-548 .1U AXIAL Capacitor, Ceramic, 50V,+80/-20% Z5U AX
C 1007 5-00225-548 .1U AXIAL Capacitor, Ceramic, 50V,+80/-20% Z5U AX
C 1008 5-00225-548 .1U AXIAL Capacitor, Ceramic, 50V,+80/-20% Z5U AX
C 1009 5-00225-548 .1U AXIAL Capacitor, Ceramic, 50V,+80/-20% Z5U AX
C 1010 5-00225-548 .1U AXIAL Capacitor, Ceramic, 50V,+80/-20% Z5U AX
C 1011 5-00225-548 .1U AXIAL Capacitor, Ceramic, 50V,+80/-20% Z5U AX
C 1012 5-00225-548 .1U AXIAL Capacitor, Ceramic, 50V,+80/-20% Z5U AX
C 1013 5-00225-548 .1U AXIAL Capacitor, Ceramic, 50V,+80/-20% Z5U AX
C 1014 5-00100-517 2.2U Capacitor, Tantalum, 35V, 20%, Rad
C 1015 5-00225-548 .1U AXIAL Capacitor, Ceramic, 50V,+80/-20% Z5U AX
C 1016 5-00225-548 .1U AXIAL Capacitor, Ceramic, 50V,+80/-20% Z5U AX
C 1017 5-00225-548 .1U AXIAL Capacitor, Ceramic, 50V,+80/-20% Z5U AX
C 1018 5-00225-548 .1U AXIAL Capacitor, Ceramic, 50V,+80/-20% Z5U AX
C 1019 5-00225-548 .1U AXIAL Capacitor, Ceramic, 50V,+80/-20% Z5U AX
C 1020 5-00225-548 .1U AXIAL Capacitor, Ceramic, 50V,+80/-20% Z5U AX
C 1021 5-00225-548 .1U AXIAL Capacitor, Ceramic, 50V,+80/-20% Z5U AX
C 1022 5-00225-548 .1U AXIAL Capacitor, Ceramic, 50V,+80/-20% Z5U AX
C 1023 5-00100-517 2.2U Capacitor, Tantalum, 35V, 20%, Rad
C 1024 5-00225-548 .1U AXIAL Capacitor, Ceramic, 50V,+80/-20% Z5U AX
C 1025 5-00225-548 .1U AXIAL Capacitor, Ceramic, 50V,+80/-20% Z5U AX
C 1026 5-00100-517 2.2U Capacitor, Tantalum, 35V, 20%, Rad
C 1027 5-00225-548 .1U AXIAL Capacitor, Ceramic, 50V,+80/-20% Z5U AX
C 1028 5-00225-548 .1U AXIAL Capacitor, Ceramic, 50V,+80/-20% Z5U AX
C 1029 5-00225-548 .1U AXIAL Capacitor, Ceramic, 50V,+80/-20% Z5U AX
C 1030 5-00225-548 .1U AXIAL Capacitor, Ceramic, 50V,+80/-20% Z5U AX
C 1031 5-00225-548 .1U AXIAL Capacitor, Ceramic, 50V,+80/-20% Z5U AX
C 1032 5-00225-548 .1U AXIAL Capacitor, Ceramic, 50V,+80/-20% Z5U AX
C 1033 5-00225-548 .1U AXIAL Capacitor, Ceramic, 50V,+80/-20% Z5U AX
C 1034 5-00225-548 .1U AXIAL Capacitor, Ceramic, 50V,+80/-20% Z5U AX
C 1035 5-00225-548 .1U AXIAL Capacitor, Ceramic, 50V,+80/-20% Z5U AX
C 1036 5-00225-548 .1U AXIAL Capacitor, Ceramic, 50V,+80/-20% Z5U AX
C 1037 5-00225-548 .1U AXIAL Capacitor, Ceramic, 50V,+80/-20% Z5U AX
C 1038 5-00100-517 2.2U Capacitor, Tantalum, 35V, 20%, Rad
C 1039 5-00225-548 .1U AXIAL Capacitor, Ceramic, 50V,+80/-20% Z5U AX
C 1040 5-00225-548 .1U AXIAL Capacitor, Ceramic, 50V,+80/-20% Z5U AX

9-28
 Parts List
Ref. SRS Part No. Value Description
C 1041 5-00225-548 .1U AXIAL Capacitor, Ceramic, 50V,+80/-20% Z5U AX
C 1042 5-00100-517 2.2U Capacitor, Tantalum, 35V, 20%, Rad
C 1043 5-00225-548 .1U AXIAL Capacitor, Ceramic, 50V,+80/-20% Z5U AX
C 1044 5-00225-548 .1U AXIAL Capacitor, Ceramic, 50V,+80/-20% Z5U AX
CU901 5-00114-501 200P Capacitor, Ceramic Disc, 50V, 10%, SL
D 100 3-00391-301 MBR360 Diode
D 401 3-00004-301 1N4148 Diode
D 601 3-00004-301 1N4148 Diode
D 602 3-00004-301 1N4148 Diode
D 603 3-00004-301 1N4148 Diode
D 604 3-00004-301 1N4148 Diode
D 605 3-00004-301 1N4148 Diode
D 606 3-00004-301 1N4148 Diode
D 607 3-00004-301 1N4148 Diode
D 608 3-00004-301 1N4148 Diode
D 701 3-00203-301 1N5711 Diode
D 702 3-00004-301 1N4148 Diode
D 703 3-00004-301 1N4148 Diode
D 704 3-00004-301 1N4148 Diode
D 705 3-00004-301 1N4148 Diode
D 810 3-00820-301 1N5228B Diode
JP201 0-00772-000 1.5" WIRE Hardware, Misc.
JP301 0-00772-000 1.5" WIRE Hardware, Misc.
JP302 0-00772-000 1.5" WIRE Hardware, Misc.
JP303 0-00772-000 1.5" WIRE Hardware, Misc.
JP601 1-00113-100 DIN 5 Connector, Misc.
JP602 1-00207-133 30 PIN DRA Connector, Male, Right Angle
JP603 0-00772-000 1.5" WIRE Hardware, Misc.
JP702 1-00083-130 26 PIN DIL Connector, Male
JP801 1-00035-130 20 PIN DIL Connector, Male
JP802 0-00772-000 1.5" WIRE Hardware, Misc.
JP803 1-00086-130 3 PIN SI Connector, Male
JP901B 1-00209-133 34 PIN DRA Connector, Male, Right Angle
JP902 1-00238-161 GPIB SHIELDED Connector, IEEE488, Reverse, R/A, Female
JP903 1-00016-160 RS232 25 PIN D Connector, D-Sub, Right Angle PC, Female
JP1000 1-00170-130 26 PIN ELH Connector, Male
JP1002 1-00039-116 5 PIN, WHITE Header, Amp, MTA-156
N 101 4-00587-425 10KX7 Resistor Network SIP 1/4W 2% (Common)
N 102 4-00334-425 10KX5 Resistor Network SIP 1/4W 2% (Common)
N 501 4-00334-425 10KX5 Resistor Network SIP 1/4W 2% (Common)
N 601 4-00227-425 22KX9 Resistor Network SIP 1/4W 2% (Common)
N 701 4-00270-425 1.0KX5 Resistor Network SIP 1/4W 2% (Common)
N 801 4-00334-425 10KX5 Resistor Network SIP 1/4W 2% (Common)
N 901 4-00221-425 150X5 Resistor Network SIP 1/4W 2% (Common)
N 902 4-00244-421 10KX4 Res. Network, SIP, 1/4W,2% (Isolated)
PC1 7-00809-701 003/015 CONTRLR Printed Circuit Board
Q 401 3-00026-325 2N5210 Transistor, TO-92 Package
Q 701 3-00022-325 2N3906 Transistor, TO-92 Package
Q 702 3-00021-325 2N3904 Transistor, TO-92 Package

9-29
 Parts List
Ref. SRS Part No. Value Description
Q 703 3-00021-325 2N3904 Transistor, TO-92 Package
Q 705 3-00022-325 2N3906 Transistor, TO-92 Package
Q 810 3-00022-325 2N3906 Transistor, TO-92 Package
Q 811 3-00021-325 2N3904 Transistor, TO-92 Package
R 401 4-00034-401 10K Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 402 4-00079-401 4.7K Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 502 4-00034-401 10K Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 601 4-00034-401 10K Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 602 4-00034-401 10K Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 701 4-00088-401 51K Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 702 4-00021-401 1.0K Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 703 4-00034-401 10K Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 704 4-00034-401 10K Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 705 4-00034-401 10K Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 706 4-00034-401 10K Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 707 4-00063-401 3.0K Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 710 4-00080-401 47 Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 711 4-00080-401 47 Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 712 4-00021-401 1.0K Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 713 4-00056-401 22 Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 714 4-00079-401 4.7K Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 801 4-00022-401 1.0M Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 802 4-00062-401 270 Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 808 4-00060-401 240 Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 809 4-00081-401 470 Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 810 4-00031-401 100 Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 811 4-00021-401 1.0K Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 812 4-00021-401 1.0K Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 813 4-00053-401 200 Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 814 4-00038-401 120 Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 901 4-00273-401 5.6K Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 904 4-00090-401 560 Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 905 4-00090-401 560 Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 911 4-00022-401 1.0M Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 912 4-00062-401 270 Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
R 913 4-00021-401 1.0K Resistor, Carbon Film, 1/4W, 5%
SO101 1-00108-150 PLCC 68 TH Socket, THRU-HOLE
SO301 1-00156-150 32 PIN 600 MIL Socket, THRU-HOLE
SO302 1-00156-150 32 PIN 600 MIL Socket, THRU-HOLE
SO303 1-00156-150 32 PIN 600 MIL Socket, THRU-HOLE
SO304 1-00156-150 32 PIN 600 MIL Socket, THRU-HOLE
SO907 1-00232-150 52 PLCC TH Socket, THRU-HOLE
U 101 3-00354-360 80C186-12 Integrated Circuit (Surface Mount Pkg)
U 201 3-00340-340 74ALS373 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 202 3-00340-340 74ALS373 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 203 3-00340-340 74ALS373 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 204 3-00341-340 74ALS245 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 205 3-00341-340 74ALS245 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 206 3-00342-340 74ALS138 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)

9-30
 Parts List
Ref. SRS Part No. Value Description
U 207 3-00343-340 74ALS32 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 208 3-00344-340 74ALS08 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 401 3-00551-341 128KX8-70 STATIC RAM, I.C.
U 402 3-00551-341 128KX8-70 STATIC RAM, I.C.
U 403 3-00551-341 128KX8-70 STATIC RAM, I.C.
U 404 3-00551-341 128KX8-70 STATIC RAM, I.C.
U 501 3-00342-340 74ALS138 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 502 3-00342-340 74ALS138 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 503 3-00342-340 74ALS138 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 504 3-00049-340 74HC74 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 505 3-00347-340 74LS148 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 506 3-00259-340 74HCT373 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 601 3-00049-340 74HC74 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 602 3-00348-340 74HC20 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 603 3-00265-340 74HC595 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 606 3-00044-340 74HC244 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 607 3-00046-340 74HC374 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 608 3-00044-340 74HC244 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 609 3-00046-340 74HC374 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 610 3-00049-340 74HC74 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 611 3-00049-340 74HC74 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 612 3-00039-340 74HC14 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 701 3-00051-340 74HCU04 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 702 3-00900-340 DS12C887 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 703 3-00300-340 74LS374 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 704 3-00263-340 DS75451N Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 705 3-00110-340 MC1489 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 801 3-00051-340 74HCU04 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 802 3-00171-340 74HC191 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 803 3-00277-340 74HC11 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 804 3-00351-340 74HCT299 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 805 3-00280-340 74HC10 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 806 3-00049-340 74HC74 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 807 3-00274-340 74AC74 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 808 3-00303-340 74HC164 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 809 3-00351-340 74HCT299 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 810 3-00598-340 63484P-98 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 811 3-00046-340 74HC374 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 812 3-00046-340 74HC374 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 813 3-00299-341 32KX8-70L STATIC RAM, I.C.
U 814 3-00299-341 32KX8-70L STATIC RAM, I.C.
U 815 3-00262-340 74HC86 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 901 3-00350-340 74ALS04 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 902 3-00645-340 NAT9914BPD Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 903 3-00078-340 DS75160A Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 904 3-00079-340 DS75161A Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 905 3-00247-340 SCN2641 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 906 3-00109-340 MC1488 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
U 907 3-00596-360 DP8473AV Integrated Circuit (Surface Mount Pkg)

9-31
 Parts List
Ref. SRS Part No. Value Description
U 908 3-00040-340 74HC157 Integrated Circuit (Thru-hole Pkg)
X 101 6-00068-620 24.000 MHZ Crystal
X 801 6-00069-620 13.5168 MHZ Crystal
X 901 6-00068-620 24.000 MHZ Crystal
X 902 6-00037-620 3.6864 MHZ Crystal
Z0 0-00126-053 3-1/2" #24 Wire #24 UL1007 Strip 1/4x1/4 Tin
Z0 0-00479-055 1.5"X#30 ORA Wire, Other
Z0 1-00136-171 26 COND Cable Assembly, Ribbon
Z0 1-00137-165 25 PIN IDC Connector, D-Sub, Female

Chassis Assembly Parts List

Ref. SRS Part No. Value Description
C1 5-00219-529 .01U Cap, Monolythic Ceramic, 50V, 20%, Z5U
C2 5-00134-529 100P Cap, Monolythic Ceramic, 50V, 20%, Z5U
C3 5-00219-529 .01U Cap, Monolythic Ceramic, 50V, 20%, Z5U
C4 5-00134-529 100P Cap, Monolythic Ceramic, 50V, 20%, Z5U
C5 5-00219-529 .01U Cap, Monolythic Ceramic, 50V, 20%, Z5U
C6 5-00134-529 100P Cap, Monolythic Ceramic, 50V, 20%, Z5U
C7 5-00219-529 .01U Cap, Monolythic Ceramic, 50V, 20%, Z5U
C8 5-00134-529 100P Cap, Monolythic Ceramic, 50V, 20%, Z5U
C 20 5-00219-529 .01U Cap, Monolythic Ceramic, 50V, 20%, Z5U
C 21 5-00219-529 .01U Cap, Monolythic Ceramic, 50V, 20%, Z5U
Z0 0-00014-002 6J4 Power Entry Hardware
Z0 0-00025-005 3/8" Lugs
Z0 0-00043-011 4-40 KEP Nut, Kep
Z0 0-00048-011 6-32 KEP Nut, Kep
Z0 0-00079-031 4-40X3/16 M/F Standoff
Z0 0-00084-032 36154 Termination
Z0 0-00089-033 4" Tie
Z0 0-00098-042 #6 LOCK Washer, lock
Z0 0-00108-054 1" #26 Wire #26 UL1061
Z0 0-00111-053 1-3/4"#24B Wire #24 UL1007 Strip 1/4x1/4 Tin
Z0 0-00112-053 1-3/4"#24R Wire #24 UL1007 Strip 1/4x1/4 Tin
Z0 0-00116-050 11-3/4"#18 Wire #18 UL1007 Stripped 3/8x3/8 No Tin
Z0 0-00122-053 2-1/4" #24 Wire #24 UL1007 Strip 1/4x1/4 Tin
Z0 0-00123-053 21" #24 Wire #24 UL1007 Strip 1/4x1/4 Tin
Z0 0-00149-020 4-40X1/4PF Screw, Flathead Phillips
Z0 0-00168-023 6-32X5/16R Screw, Roundhead Phillips
Z0 0-00187-021 4-40X1/4PP Screw, Panhead Phillips
Z0 0-00190-030 #8X1" Spacer
Z0 0-00209-021 4-40X3/8PP Screw, Panhead Phillips
Z0 0-00210-020 4-40X5/16PF Screw, Flathead Phillips
Z0 0-00212-021 6-32X2PP Screw, Panhead Phillips
Z0 0-00231-043 1-32, #4 SHOULD Washer, nylon
Z0 0-00241-021 4-40X3/16PP Screw, Panhead Phillips
Z0 0-00248-026 10-32X3/8TRUSSP Screw, Black, All Types
Z0 0-00256-043 #6 SHOULDER Washer, nylon
Z0 0-00257-000 HANDLE3 Hardware, Misc.

9-32
 Parts List
Ref. SRS Part No. Value Description
Z0 0-00259-021 4-40X1/2"PP Screw, Panhead Phillips
Z0 0-00310-010 HEX 3/8-32 Nut, Hex
Z0 0-00330-050 5-1/2" #18 Wire #18 UL1007 Stripped 3/8x3/8 No Tin
Z0 0-00331-031 4-40X5/8 F/F Standoff
Z0 0-00335-000 FAN GUARD 2 Hardware, Misc.
Z0 0-00336-027 #4X1/4PP-B Screw, Sheet Metal
Z0 0-00337-027 #4X3/8PP-B Screw, Sheet Metal
Z0 0-00338-023 2-56X1/4RP Screw, Roundhead Phillips
Z0 0-00340-016 F0204 Power Button
Z0 0-00343-027 #4X1/4PF-B Screw, Sheet Metal
Z0 0-00350-053 2-1/4" #24 Wire #24 UL1007 Strip 1/4x1/4 Tin
Z0 0-00368-053 21" #24 Wire #24 UL1007 Strip 1/4x1/4 Tin
Z0 0-00369-053 21" #24 Wire #24 UL1007 Strip 1/4x1/4 Tin
Z0 0-00372-000 BE CU / FFT Hardware, Misc.
Z0 0-00377-004 SR760/830/780 Knobs
Z0 0-00378-004 CAP 760/830/780 Knobs
Z0 0-00382-000 CARD GUIDE 4.5" Hardware, Misc.
Z0 0-00389-000 PHONO PLUG Hardware, Misc.
Z0 0-00390-024 1-72X1/4 Screw, Slotted
Z0 0-00391-010 1-72X5/32X3/64 Nut, Hex
Z0 0-00394-031 6-32X13/16 Standoff
Z0 0-00407-032 SOLDR SLV RG174 Termination
Z0 0-00415-031 4-40X1/2 M/F Standoff
Z0 0-00416-020 8-32X1/4PF Screw, Flathead Phillips
Z0 0-00417-057 GROMMET STRIP Grommet
Z0 0-00418-000 CLIP, CABLE Hardware, Misc.
Z0 0-00443-000 SWITCH Hardware, Misc.
Z0 0-00466-050 23" #18 BLACK Wire #18 UL1007 Stripped 3/8x3/8 No Tin
Z0 0-00467-050 23" #18 RED Wire #18 UL1007 Stripped 3/8x3/8 No Tin
Z0 0-00500-000 554808-1 Hardware, Misc.
Z0 0-00521-048 3" #18 Wire, #18 UL1015 Strip 3/8 x 3/8 No Tin
Z0 0-00527-050 13" #18 Wire #18 UL1007 Stripped 3/8x3/8 No Tin
Z0 0-00893-026 8-32X3/8PF Screw, Black, All Types
Z0 1-00003-120 BNC Connector, BNC
Z0 1-00033-113 5 PIN, 18AWG/OR Connector, Amp, MTA-156
Z0 1-00073-120 INSL Connector, BNC
Z0 1-00076-171 4 PIN SIL Cable Assembly, Ribbon
Z0 1-00110-130 30 PIN DIL Connector, Male
Z0 1-00120-113 3 PIN, 18AWG/OR Connector, Amp, MTA-156
Z0 1-00131-171 30 COND DIL Cable Assembly, Ribbon
Z0 1-00132-171 34 COND Cable Assembly, Ribbon
Z0 1-00138-130 5 PIN SI Connector, Male
Z0 1-00141-171 5 PIN SIL Cable Assembly, Ribbon
Z0 1-00153-113 11 PIN,18AWG/OR Connector, Amp, MTA-156
Z0 1-00167-169 14/26 IDC-40 CE Cable Assembly, Custom
Z0 1-00168-169 34/60 CE TO IDC Cable Assembly, Custom
Z0 1-00180-170 9418 Cable Assembly, Multiconductor
Z0 1-00181-165 9 PIN STRAIGHT Connector, D-Sub, Female
Z0 1-00183-171 20 COND Cable Assembly, Ribbon

9-33
 Parts List
Ref. SRS Part No. Value Description
Z0 1-00206-133 20 PIN DRA Connector, Male, Right Angle
Z0 1-00208-133 32 PIN DRA Connector, Male, Right Angle
Z0 2-00023-218 DPDT Switch, Panel Mount, Power, Rocker
Z0 2-00034-220 ENA1J-B20 SOFTPOT
Z0 2-00035-222 SAS50B Thermostat
Z0 4-00541-435 130V/1200A Varistor, Zinc Oxide Nonlinear Resistor
Z0 4-00649-455 100K Trim Pot, Cond. Plastic, PC Mount
Z0 4-00681-436 SG240 Thermistor, ICL (Inrush Current Limiter)
Z0 5-00134-529 100P Cap, Monolythic Ceramic, 50V, 20%, Z5U
Z0 6-00004-611 1A 3AG Fuse
Z0 6-00076-600 2" SPKR Misc. Components
Z0 6-00089-610 PLTFM II Transformer
Z0 6-00213-630 2-HOLE Ferrite Beads
Z0 7-00124-720 TRANSCOVER2-MOD Fabricated Part
Z0 7-00254-721 PLTFM-4 Machined Part
Z0 7-00270-735 PLTFM-7 Injection Molded Plastic
Z0 7-00281-720 PLTFM-18 Fabricated Part
Z0 7-00284-720 PLTFM-20 Fabricated Part
Z0 7-00286-720 7" CRT SCREEN Fabricated Part
Z0 7-00287-721 PLTFM-23 Machined Part
Z0 7-00289-720 PLTFM-26 Fabricated Part
Z0 7-00292-720 PLTFM-27 Fabricated Part
Z0 7-00350-720 PLTFM-29 Fabricated Part
Z0 7-00392-720 SR770-4 Fabricated Part
Z0 7-00396-701 PLTFM FP Printed Circuit Board
Z0 7-00403-720 SR770-9 Fabricated Part
Z0 7-00404-720 SR770-10 Fabricated Part
Z0 7-00406-720 SR770-12 Fabricated Part
Z0 7-00407-720 SR770-13 Fabricated Part
Z0 7-00409-720 SR770-15 & 16 Fabricated Part
Z0 7-00414-720 SR770-17 Fabricated Part
Z0 7-00420-740 SR850 Keypad, Conductive Rubber
Z0 7-00421-735 PLTFM-9 THRU 13 Injection Molded Plastic
Z0 7-00427-711 SR850-5 Rear Panel
Z0 7-00431-720 SR770-21/22 Fabricated Part
Z0 7-00432-720 SR770-23 Fabricated Part
Z0 7-00433-720 SR770-24 Fabricated Part
Z0 7-00434-721 SR770-25 Machined Part
Z0 7-00435-720 SR770-26 Fabricated Part
Z0 7-00436-701 FFT/DSP LI Printed Circuit Board
Z0 7-00437-701 FFT/DSP LI Printed Circuit Board
Z0 7-00438-701 SR850 RP Printed Circuit Board
Z0 7-00458-720 SR850-6 Fabricated Part
Z0 7-00459-720 SR850-7 Fabricated Part
Z0 7-00473-720 SR770-27/28/29 Fabricated Part
Z0 7-00520-709 SR850-12 Lexan Overlay
Z0 7-00718-720 SR770-33 Fabricated Part
Z0 8-00034-850 FLOPPY Disk Drive
Z0 8-00040-840 7" Z-AXIS CRT Display

9-34
 Parts List
Ref. SRS Part No. Value Description
Z0 9-00267-917 GENERIC Product Labels

Miscellaneous Parts List

Ref. SRS Part No. Value Description
U 301 3-00450-342 27C010-120 EPROM/PROM, I.C.
U 302 3-00450-342 27C010-120 EPROM/PROM, I.C.
U 303 3-00450-342 27C010-120 EPROM/PROM, I.C.
U 304 3-00450-342 27C010-120 EPROM/PROM, I.C.
Z0 0-00089-033 4" Tie
Z0 0-00159-000 FAN GUARD Hardware, Misc.
Z0 0-00179-000 RIGHT FOOT Hardware, Misc.
Z0 0-00180-000 LEFT FOOT Hardware, Misc.
Z0 0-00185-021 6-32X3/8PP Screw, Panhead Phillips
Z0 0-00187-021 4-40X1/4PP Screw, Panhead Phillips
Z0 0-00204-000 REAR FOOT Hardware, Misc.
Z0 0-00223-029 6-32X3/8TR PH Screw, Truss Phillips
Z0 0-00248-026 10-32X3/8TRUSSP Screw, Black, All Types
Z0 0-00259-021 4-40X1/2"PP Screw, Panhead Phillips
Z0 0-00315-021 6-32X7/16 PP Screw, Panhead Phillips
Z0 1-00182-171 32 COND Cable Assembly, Ribbon
Z0 1-00183-171 20 COND Cable Assembly, Ribbon
Z0 7-00147-720 BAIL Fabricated Part
Z0 7-00394-720 SR770-6 Fabricated Part
Z0 7-00395-720 SR770-7 Fabricated Part
Z0 7-00402-720 SR770-8 Fabricated Part
Z0 7-00405-720 SR770-11 Fabricated Part
Z0 7-00408-720 SR770-14 Fabricated Part

9-35
 Parts List

NOTICE: Schematics may not show current part numbers or values. Refer to parts
list for current part numbers or values.

9-36